How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing with April Beach (Episode 316)

    How to Price Your Content or Courses for Licensing


    Who This Show is for and Why It’s Important
    This episode is a must-listen for coaches, consultants, and content creators eager to explore the lucrative world of licensing. April Beach delves into the specialized area of licensing intellectual property, particularly focusing on content, trainings, systems, and courses. This topic is crucial as it unlocks new revenue streams and allows for the expansion of business reach and impact.
    What We Cover and What You Will Learn
    April Beach guides you through the practical steps of pricing your curriculum for licensing. You’ll learn the importance of understanding your operational costs, including software, team expenses, and the logistics of content distribution. The discussion goes further into calculating the Return on Investment (ROI) of your content, emphasizing both tangible training benefits and lifestyle improvements. April introduces two main pricing strategies: bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing, explaining how these can be applied based on the specific needs and outcomes of potential licensees.
    Key Takeaways
    1. Understand Operational Costs: Know the expenses associated with licensing your content, like software and team support.
    2. Calculate the ROI: Assess both the tangible and lifestyle impacts of your content.
    3. Pricing Strategies: Learn two methods – bulk pricing and ‘Amplify ROI’ pricing.
    4. Customized Approach: Tailor the pricing based on the licensee’s specific situation and outcomes.
    5. Value Communication: Communicate the measurable value and transformation your content brings to the licensee.
    After listening to this episode, you’ll be equipped with insights and strategies to confidently price and license your intellectual property, enhancing both your business growth and the value you deliver to your clients.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:46] Hi there and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 316 and we are diving into a topic today that I know that many of you have had on your mind. You actually hunt us down for the answer to this question. So the question that we’re answering today is how do you actually price your training or your program or your curriculum or your content to license it To other companies, what do you charge for that?

    [00:01:13] Where does it even start? And in this episode, I’m going to introduce you to the strategy of pricing. You are here because you’re probably a coach or a consultant or a subject matter expert, and you’re certainly in the right place. As you know, my name is April Beach and me and my team work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to help you license your material and give you all the steps.

    [00:01:37] Even down to the pricing calculators of releasing your content, expanding your reach and increasing your profit through licensing. And so you’re here because you’re good at what you do. Let’s just frankly talk about that first. The fact that you are even in a place where your work. Has made a significant impact on a B2C side, whether it’s in programs that you’ve delivered directly or workshops or consulting you’ve already done.

    [00:02:04] And now you want to release it into the hands of other companies and possibly even other companies are coming to you asking you for your content. So congratulations on being absolutely top notch at what you do and having proven systems, methodologies that other people want, and frankly, not everybody is there.

    [00:02:26] So licensing is an advanced move. You can tap into all of our resources we have here for you. And if you haven’t yet, the best place for you to start and to get more information so that you can license your program successfully Is by visiting licensing launchpad. com. It’s a short little mini masterclass.

    [00:02:47] You can go over there and I’m going to unpack for you how to get started with licensing, even what the top 10 industries are looking for. It’s a great starter place for you. If you are ready to go in licensing. You can always shoot us a message by visiting suite life coat. com, and we will partner with you and help you to be successful at that.

    [00:03:06] So this episode, number 316, we are answering the question of how, how do you even prices? And I’m going to actually break out the steps and the questions that you need to answer before you are able to. Price your licensing offer and training, and then I’m actually going to break out the two different ways to actually price your program so you can consider which one is best for you.

    [00:03:28] So if that’s what you’re looking for, stick with me here. We’re going to dive into all the things here in this episode. Okay, a little bit of a foundation. Uh, if you have never heard about licensing before, please go back into our podcast resources, and I have many trainings. You can even visit our YouTube channel, where I have trainings about licensing, how to get started with licensing, what is licensing, and we have so many resources available to you.

    [00:03:53] But let’s talk about what is the definition of licensing. You’re probably actually familiar with licensing. Licensing songs, licensing art, licensing. Images for your marketing, uh, licensing brands. So for example, let’s talk about the, the biggest brand that everybody knows, Mickey Mouse, right? So your child may have a Mickey Mouse backpack that Jansport licensed permission to put Mickey Mouse on a Jansport backpack, but who owns Mickey Mouse?

    [00:04:21] Disney Corporation, right? That is an example of licensing. By the way, that is not the type of licensing coach I am. That is not why you’re here. I know that. We’re talking about something different. We’re talking about a secret scale strategy through licensing, and this secret is why people come and seek us out, and why businesses are All over the world work with us to learn, to license their materials.

    [00:04:45] And that is licensing your content, licensing, your trainings, licensing, your system, your thought process, your framework, your courses. That’s the kind of licensing you and I are talking about here. And I can’t wait to dive into this with you and at least start to skim the surface of this first. burning question that I already know that you want to know the answer to immediately.

    [00:05:10] So in order to answer the question of how do you actually price your curriculum for licensing, first, there are some things, some very important things that you need to know. And some of these are common sense, let’s just be honest, but my job is to make sure that I’m filling in all the holes for you so you don’t do this wrong in the most I can do here for you on this free podcast, obviously giving away free information and, uh, it’s, it’s very valuable what we’re talking about here today.

    [00:05:42] So the first thing is you need to be able to identify your operational costs for licensing this. This is back to a lot of business 101. But frankly, you would be shocked at how many coaches and consultants out there don’t know their numbers. So the first thing you need to do is you need to understand your operational overhead of how much it’s gonna cost you in hard costs.

    [00:06:10] We’re not talking about your sweat equity here. Yeah, we’re talking hard cost of how much money your company is going to have to spend to maintain the release of your content into licensing. And here are some different areas that can control your costs. So where, first of all, is the training content going to live?

    [00:06:35] Does that training content live in your LMS or is that when you release your content to another company or another entrepreneur, you know, whatever that is? Who houses the content? There are hard costs with software. They’re hard operational costs with that. You need to know your company costs. Another example of this is is teams.

    [00:06:56] So are you’re in part of the release of your content to another organization or corporation or even another entrepreneur, whoever you plan to release your content to, which is Totally a different strategy. We can’t even get into today. The question is, is how much time is it going to take you and your team to actually facilitate that release?

    [00:07:19] Well, And will you or your team be required to provide ongoing operational support? So those are two really two of quite a few different numbers, but those are two really hard numbers that you can’t change. And if you’re trying to price your program for licensing and you don’t know those numbers, the very first thing you should be doing is going back to the organization or the potential licensee that you’re talking to and Getting the answers to those questions.

    [00:07:51] Where does the content live? Who is managing the, the, the it and the customer service and the onboarding of this, you need to know the expectations of you and your team so that you can understand the hard numbers. We aren’t even talking about profit. We aren’t even talking about the value of the actual program yet.

    [00:08:10] Step number one, there are some hardcore numbers that you need to know and before you can price any sort of licensing program for release, you need to know them. Other factors that will come into your pricing are legal costs and making sure that you have a correct licensing contract. By the way, we give all of our clients our licensing contracts template and we help our clients to actually customize that and then they can take it over to an attorney for legal advice.

    [00:08:35] So those are some shortcuts that our company can provide to you. But they’re very important costs, and you don’t ever want to cut legal corners in the process of licensing your intellectual property. So just make sure that you know what your costs are and that you can anticipate those costs before you give an organization a price for your program.

    [00:08:57] Now, there are other factors, and I want to break these apart for you. So what is the ROI of what you deliver? First of all, there’s two Basic forms of ROI that your content can deliver and that your content can deliver both. First of all, your content can deliver an actual tangible training benefit of some kind.

    [00:09:21] So you’re up leveling a skill, you’re up leveling, uh, the way, the way. People do things, you’re teaching a method or a process or you’re giving a system. You’re actually leveling up information. You’re feeding people or you’re feeding a company, a wonderful, amazing systems and processes that level up their knowledge, their implementation, their information, their content, their training, their skills.

    [00:09:44] That’s one side. And then, and I’m going to do a whole nother podcast for you guys on this. Cause I get questions about this all the time. The other side is your program can. also benefit lifestyle. So your program may have a training benefit, generally speaking, or it may also have a lifestyle benefit.

    [00:10:01] This is really important to understand. One technically is not more valuable than the other. So if you, for example, have a program that teaches people how to increase sales, teaches sales teams in an organization, the exact thing to say, and it gives a sales process. That fits in an actual skill upgrade.

    [00:10:23] If your program is helping to increase wellness and mindfulness and lifestyle, that is a lifestyle benefit in both are as important, but you need to do the work and find out the ROI. Every single thing has a number. Okay, not talking about sales numbers. Every single solution has a correlated number that it can relate to that affects the bottom line of every single company or the bottom line of every single individual.

    [00:11:01] It and when I’m talking about bottom line, it’s not always dollars in increase in bottom line could be more time. It could be, uh, saving frustration. It could be helping parents communicate with teenagers. It could be preparing for a baby, or it could be equity, diversity and inclusion and understanding how to level up an organization with your training.

    [00:11:23] You know, there’s so many different parts of what you do, and it benefits in two different categories, either a training category or a lifestyle benefit category. Pretty generalized here just for the sake of this podcast. But step number one, know your operational expenses. Step number two, be able, you have to be able to articulate the ROI that your program actually delivers.

    [00:11:44] And you need to find the numbers, the percentages, the statistics out there that relate to the solution you provide. And then step number three is to actually price the program itself. And I told you that I would give you our two main pricing formulas here on this show. And here is my promise delivered.

    [00:12:01] There are two ways to price your program for licensing. Number one is bulk pricing, and number two is what we call Amplify ROI pricing. And that one particularly is named after our Amplify licensing accelerator and program. Now, let me explain to you the difference of these. Bulk pricing is pretty general, exactly what you’re thinking.

    [00:12:25] You are going to reduce the cost based on the number of seats in a program. So if you are selling at retail, let’s say your program’s 1, 000 retail per person. If an organization wants to buy 1, 000 seats to 1, 000 a program, how much are you willing to reduce that cost for that organization without undervaluing the transformation that you deliver?

    [00:12:48] So bulk pricing. Pretty straightforward. You know, I don’t ever want you guys winging anything with pricing because there are many other things that come into a factor with pricing. But for the sake of this podcast, most of you guys are probably thinking, Oh, well, do I just bolt price it? Those are, those are the questions I get when we connect with new businesses.

    [00:13:08] Uh, it’s usually, do I bolt price it? And the answer is yes, you can absolutely do that. They’re. Tons of other factors, including value and operational expenses and ROI. And are you collecting royalties? Uh, and all the other things that you could add into that, like your consulting time and workshops you may teach, or maybe you’re doing a keynote.

    [00:13:29] There are so many other things that factor in that, but pricing structure, number one is bulk pricing. We do have a bulk pricing calculator that we give to all of our clients. If that’s something that you would like to access. And then the other side of it, this one is a bit more complicated. It’s actually my favorite, and the reason why it’s my favorite is because when you present this pricing structure to a potential licensee for your program, there’s nothing that they can ever say to you to say, this price is wrong or this price is too much.

    [00:14:03] There’s nothing that they’re ever going to be able to do based on how we use this Amplify ROI pricing calculator. And here is what it is at a high level. You price your program based on the ROI. Whether, remember a minute ago we talked about whether it’s a training ROI or a lifestyle ROI, and it doesn’t necessarily always equal hard numbers, you price your program based on the ROI that you reasonably believe that your program can deliver.

    [00:14:39] And the coolest part about this, you guys, it’s, I’m going to geek out on numbers now, which this is the only area of business that I actually geek out on numbers. Let’s be real. Um, and, uh, you know, not a huge numbers fan here until it comes to something like licensing and pricing and, and profit. But the reason why this is so cool is because you can actually customize the ROI based on every single company’s specific use case.

    [00:15:11] So you can say this number of, you have this number of people in your organization that are affected by this problem. And based on your organization’s numbers, very specifically, we are going to charge you this because we reasonably believe we can create change for your organization based on your Own numbers in what’s so cool about this amplify pricing calculator in when you just generally speaking, when you are able to articulate what your program delivers and then be able to say, and here you go, this is your organization, or this is your small business, or this is your corporation, or this is your university.

    [00:16:00] And here, here’s what is being affected in your sphere and with based on your numbers, you literally take the potential licensees own numbers, whether it’s numbers based on people or numbers based on the statistics or numbers based on sales or numbers based on attrition, whatever that is that that organization is struggling with and the, your program obviously affects and solves and we can literally take the organization’s own numbers and show them back to them.

    [00:16:29] And it’s such a cool thing in being able to have the power to sit across the virtual, which is really what it is now table from an organization and saying, I see where you guys are struggling here. I want to be able to partner with you. I want to bring this solution that we know is proven. We know it’s transformational, which we have to know that little little prerequisite here.

    [00:16:51] If your program and your content isn’t transformational yet, we need to level that up. And sit across from them and say, here you go. Based on your numbers. This is what we have and we want to create this change for you. And we want to, we want to help you do this. That is the Amplify ROI pricing formula.

    [00:17:11] And so let’s kind of recap what we talked about here today. We talked about how to price your program for licensing. No joke. You guys, this is the number one thing that I get people reaching out to me on LinkedIn and Instagram and sending us messages saying, I’ve been approached by a company and they, you know, I need you to help me price this very, very fast.

    [00:17:32] Within our own client private ecosystem, we do help with those type of emergency wonderful opportunities. But here on the podcast, let’s be real. I can’t I can’t give you the exact answers to that. And I would be doing you a disservice if I did. I haven’t even heard your voice yet. So I’m giving you as much as I can to really equip you to move in the right direction to start thinking strategically about licensing so that You don’t shoot yourself in the foot so that you don’t undersell yourself.

    [00:18:00] Um, and let me tell you a quick case study of a client of ours because I want you to feel this way as well. She came to us and she was teaching a 6, 000 workshop to an organization. She had amazing systems and processes and materials and she’d been a consultant to corporations for a really, really long time.

    [00:18:19] And based on her content, we were able to repackage it. And represent her program out using a combination of the bulk calculator and the amplify pricing calculator. And she was able to turn around and license this program for 298, 000. And she said to me, she’s like, I never would have ever asked for that much.

    [00:18:44] And so that might be what you’re thinking. You know, when we talk to clients with licensing, sometimes there’s. A big mindset block in this where you’re thinking, how can I go from selling something that might have been, you know, even like a 10, 000 strategy or a 1, 000 course or shoot, even if it’s a 9 course for heaven’s sakes, how can I go from that?

    [00:19:10] To licensing it to an organization and asking them for 100, 000 or a million dollars for it. And the answer to that is understanding number one, the measurable value of your work. Number two, the tangible transformation for the end user, for the licensee and the end user. So let’s, wow, I should do a whole nother podcast episode for you guys on this, but there’s a difference between your licensee and your end user, right?

    [00:19:39] When we’re moving into a licensing business model, and you’re, you’re leveling up in this B2B landscape, your end user is, is not the one you’re selling to. It’s different. The licensee is different than the end user. But that’s step number two, is being able to communicate the tangible, predictable, measurable results for the licensee.

    [00:20:01] Not even just the end user for the licensee the company that’s actually licensing your content from you and then being able to sit in front Of them showing them their own numbers and confidently and reasonably pricing based on research based Pricing methodologies in once you have this if you in any way struggle with mindset.

    [00:20:23] I can’t charge this much. How on earth am I going to charge as much blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. Then understanding the process of going through in pricing, your IP pricing, your trainings and your programs and adjusting that price accordingly to each one of your licensees. It’s just going to wipe out. Any of the guesswork that you’ve ever had, and you’re going to be able to confidently stand on your work, on your genius, on your intellectual property, knowing without a shadow of a doubt that you are going to deliver the predicted results that the program says that it will deliver in a reasonable, ethical pricing manner.

    [00:20:57] And guess what? When you’re done with that pricing, you may look at those numbers and say, that’s a half a million dollars. But you’re going to feel so good because you know, just like my client knew when we went from 6, 000 to 298, 000, she knew that we’d done the work. She saw the formula on paper. She knew the ROI because she’d done the work to unpack the process of Pricing and there was never a question and guess what happened when she went, she was so nervous to go back to this organization and say, yes, you know, here you go.

    [00:21:29] Here’s a proposal. It’s 298, 000. The guy looked at her and he goes, you know, across from zoom, you looked at her and he goes, Oh yeah. Okay. Yeah. That sounds great. Okay. Well I’ll get back to you later on today. This looks great. I mean, she probably could have charged even a lot more than she did. And her mind was blown about the value that she provided.

    [00:21:49] And I mean, at the end of the day, that’s what we’re all here to do, right? I’m here creating this podcast episode for you to, to create value. And to pour into you and to help create a change in your thinking and your business so that you can move on to do the work that you’re really called to do. You’re here to learn how to price it so you can create value and pour in to the people that you’re supposed to serve and expand your reach.

    [00:22:17] But both of us, you and me, we truly deserve to be compensated from the years and the blood, sweat, and tears and the research and the experience that we’ve gathered in order to do what we both do. You deserve to be compensated for your work. I deserve to be compensated for my work. We’ve worked hard to earn that.

    [00:22:39] But in the same thing, we always lead with providing value. And when was my last thing I’ll say to you here in this episode, when you lead with always serving first, no one will ever question pouring into the value that you request. Never. They’re never going to question that because they truly believe that you have their best interest in mind because you actually do.

    [00:23:06] That’s the difference maker. And you can actually take this pricing lesson in this strategy and apply it to everything that you’re doing, whether you’re pricing a course or a mastermind or a retreat or anything else as well. That’s how we price these programs and that’s how you’re going to be successful.

    [00:23:24] I hope and know that you found value in this. I appreciate you being here again. My name is April Beach. We work with subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants to build million dollar offer ecosystems and help you license your IP. and expand your reach to build your business and your life to the next level.

    [00:23:45] So if that’s the strategy that you need and you are looking for, here are two different resources that I will provide for you to get started. The first one is just go over to our website at sweetlifeco. com. Again, that’s sweet life. Co. com. You can find an application to apply to work with us or be in any of our programs, our licensing accelerator, any of our workshops at any time, or you can dive right into our very first kickoff training.

    [00:24:13] It’s called licensing launch pad, and it’s an awesome little micro training that takes you through even deciding who you want to sell it to. And I even break down what industries are buying from you. And that program can be accessed by visiting licensinglaunchpad. com. Again that’s licensinglaunchpad.

    [00:24:34] com. And if you found value in this episode, please share it with your friends. We are just going on year number seven of producing this podcast and I refuse advertisers. Because I think they’re very annoying and they, and they break our thought process. So because of that, we really appreciate you just clicking the up arrow and sharing this show on LinkedIn or on Instagram and just helping us expand the reach of our work.

    [00:25:00] Thank you so much for listening and I will talk to you guys soon.




    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy with April Beach (Episode 315)

    Scale Your Coaching Business: B2B Transition Made Easy


    Who This Show Is For and Why It’s Important:
    This episode is crafted for you, the seasoned consultant or coach, who’s considering moving from B2C to B2B. It’s essential for those of you who have proven success with clients and have developed systematic approaches in your work. This is about taking your impact and profitability to the next level while easing your workload.
    In this episode, we specifically guide you through developing and implementing two core strategies for transitioning to B2B consulting. First, we focus on creating a certification program to train other professionals in your field, turning potential competitors into your clients. This approach leverages your expertise and establishes a collaborative network. Second, we explore the process of licensing your unique methodologies to these professionals. This strategy not only extends the reach of your work but also enhances your role as a thought leader in the industry, all while reducing your direct workload.
    • Developing a Certification Program: You’ll learn to transform competitors into clients by creating a training or certification program in your expertise.
    • Licensing Your Expertise: Discover how licensing your methodologies can broaden your business scope and reinforce your thought leadership.
    • Reducing Workload, Increasing Impact: Understand how these strategies can lessen your day-to-day tasks while boosting your impact and income.
    • Establishing Thought Leadership: Insights on how to position yourself as an industry thought leader.
    • Fostering a Professional Community: Emphasizes the value of building a network of professionals using your methods towards shared goals.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:
    April Beach (00:00.854)
    All right, let's dive into the nitty gritty of this episode here. So we're talking about the opportunity for you to move from B2C consulting to B2B business coaching and strategic consulting. And first of all, I wanna unpack who is this for. So this episode in general is for those of you guys who are established consultants. You're an established coach.
    or you're an established subject matter expert and you have already been working with clients sometime. You have a track record of getting clients results and you've already created systems and methods and processes to get clients results. You've used these, you may have courses and trainings and retreats that you host or one-on-one consulting sessions, one-on-group consulting sessions. Basically, you have done that side of your business. You have built your business, you're good at what you do, you have your offers and your programs.
    That is who this episode is for. And frankly, that is who's ready for this conversation. Now, when we're talking about moving B2B, there are some things that I want you to be thinking about because it sounds really sexy and you're probably seeing other people do it and you think that it could be really lucrative, but I'm here to unpack the back end of it as well so that you're really sure whether or not this is a good decision for yourself. So here are some markers.
    that you may identify when you're ready to move over to B2B Coaching. So the first thing is, is are you still super happy and excited about working with your clients? So if you...
    They're kind of getting into this place where you've been serving clients a long time. You've been doing what you've been doing and you're ready for something new. You're ready to move up for a new challenge or maybe another level of impact, another level of significance that you're having and you're feeling like you want to impact more people. You're probably thinking, oh, well, I'm going to be doing less people in this way. You're actually not. I'll explain it to you. But you want to do something higher, bigger, more.
    April Beach (01:59.242)
    and maybe you just are ready for a totally different challenge, then B2B consulting is a great opportunity for you. If you've done that, you've been there, you've done that, you feel like your programs are on a roll and you want to level up your business, level up your thought leadership, level up your personal brand, level up your business brand and level up your profit, B2B is really the way to go. Here is the warning though. If you still want to be completely hands-on,
    in B2C, so you still want to be the primary person delivering all your programs. You just love your whole business to consumer side of your business. Even if you're working with other coaches, whatever that is, you love it, love it, love it, and you're not ready to get out of it, then maybe it's not quite the time for you. And then another consideration for you, when we're talking about moving over to B2B is, are you ready?
    and hear me out when I say this, it might give you like little heart palpitations, are you ready to allow other people to, other coaches like you perhaps, to access your materials, to access your systems, to access your IP, to access your, you know, all of your SOPs and your processes and your trainings. Does the thought of that make you super excited or are you like, oh no?
    I don't want anybody seeing all of my assets, all of my IP and my gold. I could never imagine another company having access to my stuff and me not being the one to actually distribute it. So those are just some things I want you to think about. There are no right or wrong answers there, but my job, my responsibility, my passion for what I do in our industry is pouring in all these strategic thinking objectives for you so that you can make smart choices for yourself.
    So those are just some of the things I want you to be thinking of. When we're talking about moving from a B to C business model and moving over to a B to B business model, we have to take in a lot of considerations. And here's some very specific questions I would love for you to address for yourself. So first of all is, what do you wanna be known for? What do you wanna be known for in your space? Do you wanna be known as this person, this front runner, or
    April Beach (04:20.514)
    Do not really care if your name is all over everything, but maybe it's more important for your methods and your teachings to get in the hands of more people. That is one thing I just want you to be thinking of. And then the next thing, like I talked about, is what are you excited about? What work do you wanna do? What are you really excited about creating new things or working with new people or helping to make an impact in your industry in a different way? If you're excited about that, that is really an important indicator that you're ready possibly to move into B2B coaching.
    And then the third thing is how important is it to you to expand the reach of your work? So let's kind of unpack what this looks like. When you are working B2C, even if you are doing huge launches of group programs, you're still only impacting the end users of that program, whether you have 10 or 20 or 20,000 people in your program.
    You're still only impacting 10 or 20 or 20,000 people with your program. When you go to a B2B model, let's say for example, you were going to give another consultant an opportunity to share your program's content, your work only lies in the effort to bring those other consultants and coaches up to speed.
    So let's say you have five different consultants and coaches that you're working with on a B2B capacity and you're allowing them to share and distribute your work. And now let's say that each one of those coaches had 20 or 200 or 20,000 people in their program. Now look at what you've done. It's basic math that you are creating an exponential reach with your work.
    And a couple of cool things happen when we do that. Number one, your workload actually tends to be reduced. Number two, you get to be elevated to that thought leader space. Number three, you get to work with more go-getters, gung-ho people that are really passionate about the same things you are and support them. And you don't have to be the one, usually in all the marketing and the nitty gritty and some of the really tiring work that tends to...
    April Beach (06:43.954)
    happen and burn out coaches and consultants and service experts. You don't have to be a part of that anymore. And so moving from B to C to B to B could be a really great option for you. And if those things make you excited, then you're in the right place with this podcast. You're also in the right place for working with us at The Suite Life Company. This is what we do. We help establish coaches.
    and subject matter experts and consultants develop your next level programs and sell them B2B through licensing and certification and other ways we can expand your roots. So now what I want to do for you as promised is I want to unpack the most basic but super powerful. So just because it's basic, don't think it's not good. As a matter of fact, we have a handful of clients that have completely
    revolutionized their entire business model with these steps I'm giving you here. And they have never been happier. As a matter of fact, I just talked to a client yesterday and we worked with her to change her business model from B to C to B to B. And she literally sent me a message yesterday. She said, April, I have never.
    been more happy in the work I'm doing. I've never felt like I was really able to make the impact I was called to make and here I am with these simple changes and thank you so much and it's just amazing. As a matter of fact, she actually graduated out of our program. She doesn't even need us anymore because she is out in soaring and flying on her own and making this impact. So just because what I'm gonna tell you is simple, please take it to heart.
    because this is what people pay me a lot of money to tell them, right? And so that's what our podcast insiders get. So the first business model to move you to B2B from B2C is what I call a one-two punch. So that would be creating a training program for your competition. This is what we call turning your clients, or turning your competition into your clients.
    April Beach (08:49.346)
    Let me say that again, because it's a good punch line and I messed it up. This is what I call turning your competition into your clients. So we can literally take your competition and bring them into an ecosystem and you can create a certificate or a certification program and actually certify other professionals in your established methodology, or you can certify them to use your tools or your process.
    So we are duplicating you. So step one is the building of that certification program, bringing other people that used to be your competition now into an amazing ecosystem of all these different businesses and might be working with similar audience. We may have seen that they're like, quote unquote, competitors in the past, but now all of a sudden you're creating a collective of like-minded people that are all working towards and achieving this goal. And they all understand one thing.
    One very important powerful thing, they all know your processes, your methods, your frameworks, your systems, and they're all able to tell people that they are certified or trained or accredited or whatever words you wanna use. We're not gonna get into all the language here in this. There are ramifications for the language you use, good and bad, but they are trained in your methodology.
    And so what this does for us is it helps us to open up this entire world in where you are working with these people, you're having these mastermind meetings, you're training people in your ways and your ninja skills, and you are giving them all of your steps and tools and processes. And you know who this is really great for? This is really great for your competition that isn't quite to where you were in business.
    Like they always looked up to you. So you're thinking, wow, you know, who would wanna do this? Let me tell you who. They're usually businesses that have not achieved the level of success that you have with your clients. And so they're looking for these shortcuts. They're looking for ways where they can provide their clients with better results. And then therefore, now my dogs are barking.
    April Beach (10:58.57)
    And then therefore, when they provide better results to their clients, then they make more money, and then it's also expanding the reach of your work. So when we're talking about a one-two punch, step number one is creating an opportunity for other businesses to become certified or trained on your methodology, and they can take that into their own program services, businesses, courses, retreats, masterminds, memberships, whatever that is.
    And in the process, we're elevating you as that thought leader still, you're making more money, but you're not the one having to deliver it. So that's step number one. And then the one, two, here you go. Here's the right hook, left hook of this business strategy is then on the after that, after you have validated that they're good at what they do, they can follow along the processes, then you give them an opportunity to license your materials and actually use your trainings.
    coaching steps Worksheets all of your materials within their own consulting programs. So first of all you train them in your ways Like Star Wars padawan I have to use that reference because I just finished watching all of the Star Wars Soca series with my teenage boys and if you are a parent and you have boys and you know exactly what I'm talking about so that you know in Star Wars they have like that
    the Jedi and they have like the padawan. Well, you can create that. You can create these little padawans with your methodology and all of your thoughts and teach them what you know. So instead of competing, you're creating a collective of amazing professionals that are all centered around using your genius work to elevate their clients. And then part two, after they're certified or accredited or they've received the stamp of approval or whatever you end up calling it.
    Then you give them permission to use your materials in their own business, and that is called a license. So there's a separate, there's the certification and the training period first, and then there is the licensing period where you give them permission to utilize your materials in their programs with their people. In this, by far, my friends, is the quickest, fastest way to transition you from B2C to B2B.
    April Beach (13:21.046)
    Here are a couple of things that we know. The people that admire you the most, the businesses that are really tracking and following along with what you're doing because they're trying to be like you or they're trying to level up, they're on your email list. They're following what you're doing. When you and when our clients in the past have put out a statement saying, we're about to do something totally different. We're about to take our program system training and allow for other
    coaches and consultants to learn it, to access it, to see on the inside. And I'm gonna teach you my ways. It is gangbusters. All of a sudden, literally in one email or one social post or one video, we have taken you from swimming in that red ocean, competing with all these other people to elevating you.
    catapulting you, you're on a yacht, you're on a parasail flying over the water, you are in a totally different realm where all of a sudden you are leading the way because you're thinking differently. The definition of a thought leader is not somebody who's just talking about all this stuff all the time, it's somebody that's truly thinking and working in a different way and presenting their ideas in their business and in questioning things and disrupting things. You're literally leading a different way of thinking.
    And when you transition from B2C to B2B in this way, we are instantly elevating you to that thought leader platform and people are gonna follow you because they see that you're doing something different and they see that you're including them and you're not trying to bury them and smush them, that you're literally collectively working to build a future of profit for everybody. And that is one of the most powerful things that I can share with you about moving from B2B to B2C over to B2B.
    So let's kind of recap what we talked about in this episode. It's a short power packed episode, but again, my job here is to introduce you to the world of B2B strategic consulting, licensing, next level offers and programs. And so in this, you're gonna get from us here on the podcast strategic thought processes for those of you guys that are ready for these next levels of business strategy. And of course,
    April Beach (15:35.87)
    We're here for you when you are ready for the coaching and you're ready to dive in, you're ready to get our processes to be successful in this. Of course, you know where to find us at and we're ready and willing to work with you. We can't wait to work with you. But my job here is just to get you to think differently, especially in an oversaturated consulting and coaching space. So.
    With that being said, what we talked about today is if you have an established consulting business, coaching business, you're a subject matter expert, you're a service-based entrepreneur of some kind. And you've been doing what you've been doing, you have great processes, you have great methods, you have great steps of service, they've gotten people results in the past, and you're kind of over it. You're ready, you're kind of wondering what's next, or I'm getting burned out.
    I'm ready to make more money. I'm ready to help more people. I'm ready to expand the reach of my work. I'm ready to get out of marketing and online funnels and all of these things that tend to be incredibly exhausting for really hardworking coaching and consultants that are trying to continue to scale their business. If that's where you are, a consideration of moving to B2B is something that would be really, really good for you to take a moment and think about.
    And today on this episode, I have shared with you the one-two punch of a business model that you can use, that many of our clients use, to go from this B2C to B2B. And that business model is, first part of it, is creating the access to your systems for other coaches and consultants. Creating a community, creating collaboration. You know, we've talked about this for the last three years, is that community and collaboration of partnerships
    is the future of business growth. It's not competition, it's collaboration. That sounds like such a cheesy Instagram line, but here I'm showing you the business model of how that works. It's not a cheesy Instagram line. It's a business strategy. And I want you to have the best of the best of the business strategies to elevate the work and to be rewarded financially and in your lifestyle for the work that you've done.
    April Beach (17:47.966)
    So that first punch is creating an environment to bring in other people that could benefit from understanding your processes and your methods and giving them access to it. And then part two is then for maybe all the people or a small portion of the people, licensing them the ability to even utilize your materials and your trainings, your recordings, your teachings, you can even give them.
    And this is like the last bonus tip I'll give you. I'll share with you a little story. I have been doing this since 2008 in my own business. One of the reasons why I'm qualified to teach people how to do this, I've been doing this for a very long time. And at one point in time, at first, I just gave other businesses the recordings of my classes. And I said, Ayanna, you can distribute these in your business. But then I realized, just like we want you thinking about, we're always creating offers and programs that is the best.
    for our people, we wanna serve our people. And so in that same line of thinking, even though they used to be what you consider competition, they're my clients now. And I was thinking, what would really be the best for them? What would really make these consultants, these coaches look so good to their clients? And what would make them make more money? Because when they make more money, I make more money. And I realized that I wanted to literally give them.
    all of my curriculum and even give them the ability to re-record my classes with their face, their voice, even in some cases their company logo on them. And as soon as I realized how to package my IP in a way that would allow for other businesses to succeed and make more money and it was all about them and I wasn't trying to hold on to so much control.
    because I was ready to do something else and I was ready for the next level of my life and my business. So I was okay with that. That is when all the floodgates were opened and everybody just got so freaking blessed. It was absolutely incredible. And the profits had been rolling in ever since. And so those are some of the things I want you to be thinking about here as we talk about this transition. But now that you've listened to this whole episode and we've spent about 20 minutes together.
    April Beach (20:03.938)
    The most important thing is coming back to the beginning. Are you ready for this? Are you holding on to your work that you wanna be the only one teaching what you teach and how you teach it and the way you teach it? And if that's where you are, that's awesome. It's the identification that that's where you are. You could be there forever and that is absolutely so cool for you. But if you're to that place where you're like, yeah, you know, I think I can kind of loosen this up a little bit and I think I would be okay with others understanding my secrets.
    my intellectual property, my secret sauce, my unique method and framework that, you know, is just absolutely delivering guaranteed transformations. As soon as you realize that it's okay and you're ready to open up that grip a little bit and you're ready to think bigger, think at the next level, think about a more reach and how many more people you can impact and how much more money you can make and you're ready for that next level of your business, then this is a great.
    move for you to consider. And as we're here kind of a little bit towards the beginning of this new year, when you're listening to this, we're gonna be focusing a lot here in 2024 on the Suite Life podcast, unpacking a lot of strategies that we work with our very high level private clients and with clients in our Amplify ecosystem. I'm gonna be sharing some of these things with you because I wanna introduce this, I wanna introduce you to some of these things that you may not be aware of.
    that I know are gonna make a huge impact in your business. And this is one of those episodes that could literally, if you listen to this and you think on it and you start taking action on it, this is one of those episodes that could be a complete life changer for you in your business moving forward. And I hope that you give this particular episode the attention that it deserves and to give yourself permission to ask yourself those questions that we talked about in the beginning, you can always replay this. And of course,
    We are here for you. When you're ready to make these transitions and you want a strategic partner, to think about all the ins and outs, to help you decide what you give away and what you keep, and to give you the frameworks and the processes to actually build this next level of your business, I would love for you to reach out to us. You can find all of our resources by visiting We have programs, we have accelerators, we have retreats, we have one-on-one, and we have amazing workshops that will bring you and your business into this next area.
    April Beach (22:30.486)
    Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I can't wait to drop more trainings for you this year and all the experts we have lined up to work with you this year. And we just really appreciate you sharing the show with your friends.



    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 314)

    How to Create Impactful VIP Days: Step-by-Step Strategies for Coaches


    Episode Bonus: 
    Thinking about selling VIP days and don’t know how to start? You’re in the right place! In this engaging episode, we sit down with Amy Yamada, a seasoned expert in the coaching realm, to explore the ins and outs of creating and offering VIP days. This episode is a goldmine for coaches and consultants eager to inject a fresh, personalized approach into their services. If you’re looking to set yourself apart in the coaching market with offerings that truly resonate with your clients, offering VIP Days might be your answer? 
    In this show, Amy walks us through the key elements of crafting VIP days that not only meet but exceed client expectations. You’ll learn how to pinpoint exactly what your clients need and tailor your VIP days to address these needs effectively. We also dive into strategies for confidently setting and communicating your prices, ensuring your clients understand the immense value of these specialized sessions. Plus, Amy shares her secrets on post-session follow-ups that keep the momentum going and strengthen client relationships. 
    By the end of this episode, you’ll have a starting roadmap for offering VIP days in your coaching or consulting business. You’ll also be equipped with actionable tips and a deeper understanding of how to create these powerful, transformative experiences. So, if you’re ready to take your coaching game to the next level, tune in and let’s get started. 
    At the end of this episode, you understand: 
    1. Tailoring VIP Days to Client Needs: Understand how to identify and address your clients’ unique challenges and goals, ensuring that each VIP day is a personalized and impactful experience.
    2. Effective Pricing Strategies: Learn how to set and communicate the value of your VIP days, enabling you to confidently charge rates that reflect the high-quality, bespoke service you provide.
    3. Post-Session Engagement: Discover the importance of follow-up support and how it can enhance the effectiveness of your VIP day, leading to stronger, ongoing client relationships.
    4. Marketing Your VIP Days: Gain insights into effectively promoting your VIP days, highlighting their unique benefits and differentiating your services in a competitive market.
    5. Practical Implementation: Walk away with actionable steps to integrate VIP days into your coaching or consulting business, enhancing both client satisfaction and business growth.
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    April (00:02)
    All right, you guys, I’m back again with my friend, Amy Umada. And the last time she was here, we were talking about ChatGPT, which is also an area of Amy’s expertise. So you can go back and listen to episodes 277 and 278 if you are here and you want to know more about utilizing ChatGPT to streamline your operations and your marketing and all these genius things that Amy teaches. But today we’re talking about VIP days. And this is such a timely topic.
    completely in transparency for you guys, because you know, I’ll also always tell you the truth. I really hadn’t had shows lined up that I was really excited about for 2024 yet. And I thought of Amy and we do some collaboration together. And I was thinking, oh my gosh, this is just the perfect show to do. Let’s dive into VIP days. Because as you guys remember, we just did a show where we dropped the latest trends for subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants. And the number one trend is that people
    are no longer seeking to be part of these big, huge launches, these big, huge programs where they’re another number and they are paying for highly curated experiences. And this is a perfect introduction into talking about VIP days with Amy. Amy, thank you so much for coming on the show with us. How are you? I’m so glad to be back and speaking about a topic that I’m very passionate about. And it’s just something where whether you’re totally new to VIP days and this is your introduction to them or you’ve been doing them for a while and you wanna take them to the next level.
    I just think it’s a very fun topic because it’s been probably the most fun, easy, and impactful offer that I’ve had as part of one of my offers. And so I’m excited to share anything that can support those who want to offer them this year. I am totally excited to dive in. Okay. So let’s first of all define what a VIP day is.
    Let’s start at the…
    the basics of the basics. You’re a coach, you’re a consultant, you’re thinking, hey, you know, VIP day, not only sounds like something I would like to attend, but maybe something I would like to sell. How do I define a VIP day versus just a day attending a workshop with me, perhaps? Yeah, that’s a great question. So the way I like to define a VIP day is think of it as a private, like a one-on-one full day intensive.
    And you can call it what you want. I know in the coaching industry, we call it a VIP day. You could call it a personal retreat. You could call it a one day intensive. You can call it a solo experience. I mean, you can really call it whatever you want that makes sense for you and your ideal client. But it’s a way for you to work with someone, completely personalize the day to them and think about what is it that my ideal client wants to get out of our experience together and what is their ultimate desire transformation or outcome?
    And by coming together for a full day, whether it’s in person or virtually, you can accelerate their experience of getting to where they want to go. So I just have found that it’s been a great way to work with those who, as you said, not all people want to jump into a long-term coaching program or a group or a mastermind, even though I’ve loved those formats as well. But it’s been nice to have something that is short and accelerated and gives them my personalized attention. OK. So I want faster results.
    I want your personal attention. I’m gonna seek out a VIP day. And I know that there are customers out there that are certainly looking for that as well. You know, and really quick, just talking about the trends, have you noticed that as well, being in the industry for a while, that change away from these big, huge mass launches and programs where they would be, you know, 500,000 seats sold at a time. Have you seen that as well in your space?
    I mean, it’s been interesting because I was recently a part of another entrepreneurs big launch and they still did very well. I mean, I think that it was a launch that does target newer entrepreneurs that really, you know, when you’re newer and you’re just like craving the information, you’re like, I want to know the model. I know I want to know the secret. I don’t have a large budget. So I think there’s still a time and space for that. But especially for those who’ve been in their businesses or own businesses for two, three, five, ten plus years. I think you just get to a point where.
    It’s more about implementation and team systems and then investing in the very specific things that you need versus being a part of a larger group mastermind. And I say that and I’m still a part of a larger group mastermind, but even when I have been a part of a group mastermind, I always find like my business besties within it and we create our own pod, you know, and I make a note of getting to know the lead coach and the coaches. I’m like, I don’t wanna just be another number even as a client, let alone have clients that feel that way too.
    So I think that when you’re working with someone who’s been in business for multiple years, then they are craving that personalized attention and a very specific outcome. So yeah, I totally get what you’re saying about that. That’s so funny. That’s really good insight. And actually, now that you said that, I think that’s how you and I met. I think you and I onboarded the same day into that larger business mastermind. Funny, that was like years ago. It seems like, okay, I think that’s how we met. Who knows? All right.
    So let’s dive into really how does, you know, our listeners are subject matter experts and coaches and consultants and authors and speakers. And they’re thinking about doing this VIP day, but they’re second guessing whether or not they’re qualified to actually even deliver a VIP experience, which we’ll talk about later, but even just be in a position to charge what needs to be charged in order to truly deliver a VIP experience. So I know
    that a lot of people based on what you say face this resistance of, wow, can I actually do this? So where do you want them to start first even thinking about whether or not they should offer VIP services within their business? Yeah, I would say that the first step is to enroll yourself first. Meaning, and just know that I struggled with thinking about charging high ticket for a VIP day. What I teach now is I teach clients and workshop attendees on creating and selling a $10,000 VIP day.
    And I myself really struggled with the thought of that at one point in my journey because I’d never done it. Right. So it was that whole question of like, who might have think that anyone would invest anything to work with me for a day? And I had a mentor at the time that was encouraging me to sell them for ten thousand dollars. I’m like, there’s no I’m a very optimistic person and there’s no way. I was like, I can’t do it. And she said, OK, how about we’re like negotiating? She’s like, how about seventy five hundred? I’m like, no, I just I can’t even imagine saying the words out loud on a call with someone. And she said, all right.
    How about this? How about you sell the first two at $5,000 and then bump it up to $7,500 and sell like six more? Which was an ambitious goal within a month. And I said, I’ll see what I can do. And that month, I ended up selling five VIP days for $5,000 each, paid in full. So it was a nice $25,000 bump in my business, right? Like who doesn’t love a nice revenue bump? Right. And it was so great to just get out of my comfort zone and stop making it about me.
    and my limiting beliefs of who am I to think that anyone will ever invest $5,000 to work with me for a day. And instead, focus the spotlight on them, them being your ideal client and ask yourself, do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one dedicated day with them? It just has a reframe on it. So whenever I shift my thinking like
    Do I believe I could really make a difference for someone? Yes, I could make a difference for someone. If we got to sit down and roll up our sleeves and spend a whole day together, like think about how much you could do in a day and how you can accelerate their growth because they don’t have to do all the things you did to get to where you are now because you’re gonna fast track them. You’re gonna share with them what has worked and what hasn’t worked with yourself and others. So I would say enroll yourself first and ask yourself, like think about someone, think about one person that represents your ideal client and ask yourself.
    Do I believe I can make a difference for them if I got to spend one entire day with them, whether it was in-person or virtual? And I’m willing to bet the answer is yes. Okay, now you’re enrolled in someone enrolling in a VIP day with you. So it’s gonna be a lot easier for you to actually speak into this when you believe in the value of it. Wow, oh my gosh, I love that. And I can see why the graduated process that your coach was walking you through bought you into it as well. I know that that’s…
    how I started out as well, like a little bit more and a little bit more. And then all of a sudden I realized, wow, this is blowing these people’s socks off. They would have paid so much more than I actually charged for this. And look at the results. And I also I also remember that when I first started increasing my prices that it gave me so much more confidence as well, because I saw how blown away they are with their own results. And you’re right. It was just it was all about them. So that leads me to my next question. So.
    buying in and believing in your value, you know? And then we go, okay, but how do I actually transfer the value that I’m saying that you’re gonna get out of 10K into what I’m actually doing with them? How do I actually know, I have to structure this in some capacity, they can’t just show up and just hang out and I have some, you know, lunch waiting for them. There has to be some sort of a framework around what we’re gonna talk about.
    How do you recommend people determine the framework of that VIP day and what they’re actually doing, what problem they’re solving? That’s a great idea. Great question, I should say. One of the things that has helped my clients with answering this question is to grab a piece of paper, draw a line down the middle vertically. And so you make two columns. And on one side, you put pain points. On the other side, you put solutions at the top. And so then you can bullet point out, what are the top?
    pain points that your ideal client has? And then next to each pain point, what is a solution that you would recommend for each of those pain points? And by doing that, first of all, you can see how freaking brilliant you are because you have a solution for all of their problems. Right. And you might even notice that there might be some redundancies in the solutions, like, oh, if they have these three problems, this solution can actually address these three problems.
    But by doing this, you can also see, OK, here are some things that I can apply during a VIP day. And then just know that you’re going to customize the VIP day to the person. So one of the questions I often get from people is kind of what you’re saying is, what does this flow of the day look like? Well, first of all, it’s about what is the flow going to look like that’s going to best serve your ideal client. So whenever, like when in doubt with anything in my business, I always ask myself, what is the flow going to look like that’s
    How can I best support my ideal client? Or how can I make the biggest difference possible for them? So for some, they might prefer a shorter VIP day, like four hours. I remember having a mentor when I would invest in a VIP day with her. It was four hours was considered a full VIP day. And we would pack in it. Like, I mean, I would fly out to San Diego. I live in Seattle and I would go to her house and we’d grab some coffee and she’d have like a big flip charge. She’s like, all right, what are we talking about today? And we’d get to, it was fast and furious. And that’s what works for me in terms of a client.
    But as far as being a coach with my clients, I’m such a connector. I like to take our time. I don’t want to feel rushed, you know? So for me, I always go from, if it’s in person, it’s 10 to five. So it’s a full day, including a fabulous lunch. I like a little luxury, like a luxury in it. So, but that’s just the framework of like the itinerary, but what’s most important is what are they going to get out of it? So they’re coming to you because they want your personalized attention. They want access to you.
    and they want to accelerate their growth. It happens to be three A’s when I discovered this. It wasn’t planned, I’m not that clever, but access, attention, and acceleration. When they’re able to get that access to you as the expert and they get your personalized attention to really meet them where they are and get them to where they wanna go and accelerate their growth, the client is super happy. So I would say think about their pain points, the solutions to those pain points, and then customize the day specifically to the VIP day client that’s stepping in.
    So that really addresses those pain points and gets them going. I have so many questions I wanna ask you that are outside of the scope of what we’re talking about today. But about pre-boarding and on ramping and on boarding and off boarding that it’s all Amy’s area of expertise. You guys go to Amy, I’ll give you all the links. I know our clients are thinking or our listeners are thinking right now, well, how do I get ready for that? And how do I make sure it’s good and all these other systems? But.
    But I do want to ask this one question. When somebody curates this VIP day, how often do you find, and maybe this is just a personal question with you, how often do you find that there needs to be a little bit of an afterburn support after that VIP day? Or is that like, nope, we’re done, see you later bye, pay me another time? How does it usually work with you with your clients? Yeah, you know, it’s interesting you asked this because I’ve tested.
    different ways of supporting them after the fact. What I’ve found that has worked for me is to schedule, as a part of the package, one follow-up private coaching session to be used within 30 days after the VIP day. And here’s why. It can help with accountability. So if they’ve started implementing some things they’ve learned from the VIP day, it can help them hold themselves accountable to build that momentum. It can also be great for going deeper on anything we didn’t quite go as deep on that we planned on.
    Um, and then also on that call, you can, you can, towards the end of the call, if you believe that this client could become a longer term client, because you’re like, Oh my gosh, I love this person. We have such a great connection. I can see how I can help them implement. Maybe they become a private high ticket coaching client for you. Right. So, so I would say wait till the end because it is a coaching session, but towards the end, I might say something like, you know, based on everything that we’ve covered during the VIP day and during our session today,
    I believe I could help you further in terms of implementation. Do you want to talk about what would that look like? Or do you want to explore what that would look like? And oftentimes they’ve at least been curious about it. And so I’d say, okay, do you still have time today if we have space or we can talk in the next couple of days and then you can upsell them to a longer term offer. And it’s been great. And some of my clients who’ve had the fastest results have kicked things off with a VIP day because we just did that deep dive into what they’re up to and what they’re creating.
    The other thing I do want to share though, and I love that you were talking about the pre and the post, that one of the biggest pieces of advice that I can give if you really want to crush your VIP days is to include what I call an intention setting call before the VIP day. So for example, say that you enroll someone into a VIP day, but they’re flying out to you or you’re flying to a really cool destination and it’s a month away.
    We don’t want a whole month to go by. And then our first, our next conversation, I should say, to be in person on the VIP day. So I recommend scheduling, even if it’s 15 minutes, a short intention setting call or call, call it what you want to call it, but like a grounding call that you schedule within a week prior to your VIP day. And then when you jump on that call, keep it super laser focused. It’s not the VIP day. It’s not a coaching session. Uh, but if you are my client April, I’d say, okay, April, first of all, I’m super excited for our in-person VIP day coming up on Friday.
    from today’s vantage point, what specifically do you want to get out of our VIP day? And then I would take notes, take notes, because those notes are your guiding light, that’s your North star, your compass for the VIP day, bring it to your VIP day and say, okay, so we talked about the other day and that’s how you will get a testimonial every time. I love that. I have two clients flying in here to Boulder, one this month and one next month, and I’m going to do that.
    and I’ve never done it before. We usually do, it’s not even, they’re entering into a longer term mentorship with me. So it’s not just one VIP day, but I love the starting out in person. And I’m totally stealing that. Yeah, I’m totally stealing that. I’m like, we’re gonna set this intention call ahead of time to help me help you better. Okay, so we’ve talked about the framework. We talked about the understanding of believing. And I just want our listeners to realize
    you guys want this, I want this, Amy wants this, we all want this sort of level of service. So take that and now understand that your clients really want this too, as you’re going through this process. And I just, I feel really strongly about, especially moving forward in 2024, these curated mentorship type of business models, just because we know that so many people really are craving this. So just another little confidence boost if anybody’s.
    out there wondering if this is for you. Question is, do you want it? And if the answer is yes, then the answer is your people want it too. Okay, so now let’s kind of wrap it up. How do you actually close it? How do you actually say, this is what it is, this is what I’m offering and communicate the value of what it is that you are doing to close and convert those leads into buyers? I love this question. We can do a whole training series on this. I know, right? I’ll keep it
    Well, first of all, I always like to create what I call a confidence card, meaning an outline of the VIP day offer that are initially it’s like all about the benefits to them. And this is, I use it as a behind the scenes tool just to have in front of me when I’m going to call with someone. Some of my clients will create a beautified branded version of it to send them. But as far as your closing question, I just always, I’m just so real with it. You know, like when it comes to sales conversations, enrollment conversations, all I’m thinking about is how do I believe I can best support the person?
    So if I was talking to someone and I was asking them questions, finding out where they are, where they want to go, what they’re struggling with, all the usual questions. And if I truly believed that I could make a difference for them with a VIP day, I would say, I would say that. I would say, you know, I believe the best way that I could support you would be by us doing a VIP day together. And here’s why, right? And then speaking to the why, like when, and then I would focus on them. When you shared with me that you’re wanting X, Y, and Z, and that you’re struggling with this, you know, then this is exactly my sweet spot. And then I would…
    visualize with them. I’d say, just imagine us coming together. If we’re able to do it in person, even better. Come to my home here in Seattle. We’ve got a great view. We’ll roll our sleeves. And we can do the first half of the day, we can do a deep dive. So basically, share with them the visual of the journey. Here’s what I could see us doing. So the first half of the day, we’ll do a deep dive. In my case, it’s usually messaging. We’ll do a deep dive on your messaging, how you’re already. What is it that you’re already doing that’s not working so we can release that?
    We’ll look at all the puzzle pieces of your business so that we can just get a really good grasp of what you’re up to. And then we’ll have a fabulous lunch. And then after lunch, we’re going to focus on building out a plan that is implementable right after the VIP day. Something along those lines where they can really see that I’ve listened to them on our call and that I am being so honest about why I’m recommending this as the offer and the format and the vehicle in which we’ll cover what we need to cover. So.
    I just keep it real. I mean, here’s how I think I can best support you. What do you think? Right. Yeah. Do you take any clients that you are uncertain whether or not your personalities drive? No. If we are not a fit, we’re not a fit. I mean, it’s also a day of your life. I recently came across a quote that said, what you do each day should be important because you’re giving up a day of your life for it, or something like that. It’s not word for word.
    I have that. I will, I’m going to text you a picture. I have a big, huge one of the, it’s hanging on my wall downstairs. It’s written out in text cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. So make it good. Cause you’re exchanging a day of your life for it. I want my boys to see that every morning before they leave the house. So it’s a, it’s a big thing. So anyway, after this, here you go guys. I’ll upload it to the show notes so you can see it too.
    Uh, this statement. Um, but Amy, I appreciate this so much. And I mean, your wisdom and your framework and your teaching on VIP days for a really long time has been leading coaches and consultants in the industry. And so certainly a trusted resource and really appreciate you coming in here and, and teaching our listeners all about frameworks. And I know that you do have one of your VIP intensives coming up. Could you want to tell people about that? Obviously.
    You guys need to be subscribing and listening to this in real time. Otherwise it’s probably not going to be happening live if you’re listening to the replay, but Amy, tell us about what’s coming up for people that want to learn how to craft a VIP day. Yeah. Well, first of all, I do also have a cheat sheet that I just want to give. Oh, good. Yay. We can offer that link to get the VIP day cheat sheet. So just walks you through the steps to create promote and sell high ticket VIP day. So if you’re a go getter and you’re like, I just want to take it around with it. Great.
    I do have a couple of workshops coming up on, so I know some might be watching this afterwards, but if you’re not, it’s coming up on January 23rd, January 25th, I’m doing the same workshop twice. So people have two different times. So we can make sure we have links on that below. And then there will also be a limited time on demand training of it. And then I’m not going anywhere. So please just come find me if you’re listening to this afterwards. I do throughout the year do some trainings on VIP days.
    If it is something you’re serious about doing sooner than later, what I have loved about VIP days, it’s been the most like the fastest, easiest, most fun way to make an impact. And I’ve also kept the system that I teach very simple as well. So it’s not, it’s not like a big thing that you need to do, like a lot, you know, like when you’re launching something big, um, you don’t need to have an ad, you know, like a new fancy funnel or an ad campaign or any of that. I love those strategies, but this is where you.
    create connect offer, you know, like you create your, your VLT, you connect with your ideal clients, make offers, and you do it in a way that really demonstrates that you understand what it is that they’re seeking. You understand your ideal clients. So that’s going to be a part of the training as well. So I’ve seen people go from my workshop to like, I’m thinking about one of my clients, Tara, who after the training, she went and sold two for 5,500. She said, she’s like, I’m not ready to sell them for 10,000, so, but she sold two 5,500. She’s like, oh my gosh, I just made $11,000.
    from what I learned at your workshop. I’m like, and you’re welcome. And that’s what we call ROI friends. I’m talking about. That’s the fun of the workshop. Definitely download the VIP cheat sheet if you’re wanting to implement VIP days. And then let’s stay connected. Like I love helping passionate entrepreneurs to do what you love with people you love and places that you love because this life is precious. And I mean, that’s what I love about you, April. You’re all about living a great life. So let’s do this. Yes, yes, yes. And what is your…
    primary website for somebody who isn’t listening timely and is not gonna be able to access those resources so people can find you. Yeah, for once I’m gonna give two websites. Great, let’s do it, let’s do it. Our listeners are very smart and organized. Very smart and can handle two URLs. Okay, so one is simply my name, so it keeps it very simple, And then we are in the process of building, so it may not be perfect, I’m just telling you right now.
    We’re in the process of this is the first time I’m telling you guys. I’m so excited. We’re building out ideal And here’s why my dream and my vision is for this to become the go-to resource for all things having to do with your ideal clients, because I found that it’s the first thing marketers will need to know is we’re always asked who do you serve and what problem do you solve? Right. And we skip over to like creating offers. Let’s care enough about our future clients. Let’s be abundantly in minded to attract more of our idea clients by actually
    deeply understanding what they want, what they struggle with, what their deepest fears and frustrations are. And so we’re building out like a killer website that’s gonna have amazing blogs on it and resources and ways to deeply understand who you are meant to serve on a level that is un…
    Like, nobody can compete with this. Like, I can’t even stand it. So. Oh my gosh. And of course now I’m like, we need to be talking about licensing and patents and trademarks and all that. Totally, totally, yeah. So, we’re not gonna have a conversation after this about all of that. So exciting. And this is something that we all need.
    I mean, even me, I’ve been coaching for 27 years. I’m like, oh my gosh, well, what? I think I know what they’re thinking. And the problem is, and now we’re gonna go on a quick tangent and we’ll let y’all go, but a little behind the scenes here, the problem is, is we get so close to our expertise and we forget what it’s like to not know what we already know. I know for me, because I’m not inherently a marketer, that I struggle with that all the time. So that’s why I loved all your.
    AI stuff you taught last year in this, we’re gonna be all over this. So I can’t wait to hear more about this. I know all of our clients need this as well. So awesome. All right, well, Amy, I appreciate you so much, just so, so much and all of your wisdom and being here and pouring in everything that you do into this industry. And we’ll make sure that this show gets out to everybody. Thank you so much for having me. It’s been so much fun. You’re welcome.



    Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024 (Episode 313)

     Top 4 Areas To Nail And Scale in 2024


    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
    Established coaches and consultants looking to separate from the pack in 2024. You want to do your work differently and reduce friction. The theme of this year is “less in more”. We’ll be focusing on making smart decisions to reduce overwhelm and create more traction in your business. Though there are a lot of things you can do to build your company, in this show we’re focusing on 4 of the most important areas you’ll want to nail first. 
    For each of the four areas of your business, I’m breaking down key things to consider in evaluating how you’ll upgrade your process and profit including:
    1. 2024 industry trends in each of the 4 core areas
    2. How they affect your current business
    3. Innovative ways to upgrade, change, and pivot
    …All while reducing work time and doing less. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the 4 areas of business you need to focus on to scale in 2024
    2. Have evaluated each area to determine necessary changes
    3. Be able to take action 
    Episode Bonus:
    6 Components of a Scalable Coaching Program – Includes AI Offer Engineering and more! 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] Hi, you guys. And welcome to the first show of 2024. I’m so glad to be joining you again for now. We’re rolling into the seventh year producing the Sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Thank you guys so much for being listeners over time and sharing this show with your friends. If this is your first time being here in the show, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:06] I help subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants build million dollar offer ecosystems and scale your business through content licensing and everything that we deliver for you here on this show are proven trainings and strategies that you can literally take to the bank. As a matter of fact, Our slogan, our tagline is delivering you proven trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:30] And I have been consulting coaches and consultants for 27 years with an expertise in online business for 17. So you are really in the right place. Every single thing that we talk about and deliver to you, you can immediately. Apply in your business and will be very valuable to you in this particular episode in kicking off 2024.

    [00:01:49] I was really thinking about the most important things that I want you guys to be focusing on. And in order to do this, I have been focusing on paying attention to the trends in our space. You have seen them. I know you’re paying attention. You’ve seen leaders and gurus and coaches starting to kind of fall to the side.

    [00:02:12] Some of them are just completely overloaded, overwhelmed and exhausted because they built the wrong kind of business for sustainability. Some of them are tired of having to show up on social media all the time and others Just don’t have anything else to sell. They may not have knowledge outside of the one area that they gained notoriety for.

    [00:02:34] And so this is a very special time for you. If you are an established subject matter expert coach or a consultant, and we’re talking about what’s going to happen in 2024, Now has never been a better time for you to hone in on these key areas that we’re going to talk about in our business because now is your time.

    [00:02:52] You don’t have to have thousands of social media followers. You don’t have to be a keynote speaker in front of thousands of people. You don’t even have to have a bestselling book. You just have to be great at what you do, dedicated to your area of expertise and the clients that you serve, and we can scale your business past seven figures.

    [00:03:11] So if you are feeling like you’ve been in this place where you’re just hustling and hustling and you’re never going to get noticed, frankly, many of you guys have been doing what you’ve been doing for a really, really long time and you’re not out there telling everybody about how great you are because you’re in the trenches with your clients delivering amazing results.

    [00:03:29] 2024 is your year. And that’s what we’re talking about right now in this podcast, four key areas where you can scale your business with less work. Here’s the deal. The theme of this year is more results, less time, significant impact, less work. We are talking about more for less, and I want that for you.

    [00:03:52] And so that’s what we’re digging in here, uh, on this show. This is episode number 313. All of the show notes, everything that we talk about here and reference and links and resources and downloads and all the goodies can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Just click on the podcast and this is episode number 313.

    [00:04:12] And a very quick and very important announcement to you. If it’s time for you to upgrade your offer, increase your prices, and take your offers to a scalable level. Create content, create your million dollar offer ecosystem. Then we are opening up offer engineer, which is our leading masterclass that has taught experts to build scalable offer ecosystems and content licensing programs for Over eight years.

    [00:04:41] This is program is really amazing where I get to work with you personally. So if it’s time for you to dive in and actually upgrade your offer, go to the offer engineer. com because we’re going to be doing that live online virtually in January, and I don’t want you to miss it again. That is the offer engineer.

    [00:05:00] com. Go grab your seat in that right now. And let’s go ahead and set this episode to dive in more. All right. So we’re talking about these four areas, these four amazing opportunities for you to upgrade in your business. Things that I really want you thinking about. And I want to unpack some trends and give you an opportunity to think about how you can change or update things.

    [00:05:22] I don’t want to give you a massive amount of work, but as we’re in the beginning of 2024, I see these as four very important areas that not everybody’s talking about. But I want you to be the tip of that sword. I want you to know what’s going on. And so that’s why I picked these four areas as a trend to lean into for 2024.

    [00:05:42] So the first area that you need to nail to scale in 2024 will be your offers, your programs, your services. We don’t actually hear a lot of people talking about actual offer engineering. They just kind of come up with a price and they say, okay, I’m going to do this or I’m going to do that. And this is just what it is.

    [00:06:02] And there’s so much emphasis on marketing. Have you seen that also there really is not enough emphasis on the product itself. And I think there’s some confusion. Um, in a service based industry space, realizing that maybe marketing is more important than the actual product itself. But here’s a little insight.

    [00:06:20] My husband and I own multiple companies and one of the companies he owned is owns is a physical product company. So I have seen what it takes to build a business around a physical product and the difference in the emphasis on the actual excellence of the product. Is what makes the difference the first difference, but in the online coaching and consulting space, we tend to lean into the marketing and the marketing, the marketing, and then the products are kind of shitty sometimes.

    [00:06:49] I mean, let’s be honest, right? So the reality is, is you’ve probably been in many of these programs that had this awesome shiny funnel and you’re diving in there and they give all the bells and whistles and they say all the right things for you to invest your money, and then you get in there and you really didn’t get what you thought that you were going to get.

    [00:07:07] Because the person that sold it to you was a great marketer that maybe not so great and actually creating an offer that’s going to give you substantial, substantial, tangible results that you’re looking for. Frankly, maybe there weren’t even an expert in that part. Maybe there were an expert marketer.

    [00:07:25] And so as we’re looking at your business, I want to just reset what we’re talking about here as business owners, your knowledge, what you teach or the service you provide, what you do, the programs that you deliver, they are your product and they come first and without leading products that deliver amazing, massive, predictable results, nothing else that we talk about is going to matter.

    [00:07:55] So let’s just lay the prerequisite and the ground rule here. Your offer has to be absolutely a leading offer in your space that provides amazing results. So number one key area is that offer engineer engineering and here’s some of the trends I want you to see That have been happening. Well, really it’s been about the last four years we’ve really seen these trends because I literally have been coaching experts to build their offers for so long you guys actually since Pre 2000.

    [00:08:25] I’ve been, I’ve been helping people like you do this. And so what we’re seeing is that these big programs, these huge programs were the ones that were amazing and everybody was attracted to them. But here’s a trend that I want you to be aware of for the last four years, the smaller programs, the boutique programs, the programs that serve less people, or the only serve one company at a time, or that are really super niche.

    [00:08:50] Those are the programs that are selling. Those are the programs that people are looking for and gravitating to. So I want you to see these trends and if that’s the kind of program you’ve had already, amazing. What can we do to upgrade that? How can we scale the actual program itself to scale your time, that you are reducing your time?

    [00:09:10] Especially if you’ve been delivering one on one coaching services and that you can provide efficient results for your clients while providing top notch industry leading results to them as well. And so what the trend that, or the term that this is, is called the blue ocean strategy. I talk about blue ocean all the time.

    [00:09:28] There’s a blue ocean strategy. book. If you haven’t read it, it’s really, really valuable. I will actually go ahead and put a link to that book in the show notes so that you guys can understand this concept, but we need to move you out of what’s considered a red ocean where all these other people are fighting for the same audience.

    [00:09:44] And we need by creating a disruptive, thoughtful, efficient, Offer. We can move you into a blue ocean where you have no competition. So the trends I want you to be aware of are these huge programs are really, in my opinion, going to the wayside. People do not love being in part of a cattle drive. It’s like, cheers, everybody.

    [00:10:03] You know, we want people to know our name. And so being in big programs without any personalized curation is we’re having industries are having trouble selling those types of programs. So look at your programs, think about your programs and think about. What you have and how niche is it? Do you provide specific measurable results?

    [00:10:25] And then the third thing I want you to be aware of is you probably need to increase your prices in 2024 with inflation, with how much it’s costing you to actually run your business and pay yourself, pay your team and the way that. I will be sharing with you here and that we coach our clients is I need you to increase your prices so we can increase your operational expenses so we can increase your ability to scale and get more help.

    [00:10:52] And so if you need to increase your prices, we always want to do this in an ethical way. We never just say, Hey, this was this cost and now it’s going to be that cost. So make sure that you’re increasing your prices and in an ethical way and take a look at your offers. So the question’s for you. Are they niche?

    [00:11:09] Are they niche? Are they specific? Are they disruptive? Am I doing something? in a way that nobody else in my space is doing this. Do I have a method or a framework that I’m teaching people to get better results than other people in my space? That’s what we need your offers to do. So area number one that you need to nail to scale in 2024 is not only one offer, but your ecosystems of, uh, of offers to make sure that they are predictable.

    [00:11:38] tangible, delivering amazing results, and they’re scalable for you and efficient to run. Again, you can go into the offer engineer. com because that’s everything that we’re working on here in January with our clients and our podcast listeners and all of our friends live. You can dive into that masterclass with me.

    [00:11:58] Make sure you don’t miss that if you need this. So area number two are relationships. So let me talk about the trend that I am seeing. It’s no longer as important to know everybody in your space. I don’t actually know if it really was. I don’t know everybody in my space. I’ve been here for a really long time.

    [00:12:21] What I want you to understand is connecting and building relationships with the right people in the right businesses are what is going to be the one driver to really bring in profit for your business this year. It’s not ad spend anymore like it was 10, eight years ago, seven years ago. Right? Their relationships, relationships, scale, relationships.

    [00:12:43] So, but I know that there are problems running into spending time and investing relationships. Talk about what type of relationships I want you to focus on this year. I want you to focus on relationships with other experts that serve your same audience, but they may do a different thing. So building relationships with colleagues and mutual circles of trust.

    [00:13:05] Think Robert De Niro. And meet the parents, right? So you want to build circles of trust with other experts. These circles don’t have to be huge. They can be three, five, six, seven people at the most that meet your clients. And my recommendation this year is to make time for these relationships. Do things with them.

    [00:13:26] Go on retreats just with this other group of people. Have an opportunity to create a mastermind that is not a paid mastermind. It’s all of you just showing up to a hotel, paying your own way and pouring into each other for three days. These are the things that are going to build your business and scale.

    [00:13:43] And I want you to think about who these people could be in your space. Nixon with relationships is you need to make time to build new ones. If you don’t have enough relationships in your space, you think could be valuable. And of course that you could lend value to one of the things that I do is I have what’s called a coffee calendar.

    [00:14:00] And you know, when you get these LinkedIn messages, Hey, would you like to, you know, connect and, and just get to know each other? First of all, I’m just going to be really honest. I will never give my time to somebody because time, my time is more valuable to me than money. Unless I have already connected with that person in the public feed somewhere.

    [00:14:20] So by the way, if you’re listening to this and you’re one of those cold people that sends DMs saying, Hey, do you want to jump on the call? If you ever send that to me, the answer is immediately going to be no. And you know, you’re wasting my time because you haven’t ever tried to connect with the content that I have put out on the public feed.

    [00:14:37] Um, but for those people that I really do want to connect with, I have this coffee calendar and it’s set up in my acuity calendar scheduler and it’s not about, it’s not a sales pitch. It’s literally just a connection time and I have connection times. Sometimes I have them only one day a month, you guys.

    [00:14:53] Let’s be real. My time is very limited or I have them at one time every single Wednesday afternoon. It’s the one time I know that I can block out. And as soon as those coffee calendar connections are full, I don’t book anymore. I don’t spend any time wondering, Hey, when can I fit this networking thing in, you know, my calendar to meet with this person?

    [00:15:13] I always have this available and open it, but I. Only share it with people that I believe that I can lend value to and people that could be valuable to me and my business as well. So if you have the ability to create a separate calendar, that’s not going to mess up any of your other work time. Do it.

    [00:15:30] Call it a coffee calendar, a networking calendar, just. meet and greet or whatever, and I have virtual coffee with people. It will make all the difference in the world and your business. And I want you to think about honing in on specific people in specific groups that will make the greatest impact for your time.

    [00:15:47] Remember, these relationships are going to be very powerful because these people are going to send you business. You’re going to send these people business and you’re going to create that circle of trust. I believe in 2024. that these relationships will be even more valuable to you than creating content in a marketing process.

    [00:16:07] So if you don’t yet have that sort of coffee calendar designated time to network with people and get to know other people, I highly recommend you do that. Okay. Area number four is marketing. Of course it’s marketing. Yes, we have to market your business, but let’s talk about the trends again that we are seeing here.

    [00:16:27] So if you have been on Facebook for decades and Instagram for decades, and then you tried threads, the trends that we are seeing, we’ve been seeing is that businesses that sell to other businesses are hanging out on LinkedIn. Number one, and the great thing about LinkedIn is you do not have to create. a massive amount of content.

    [00:16:49] You just have to build relationships and share valuable information and give feedback to others that share valuable information. And so in the marketing process, make sure that you’re not just creating content to create content that might not be for you. I’m not sitting here talking to you. I don’t know your business cause this is.

    [00:17:08] Unfortunately, a one sided conversation right here on the podcast. So LinkedIn may not be the place for you, but I’m just saying, I want you to be aware that creating videos and spending thousands of hours on, you know, um, Instagram or even Tik TOK has it like, look at the measurable, measurable results.

    [00:17:25] Has it given you the traction that you’ve needed? If it hasn’t, it’s okay to walk away from things instead of just doing things cause you’ve been doing them for the last five years and you think you need to. Again, less is more. Understand where the actual traction is happening for your business and just focus in on that.

    [00:17:45] The other thing that is really important, which is not a newsflash, but I really want you to make sure that you are normalizing AI. In your processes of creating content. So one thing to look at and just ask yourself and our little check and balance here, do you have SOPs for using AI within your business on a regular basis for creating your marketing content?

    [00:18:08] If you don’t, it’s very, very important. And a few other keys are understanding your primary message on a monthly basis. What do I mean by that? This is especially important for those of you guys who have a B to C side of your business and you may also be moving into a B to B. So if you’ve had courses, trainings, masterminds, VIP days, whatever that is, and you’re also looking into a Content licensing.

    [00:18:35] Maybe you want, maybe you’re here and you’re connecting with us. Cause you also want to know after we build those programs with you, how to actually license them to other companies, right? So your message is going to be different and you need to make sure you’re honing in. What am I saying to a B2C audience?

    [00:18:51] And what am I saying to a B2B audience and just make sure. If you’re foggy on your marketing, if you do not have a marketing team that’s working for you and creating content, number one thing to start with, and just doing this one thing will be a massive game changer is understanding what your primary message is to each one of those audiences on a monthly basis.

    [00:19:12] In January. What is the most important thing you want your audience to know about you in February? Are you selling something in March? What is that most important thing? Just make sure you’ve broken it down month by month, especially if you have two audiences and it’s very, very clear. So area number three to nail and scale, and those are some tips is marketing use AI.

    [00:19:34] But make sure, of course, it’s absolutely unique to you in your voice and never put AI into your, never put your IP into your, um, chat GPT. Okay, so anything that is proprietary, never put it into chat GPT. And then the third area, the fourth area I want you to focus in on for 2024 are your teams. It’s time for you to get the right person in place.

    [00:20:05] If you don’t have this already, that’s going to help you scale. If you can find one person, you can trust one primary person and be able to have them delegate so that you can focus on your areas of genius. 2024 is the year to do that. In, in order to do that, you need to understand what your top priorities are and you need to be able to put a budget behind this.

    [00:20:29] So let’s talk about some of these areas and, and based on how much you’re making. If you are making up to 15k a month, You do need team members. You may get specific niche team members to do specific things. So one person might do your video editing. One person might do your copy editing. You know, one person might post on social media.

    [00:20:52] One person might be your client concierge. That’s totally fine up to 15 K a month. It’s fine to have these teeny tiny little specific, amazing people that do little teeny bits of work for you. When we get to around 20 to 30 K, you’re going to need more operational help. So that is orchestrating all of those people that are doing all the little pieces.

    [00:21:16] And so around 20 K a month, if you don’t have a primary, it could be an online business manager. However, be really careful with that because the term online business manager and those certifications often mean that they are not operationally. Excellent. They just know a software. Be careful for that. I’m talking about somebody that can step into an operations management, see all the moving parts and actually orchestrate all those little team members underneath.

    [00:21:43] That’s going to be around 20. And honestly, when we get to 30 to 40 K a month, these operational bottlenecks are what scale or what stops businesses ever from getting beyond 40 K a month, because our brains is CEOs don’t really. Think like that in most cases operationally. So we need this key person to help see all the moving parts, bring it together to bring you past 40 K a month and statistics show that it 50 K a month is when you actually can afford, uh, to hire somebody else to be more in a COO position for you.

    [00:22:22] So based on where you are, if you’re up to 15 K, you need to be able to delegate if you’re 20 to 30 K. We need somebody to be able to oversee all those little little delegations. So now we have at least two people on your team. If you’re if you’re getting stuck in that bottleneck, then you need to increase your team members.

    [00:22:41] And remember what I said is we need to put a budget behind these team members. And if you’re at 50k, that’s usually around the time when you can really start affording somebody to come in full time into your business while still paying yourself. So these are the four key areas and the trends that we’re seeing that I worry if you don’t nail these areas, it’s really going to severely affect you.

    [00:23:06] In 2024. And so that’s why I picked these key areas. And again, they’re not things necessarily that everybody’s talking about, but I know they will just be a game changer for your business. So the first area again is upgrading your offers. You can charge more, scale them, be more efficient. Doesn’t mean serving more people.

    [00:23:27] It could mean a collection of offers that collectively equal over a million dollars in sales, but they’re all very curated and they all take clients through a predictable journey again. If that’s what you need, cruise over to the offer engineer dot com. This, this masterclass is not for building new offers for new coaches.

    [00:23:50] This masterclass is only for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts that are ready to. Upgrade your offers and scale more. I want to make sure that I’m differentiating that if you are a brand new coach or a consultant, you are not ready for that masterclass. Okay, and that’s it the offer engineer dot com Second way is scaling your relationships really diving into those relationships making them a priority Creating a collection of people that you can rely on that are your peers without paying 10 a year for a mastermind and just leaning into building these relationships Maybe investing in a little trip or a virtual mastermind with this group of people and really pouring into them This is going to be a game changer for you and your business if you make this a priority and set aside the time in 2024 The third thing is your marketing process really important.

    [00:24:40] We need to streamline your marketing process using ai And if you have a B2C side of your business and a B2B side of your business, make sure you know who you’re communicating with and where and on what platforms and what your signature talks are and what your services are to each one of the areas.

    [00:25:00] And Again, moving on beyond that is your teams. Make sure that you have the right people in the right place doing the right things. And then we broke down the numbers of what those financial thresholds are that are typical of what you can afford based on your business. And these are the key areas that I really want you focusing on because when you focus on these and when you nail these In 2024, it’s going to make a significant difference in your business and I want that difference I actually want to hear from you about which ones of these that you’re going to lean into first Please connect with me on linkedin at April beach and let me know that you listen to this show.

    [00:25:39] Let me know which of these four areas that you’re going to dive into first. And I want to end this episode by saying that I don’t want this to be overwhelming. Again, we’re talking about doing more, getting bigger results with doing less. So getting more, doing less, by focusing on the, how you curate these areas in your business, it’s going to make a significant impact.

    [00:26:03] And again, I can’t reiterate how important it is to share that the trends in the subject matter, consulting and coaching spaces have completely changed. And there is an open pathway for people like you that maybe you haven’t hit the financial mark that you really want to hit, or maybe you have found trouble keeping up with the Joneses.

    [00:26:30] This is your year. It’s your year to be very specific and true to yourself, your business, your area of expertise and build marketing strategies, offers and relationships that are actually going to get you there. And I want to hear about it as you go along. So thank you so much for listening to this show.

    [00:26:48] This has been episode number 313. You can find all of the show notes and everything we talked about by going to SweetLifeCo. com and clicking on the podcast. And of course, if you ever want to work with us, we have clients all over the world, and I would love to point to you personally. All right, you guys have an awesome first week of the year.




    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business (Episode 312)

    What It Really Takes To Build A Million Dollar Consulting Business



    This one’s for all you independent consultants, coaches, and experts who are looking to grow your business next year. We’re going to chat about what it really takes to build a million-dollar consulting business. 
    Yes; you need the right mindset. 
    Yes; you need to be good at what you do
    But did you know there’s an actual mathematical formula to determine if your company is capable of hitting a million dollars in gross revenue a year? There is, and in this episode April Beach, an international business strategist, unpacks the key values you need to be aware of that become the inputs for your milliondollar business formula. 
    This episode is like your personal guide to growing your business in a smart way. It’s super helpful if you’re working on your own and want to increase your sales without burning out. We’re going to talk about knowing your limits, which is really important, and using that knowledge to make better plans for your business. This way, you can make more money, keep your customers happy, and still have time for yourself! April’s approach has helped people all over the world. She’s got some great strategies that can be tailored to your own unique business.
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Assess your Offers: It’s important to really know the ins and outs of the services or advice you provide. This helps you see where you can grow.
    2. Understand Your Limits: Knowing how much you can handle is key. It helps you plan better and grow your business without getting too stressed.
    3. Clean Up Your Offers: Quickly see what offers are dragging you down and where to build improvements 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] Hi everybody. I’m so excited to welcome you to episode number 312. Here on SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, we have made some changes to the show. If you haven’t noticed, we’re actually giving you more free business trainings and tools with every single episode. And so therefore we are dropping our episodes.

    [00:01:07] every two weeks. So if you haven’t noticed that now you can be aware that we’re actually giving you more time to use the materials that we have given you here on the show so that you can actually apply them to your business and continue to grow and continue to make money. We’re getting feedback literally that we’re just giving away so much within a seven day period for the last six years that sometimes you were scrambling to actually utilize it all.

    [00:01:34] And if you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know, that we are known for giving away free business trainings and strategies backed by 30 years of business coaching expertise that other coaches will charge you hundreds and thousands of dollars for. So we definitely want to make sure that you’re able to utilize the tools we give you.

    [00:01:50] So heads up. The show’s dropping every two weeks. Now this episode is very jam packed. I’m actually teaching you a workshop in this episode that we teach to our private clients called method to millions. And because I need you to really have the worksheets to implement. At a higher level, we’re talking about it here on the show, but to really implement the nitty gritty of the method to millions workshop, I’m giving you completely free access to a recorded one hour training where I just recently brought our clients through this method to millions process.

    [00:02:24] And I’m giving you completely free access to all of the worksheets. This workshop is no strings attached. I just want to bless you and honor you for being a listener here in the show. So you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions, and you’ll see there is a cost to it in there. I want you to use coupon code guest again at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:49] com forward slash millions. With an S at the end and use coupon code guest, and you can get full access to the whole one hour workshop and worksheets. But let’s go ahead and talk about what we’re going to talk about here in this episode. So you even know if you’re ready for this level of business strategy.

    [00:03:07] So in this show, I’m going to unpack the importance of engineering your business for capacity so that you don’t hit burnout. Many coaches and consultants and subject matter experts, you know, you, you work so hard and you’re creating new offers and you’re doing all the things, but have you ever stopped to take a minute to actually realize with a mathematical formula?

    [00:03:29] Is to whether or not your business is actually engineered to hit a million dollars, or if you were smashing up against a complete brick wall, that’s what we’re talking about here in this show. That is what the workshop helps you see as well. So we are diving into what is called capacity. We’re talking about offer engineering.

    [00:03:47] offer sweet engineering. And this episode is going to help you have a reflection on the last 12 months is to whether or not what you’re selling and what you’re building is in fact actually going to equal a million dollars in your business. And it might not even be a million. You might be just working on trying to hit.

    [00:04:06] 300, 000 or maybe you’re working to hit your first 100, 000. I’ll be honest with you. This show is an advanced business training for established coaches, consultants, and subject matter experts who have already passed the hundred K mark. But if you haven’t done that yet, please Pop in here because now, you know, what’s to come and I love pouring into you and, and helping you see some of the strategies that might happen at the next level.

    [00:04:30] So if you’re ready for this, all of the show notes, everything that we are talking about here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Click on the podcast button. This is episode number 312. And again, go right now before you forget and access the free method to millions training by going to SweetLifeCo.

    [00:04:50] com forward slash millions. Use the coupon code guest. All right. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right. So there are three reasons why your business is not going to hit a million dollars, no matter what you do or how hard you work or all of the best marketing strategies in the world.

    [00:05:11] There are three reasons why you might not be hitting a million dollars, no matter how hard you work, how hard you try. And frankly, how great you are. Those three reasons are your offer design. isn’t done correctly. You have reached capacity on how you have designed your offers and frankly, there isn’t enough time in the year.

    [00:05:30] So reason number one is incorrect offer model design. Each one of your offers needs to be engineered. to correctly ensure that it aligns with your ability to bring enough people in based on how much you charge and how many people you can serve that you’re actually going to hit a million dollars in that offer.

    [00:05:51] So that’s number one. Number two is that inside that offer, Especially depending on how many times you offer it a year, whether you do it one on one, you are going to reach capacity. And then the next one is not enough time. We’ll get into what not enough time last when we talk about marketing. So let’s kind of unpack the problem here.

    [00:06:10] And if you’re frustrated, could you see other strategists and other businesses just consultants having million dollar businesses, it really isn’t maybe just their marketing plan. It’s how their programs and their offers are engineered. So the deal is, is we don’t talk about capacity enough. As a matter of fact, I think business coaches and strategists, it’s a huge missing mark because of the fact that we talk about marketing, marketing, get more people and generate leads.

    [00:06:34] But what happens when we’ve generated all those leads in your offers or your suite of offers? Isn’t engineered to hit that capacity. So the problem is, is if we don’t pause to talk about the capacity of your suite of offers, you are never going to reach a million dollars. It’s like building a house where you need a hundred people to sleep there, but there’s only one bedroom.

    [00:07:01] It’s just physically impossible to do it in. So therefore, I want us to come back here and really understand the process of assessing capacity based on the offers that you are offering and your business offers your offering. I know that sounds silly, but you know what you’re selling your, your programs and services.

    [00:07:20] So. Our goal here today is to help you identify your current offers that you have already done, that you’re already selling, and understand if you have hit a threshold. Also today, I want you to understand that any new offers that maybe you have thought about creating, How do they fit into the math to help you reach that million dollar mark or just replace the word million dollar with your next financial threshold?

    [00:07:48] Uh, and let’s just kind of speak to that for a minute. A million dollars is a lot of money for, um, to generate for a single. Consulting business. It’s very important that we engineer your offers correctly so that you can do that. And so, um, but if you’re, if you’re here, maybe if you’re struggling from money mindset, I don’t want you to shut down this training thinking, Oh my gosh, she’s just another person talking about how to hit a million dollars.

    [00:08:11] I could care less. any number with a million dollars. This math works. If you’re trying to hit 250, 000 or 750, 000 or 350, 000, it doesn’t matter. I want you to use this math because it’s going to give you a huge insight. So the process, the method that I am talking about today is a method I created called mathematical Method to millions.

    [00:08:34] So it’s called a method to millions and the worksheet I’m giving you or the workshop and the worksheets that I’m giving you away for free with this episode are is also called method to millions. And so basically what it is is it’s a mathematical equation to add up capacity. With what you’re charging for your offers with the model of your offers and understanding how many people you can actually fit in that offer in a year to see if you can actually mathematically hit a million dollars.

    [00:09:02] And when you engineer your numbers correctly. Basically, when you engineer your suite of offers correctly, then you can do it. But if you’re looking at these numbers after we go through today and you’re realizing, wow, I can’t do any more of this. I can’t sell any more of this. I’m never going to make any more than 75, 000 on this one thing.

    [00:09:23] Then we have a problem. And that is why I want to help you with this today. You know, the end of the year, depending on when you’re listening to this, it’s the end of 2023. It’s a really important time for us to assess. All of the hard work and how we’re serving our clients and what we’re working on. And so that’s why this topic is so important.

    [00:09:43] So first of all, let’s kind of define capacity. What is capacity? Capacity is the maximum amount of people you can serve and the maximum amount of money you can make based on a certain offer or program you’re selling. Now, let’s define offer or program. So an offer is your consulting service, whether it is a one on one service, whether it is a course or a membership or a retreat or a VIP day or a licensed product or a certification program or a mastermind, whatever it is that you sell.

    [00:10:21] Also for you guys that have done for you services, if you have like an agency or if you have a hybrid where it’s kind of done with you and done for you, that’s, that’s what we’re talking about. Right? So when we’re talking about your offer, it’s what you do, what you sell. And so. Inside every single offer, there is usually a capacity and capacity isn’t bad, right?

    [00:10:44] So I don’t want you to think capacity is terrible, like, Oh, my gosh, everything has to scale. I have to fit 5000 people in this offer. That is a wrong approach. All right. I know there’s a lot of coaches out there that are like, Oh my gosh, you need to build these offers so you can sell it to more people.

    [00:10:59] Frankly, I don’t want to be in any program where I’m like one of 5, 000 people. And you probably don’t either. That was a big trend from 2000 and you know, 13 to 2019. None of us want to be a number in a cattle drive anymore. So first of all, it’s important to know that I am not here advocating that you build all these offers.

    [00:11:19] For a low ticket or even other offers for a super high ticket, you know, so you can fit more people. The most important thing I want you to take away from this episode is you can engineer your suite of offers any way you want. And the very first thing I want you to understand is it how you build your suite of offers and how you serve your clients and what you sell.

    [00:11:42] It’s going to affect your lifestyle. And so I want you to actually stop for a minute and I want you to take an inventory and I want you to think about every single thing you’re selling. So here we go with the step by step training. Step number one is make a list of your current offers that you are selling.

    [00:11:59] And again, I have this cheat sheet worksheet for you where you can get access to it for free. When you access our method to millions workshop for free. So in the left hand column, if you’re visual like me, you’re going to list the name of the offer. So it could be one on one coaching or done for you website services, or, you know, my, my week long retreat in Costa Rica, whatever it is you guys sell.

    [00:12:20] Okay. Left hand call. The next column over and the next step I want you to go through is I want you to understand what is the model of that? Is it done live in person? Is it on demand? Is it a hybrid model? It’s important to look at the model of how you deliver your offer because it’s going to tell us whether or not we’re going to hit capacity, right?

    [00:12:44] So we know, for example, let’s use the retreat. If you have a retreat, so the title of the offer is retreat, the model of it is, One time a year and it’s in person. That’s awesome. That’s very exclusive and and I’m sure you know You’re selling that out because people love those type of experiences But the next step is after we do offer and model the next step is how many people can you actually sell that to?

    [00:13:09] Is it a retreat for 10 people? Is it a retreat for five people? What is the total number, what is, what are, what is, let’s say correct English there, what is the total number of people that’s not correct? Alright, help me out here. What, how many people can you sell this baby to, right? So if it’s a retreat, there is going to be a capacity of a lower number.

    [00:13:29] But if your offer is a course or a training where it’s endless, Fantastic, right? So first is offer. Second is understanding the model of each one of your offers. And the third one is understanding the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer. Here’s the key in one year. So if you have that retreat twice a year, You’re going to say, okay, maybe it’s 20 people total.

    [00:13:53] If you have that course available all the time and you, there’s no limitation. If your model has no limitation, it’s something that’s an on demand training or especially for those of you guys that are getting into licensing. If there’s really no limitation on how many you want to release it to, that’s incredible.

    [00:14:12] That’s awesome. We love that. I want you to put in the goal number of how many seats you want to sell into it. So if it’s on demand with no capacity, the maximum number of people, you’re going to put your goal for the number of people that you want to sell into that program for the year to come. So we’ve done three things.

    [00:14:32] We have assessed your offer. We have assessed the model of how each one of the offers are delivered. And now we’ve assessed the maximum number of people that you can fit into that offer in a 12 month period of time. Now. Part four. Hopefully you guys are with me here. Step four is I want you to multiply the per person cost of what you charge for that offer by the number of people you can fit into it.

    [00:15:00] So if you have a course that has your, your goal is to fit, it’s on demand. Your course course name here models on demand. Your goal is to fit, sell it to 100 people. And the course is, you know, five bucks, right? Whatever, that’s terrible. Don’t charge 5 for your course. But you know what I mean? Then you are going to multiply them the maximum amount of money.

    [00:15:23] If you hit your goal, you can make on that is 500, right? So let’s go. Let’s give a different example here. If, however, let’s go to the retreat example. If your offer is a retreat and you char in, it’s, you know, you can sell it to 10 people at a time and you charge 1, 000 for that retreat, then the maximum amount of money you’re going to make on that retreat is 10, 000.

    [00:15:50] So it’s really important to look at the number at the maximum amount of money that you can possibly make. On a particular offer. And you’re going to do that for every single one of your offers. Now, here’s where it really becomes eyeopening, especially for our clients. If you provide boutique elite high end offers, you’re not going to sell that to as many people.

    [00:16:10] So the idea here is understanding this is the offer. I only can take five private clients. Like for me, for example, I only take four private clients a year. That is my capacity. I cannot take more than that. So I know that I cannot make more than four times the amount of money I charge for it, which is currently 33, 000.

    [00:16:30] So I cannot make more than that on actual private clients. So what it does is when I’m looking at my list and I go through this, my team and I go through this every single year, really, I really don’t love pushing private clients because I have a lower capacity for profit with private clients, even though I charge more because I only can take so many.

    [00:16:51] So the process is you are going to have your list of offers. You’re going to have your model. You’re going to understand how your offers are delivered and you’re going to see where you’re hitting capacity. Now, I have so much more. I want to teach you about this and what we do next, but. Our first goal here today is to have you have an understanding of where you might have hit capacity.

    [00:17:14] And frankly, how much time is it taking for these offers to be delivered? When we understand capacity, when we really talk about capacity based on how you are engineering your suite of offers to reach your profit threshold, then you can take a look and you can be like, there is no way I’m going to hit this.

    [00:17:34] Especially if you only have a few different offers, if you only do one on one services and and their boutique services, and that’s what you’re pushing, especially with that done for your hybrid approach, you’re going to hit capacity. And so what else can you be? Should you be? Might you want to engineer so that you can increase your profit across other methods?

    [00:17:57] So again, there are three reasons why you won’t hit a million dollars or 300, 000 or whatever your profit threshold is. Number one, because your offer model design isn’t engineered. I don’t even want to say the word correctly because it’s different for all of us. It’s just your, your list of offers aren’t engineered.

    [00:18:16] to fit enough people into them for the price that you are charging. Now, most coaches will be like, we’ll charge more. Absolutely. If you are at capacity, if you, if your program is sold out, if you have a wait list, if you are selling at a certain rate, it’s time to increase your prices for sure. But in most cases we’re looking at a list of offers and they just aren’t engineered correctly.

    [00:18:41] Either the price isn’t engineered correctly or the offer itself can’t fit enough people. Recognizing that you’re hitting capacity is a very important thing that I want you to be able to do before you go into the hard work of actually promoting the offer and doing the work of doing the launch and the marketing and all the things.

    [00:18:59] See, now you understand why all the marketing in the world, the biggest list in the world, if your offers aren’t engineered correctly and your suite of offers aren’t engineered correctly, you’re never going to hit that seven figure mark because it’s physically impossible based on the way that you’ve engineered your offers.

    [00:19:14] And then here’s the third really important thing that I want to leave you with. And I really do want you to access the method to millions workshop for free because this is where our clients just, their brain just explodes when they realize what we’re going to talk about next. Even if your list of offers, your suite of offers is engineered that you’re going to be able to hit capacity.

    [00:19:36] Sometimes there is not enough time in the year to market and sell them all. It’s really, really important. This is what I mean. You only can sell so often. If you’re out there being like, buy my this and buy my that. And you know, I have, I have all these great things and I want to work with you. Uh, if you’re selling all the time, people are going to stop following you.

    [00:19:58] You only can sell. so much. And if you are looking at your list and you’re like, wow, I can reach them all, but January I have to sell this and the end of January I have to push for that. And then in February I’m going to have everybody, you know, do a campaign to work with me one on one. And then in March I need to start filling up my retreats, but also in March I need to sell this little workshop.

    [00:20:19] If you realize that There is not enough time in a calendar year to actually market and sell all of the things that you have created in order to hit a million dollars. That is also a big problem. And so that’s kind of this aha that people have. So even if the suite is engineered correctly, we’re going to run into a capacity with time in the calendar based on.

    [00:20:46] Basic relational communication skills. The way around that is if you have lower ticket offers, so we can also, we can always run ads to that, you know, we can just keep pouring in ad spend too, but frankly, ads aren’t converting the way they used to, and they’re much more expensive. And so that’s not usually, uh, a first defense to fix this problem.

    [00:21:05] So let’s kind of recap what we talked about. We talked about a process that I teach called Method to Millions. It’s basically a math formula for you to open up your eyes, take a look at your suite of offers, what you currently have and determine whether or not you are actually physically going to be able to hit A million dollars with the programs and services that you’re selling.

    [00:21:23] This is why a lot of our clients love licensing because there isn’t capacity and it’s very little work and very little marketing. Just a little plug. If you’re interested in learning more about licensing, I have a lot of podcast episodes on that here to help you understand what the model of licensing your courses in a nutshell, take a look and be real with yourself.

    [00:21:43] Also understand how often can you realistically sell to your particular audience? And what I want you to do from this is pause for a minute and I want you to remove any offers that are not profitable or taking too much time. I want you to consider also adding new offers or upgrading current offers to increase the capacity.

    [00:22:04] So either increasing more people. Or increasing the amount of money that you can charge for those offers by engineering them better than they have been done in the past. We don’t want to necessarily just always increase the cost. We always want to look at the ROI of what we’re delivering and making sure that you’re ethically increasing your costs, especially in the consulting and strategist space.

    [00:22:24] Great. Okay. So again, this was the method to millions kind of mini workshop here. We’re talking about how to truly build a million dollar coaching business, what it actually takes. It’s not in the marketing. It’s not in the relationship. Those things come later. It comes in engineering the products that you’re selling, which is based from your amazing knowledge and whether or not you’re capable of actually hitting that number.

    [00:22:47] Again, if you want to access the free workshop that I teach exclusively to our clients, you can go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash millions and use the coupon code guest. That coupon will only be available for a limited time. So don’t wait to go over there and grab that. And for all of the show notes, the transcript of this, all of the resources and other resources we have for you, please visit SweetLifeCo.

    [00:23:17] com and you can just click right there on the button for the podcast. And I really appreciate you guys. Thank you so much for listening to the show. We are rolling over to year number seven. I absolutely love it. Absolutely. Cannot believe it. And, uh, we’re always here for you. So if you haven’t connected with us on LinkedIn, find me on LinkedIn at April beach.

    [00:23:35] And of course we would love to work with you to bring your business to the next level. Cruise over to SweetLifeCo. com and all of the resources we have are available for you there. Thank you so much. Have a fantastic end of 2023 and we have some exciting episodes to help you kick off the new year coming up here soon.


    4 Simple JV Partnership Types with April Beach and Charles Byrd (Episode 311)

    4 Simple JV Partnership Types



    Who is this episode for? 
    Entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of our Online Business Roadmap™
    This episode is tailor-made for entrepreneurs who have an established training or program but struggle to generate leads or have a smaller list. If you want ways to increase visibility for your business without diving into conventional advertising routes like Facebook or LinkedIn ads, then this episode is a must-listen.  
    April’s conversation with JV partnership expert, Charles Byrd, provides an alternative path to business growth that is dependable and requires less effort to generate leads. You will be introduced to the world of joint venture (JV) partnerships through Charles, a renowned figure in this arena. They’ll uncover the four distinct types of JV partnerships, learning how each can be a lucrative option depending on your business’s unique needs. This episode delivers actionable steps on implementing these JV strategies. When you’re finished listening you’ll have more clarity on which type of partnership is best for where you are in business currently. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the 4 types of JV partnerships
    2. Determine which type is best for you based on your offers
    3. Gain confidence in starting JV partnerships even if you have a small offer and no list. 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to another episode here of the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach. The host of this show, this is episode number 311. And we are diving in with a friend of mine, Charles Byrd, who’s going to unpack four different types of JV partnerships that feel really good and are very, very profitable for you to get into place for your business.

    [00:01:09] April Beach: So who is this show for? This show is for you. If you have an. Established program or training, doesn’t even matter. The actual cost and the value of that program. Charles is gonna unpack different strategies based on the value of your program here in the show. So if you have an established training or program and you want to get more eyes on you, you don’t probably run ads.

    [00:01:32] April Beach: If you’re like me, you know, Facebook and I had a big, huge divorce that includes my Facebook ads account. And so, you know, and you might not either have the investment or want to invest in running LinkedIn ads. And maybe that isn’t even aligning with your company, but you need to get more eyes on your business in a way that feels really good to you.

    [00:01:50] April Beach: So joint venture partnerships are a great way to do that. And so our guest today. Charles Byrd was referred to me by multiple different people because he is this go to guy on building JV partnerships in the way that he talks about it. And we unpack actually what is a JV partnership and what would be the right next steps for you.

    [00:02:09] April Beach: So if you want to generate your lead, more leads with the right people. In a way that aligns with your time, Charles is very much like I am. He takes his kids to cool places and travels around a lot and just frankly doesn’t overwork himself. He’s been very strategic and actually how he’s modeled his business.

    [00:02:26] April Beach: If you want to do that, get more leads into your business as well as this great episode for you to listen to. So again, this is episode number. 311 and you can visit all of the show notes by cruising over to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash 311 or by just going to SweetLifeCo. com clicking on the podcast.

    [00:02:47] April Beach: This is episode number 311 and everything will be over there waiting for you. If you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive in and meet my friend, Charles. All right, you guys. Thank you for being here this week. I am here with my friend Charles and Charles and I were introduced to each other by a mutual friend who is always looking to connect great people with great people.

    [00:03:07] April Beach: And one of the places that he learned that was from Charles himself. And so Charles has a gifting. of helping you to build your network, build your business by helping you to rethink how you get in front of your ideal audience in a way that it’s a win win for everybody. So I’m really excited to be talking about what we’re going to chat about on today’s show.

    [00:03:28] April Beach: Charles, welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. You want to give people a little bit of a background on who you are and how you got to the point where you are right now in your business and your area of expertise.

    [00:03:39] Charles Byrd: Absolutely. And April, thanks so much for having me. So I help businesses scale with joint venture partnerships, referrals, speaking, and for a little backstory straight into what I do today, I worked in the Silicon Valley for 15 years.

    [00:03:54] Charles Byrd: I was a director at a billion dollar software company. I left to get a taste of the entrepreneurial freedom I read about in books. I started with a low ticket and that’s it. Productivity course and being new to the online space. I didn’t have a list or connections at that time. So started going to a lot of events and connecting with people online and quickly found my new peer group of entrepreneurs already had my ideal clients in their communities.

    [00:04:22] Charles Byrd: So I started setting up presentations to other people’s audiences, delivering a high value training and offering the deeper dive course and started growing my email list quickly, making sales, making a positive impact. So I thought, since this is working, what if I take my it and systems background and simplify and systematize the entire joint venture process, which I did.

    [00:04:47] Charles Byrd: And eventually people wondered how I book. Two to six joint venture promotions per week for my offers to other people’s communities. And I was at a mastermind in Aspen and my phone’s blowing up with texts and messenger messages and people knocking on the room door going, how do you line up so many of these deals?

    [00:05:07] Charles Byrd: So I decided to put together my first high ticket event called pure JV and that’s the market I’ve been serving. Ever since, uh, at this point, that’s through one on one work with companies over five weeks and the steps that we walk people through are creating a unique joint venture strategy for their product and market, help them identify their most profitable partners.

    [00:05:31] Charles Byrd: Show them how to connect to those partners through warm channels. My favorite part, how to guide the conversations to land the deals frequently on the first call. Operationally, how to execute those deals from a systems perspective, and then how to turn each deal into two or three more. Eight of my clients in the first year added 1.

    [00:05:53] Charles Byrd: 25 to 6 million in additional revenue. I had three clients on stage with Tony Robbins last month. teaching them how to create embedded partnerships. So their offers inside of Tony’s, uh, one of my clients, Dr. Dan Pompa just booked on Joe Rogan through his PR company. And I’m showing him how to parlay that into warm intros to Lex Friedman and Andrew Huberman to take that win and take it to a whole nother level.

    [00:06:20] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a way to simply get in front of more of your ideal clients. through other people’s communities, audiences, and, and build amazing relationships on the way.

    [00:06:31] April Beach: And now I’m sure our listeners know why I was so excited to bring you here on the show, because this is, this is exactly what people are looking for.

    [00:06:39] April Beach: And the way you go about doing it, we’ve talked about affiliate launches and we’ve talked about those things. This is completely different. So the way you go about doing this is. is very unique and, um, it’s very relational. And that’s one of the reasons why I have been so interested in working with you as well for a long time.

    [00:06:56] April Beach: And I’ve, I’ve seen the case studies and I know your clients and it’s just what you do. You create amazing results in a way that feels really, really good. So let’s kind of go back to the beginning for our listeners who might not know actually what a joint venture is. Let’s define what JV is for our listeners or people who may be confused.

    [00:07:17] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Uh, so again, coming out of corporate, I, I thought a joint venture has been two big companies like Partner together and they’re basically married. And, uh, this is nothing quite like that. This, you can think of them as promotional partnerships. And I’ll just share a basic example, but I’ll point out there’s, um, you have the product or service.

    [00:07:42] Charles Byrd: Someone else has the audience. And so to use an example of like Brian Tracy, he’s got a, an audience of 500, 000 people who’ve subscribed to receive his emails. They follow him because he teaches sales, productivity, high performance. And so He’ll partner with experts that compliment those topics. And so imagine Brian mailing his 500, 000 people, inviting them to a presentation you’re putting on for your product or service, because it aligns with why people follow him to begin with.

    [00:08:19] Charles Byrd: And then everyone who registers for that training is added to your email list. So you can literally add thousands of people to your list. A day during those promotions and then you deliver a high, high value training in this example, everyone who signs up is a new client of yours and you share revenue with Brian because it was his audience to begin with.

    [00:08:40] Charles Byrd: So that would be like an example of a webinar type of promotion, but it also could be, I’ll cover a few different joint venture types in the process. It could also be me simply sending you a referral if we’ve lined up a referral partnership. That’s a type of joint venture as well. Um, and systematizing the joint venture process.

    [00:09:06] Charles Byrd: Um, in my presentation, I have a slide that says, do you get your referrals by luck or by design? Is it baked into the DNA of, of what you’re doing? So I personally get 12 to 20 referrals to million dollar plus businesses a week through this process. Um, so speaking to other people’s groups. Whether that’s a webinar format or a physical stage, um, referral partnerships, embedded partnerships.

    [00:09:38] Charles Byrd: That’s where as other people make sales of their product or service, you’re making a sale of yours because your offers inside of theirs, which I know April, we were chatting and you were excited because that aligns with some of your licensing strategies, creating embedded partnerships around that. And lastly, it would be social JVs, much like this interview is.

    [00:10:02] Charles Byrd: So it’s, it’s a conversation. Um, this of course gets me some exposure to your audience, April. Um, if I’m promoting this show to my audience, that’s getting you more exposure. So this is another form of, of joint venture, uh, which we never even talked about in those terms. It just happens to be. Another way to think about it.

    [00:10:24] Charles Byrd: Yeah.

    [00:10:25] April Beach: So for our listeners who, um, clearly this is somebody, I’m sure it’s something that almost everybody who’s listening is going to be like, this is, I absolutely need to be doing this. This sounds so smart, but what do they need to actually have in place already? To be in a position to start making these JV partnerships, what sort of content or trainings or what level of expertise do you recommend people have before they start moving into this?

    [00:10:53] April Beach: What’s this? That’s the prerequisite to move into this type of a partnership.

    [00:10:58] Charles Byrd: Sure. So I’ll, I’ll, uh, dive into what those specifically are. Um, also addressing. What are some of the things that hold people back from wanting to do these kind of things? Number one, how, how are these configured? If people don’t know how the deals are put together, then it’s easy to avoid them because they don’t know what the next step is, or they feel they could be complicated.

    [00:11:22] Charles Byrd: Um, and you know, or they, even if they see alignment, they don’t know how to guide a conversation into making that a reality, um, or something I call the reciprocation trap where people feel that. If, if someone else promotes them or their offer that they have to promote the other person’s offer, which is simply a story in our head, that’s not actually true.

    [00:11:49] Charles Byrd: Um, or one person’s audience is way bigger and they feel they’re not big enough to participate yet, which is again, just simply a self. limiting, um, thought. So the prerequisites, as, as you asked, are as follows. Now, based on the different JV types, um, some of them have more requirements than others to be able to achieve technically.

    [00:12:17] Charles Byrd: So let’s start at the simple side referrals. Not a lot of infrastructure required for referrals, so you can simply have a conversation with a friend, a peer, a client and talk through who right fit. Connections are for your product service, product services or rooms that you may want to get in front of minimal infrastructure.

    [00:12:45] Charles Byrd: We’re talking texts, emails, uh, those kind of basic things. So, and, and, you know, some way to track. Those from a spreadsheet to however, you feel like tracking them, um, which of course we have super dialed systems for and then, um, to a little more advanced where if you’re doing something like a webinar, like the example I shared regarding Brian Tracy, you would need a little more infrastructure in there’s layers to have very simple approaches versus more advanced, but in general, if you were doing something like a webinar, you would want it.

    [00:13:26] Charles Byrd: emails for a partner to be able to send out on your behalf so that they’re promoting it to their audience because you’re not going to have them write your emails. You’ll share them so their job is easier. Um, then those emails will have links to register for a training. That would mean you’d need some type of landing page where someone can read what the presentation’s about.

    [00:13:50] Charles Byrd: If they’re interested in it, they can sign up. And as they put their name and email in, those folks are getting added to your email list. So you’d have some type of autoresponder email tool to collect those, uh, leads coming through from the registrations. You’d need a tool to be able to deliver the webinar, something like Zoom or GoToWebinar, something like that.

    [00:14:12] Charles Byrd: Point being… Each strategy has its own specific, uh, systems and tools behind it. But keep in mind, a lot of these can be very straightforward. So certainly don’t get intimidated by the tools. It just has to do with which approach is the best for your business and to kind of cut to the chase a little bit on that, if you have higher ticket offers.

    [00:14:38] Charles Byrd: Your, your offers are more expensive. We’re talking 10, 15, 20 K, um, doing big promotions. Isn’t even a good use of your time. You want to simply get in front of your ideal clients going straight to where they are. So where are affluent, uh, entrepreneurs? Well they’re in other high ticket masterminds. They’re in other high ticket programs.

    [00:15:06] Charles Byrd: That, that’s where I spend my time is presenting to rooms full of million dollar plus businesses. So I can do one presentation, which by the way, I’m not even making an offer. I haven’t made an offer in front of a room in probably three years, but I walk off the stage and everyone who’s interested comes and has a chat.

    [00:15:28] Charles Byrd: We line up a followup call and a bunch of those become. Um, clients and then I meet with them a year later and many of them have, they’re over a million in, in a new revenue just from that. So, um, in any case, those are some of the JV types, some of the, uh, uh, reciprocation trap things that can hold people back.

    [00:15:49] Charles Byrd: But really what I want to highlight is it’s a new way of thinking of everyone you meet. They know someone who could be an ideal client for you or an ideal partner for you. So it’s, it’s building better relationships to get to those winning outcomes.

    [00:16:06] April Beach: Yeah. You said, you said so many things there. I want to pull out again and just highlight.

    [00:16:10] April Beach: First of all, is that oftentimes when you speak, you aren’t actually making an offer. And I think that our audience would assume that you’re coming in and you’re doing an actual sales webinar or a training, which could obviously be the case as well. But. Yeah. In what you said, in the way you do it, going in and just organically teaching your area of expertise or introducing a different thought process regarding, you know, what is the solution that you provide?

    [00:16:38] April Beach: That is, I think that feels really good. That’s one of the things that you do that I love the most because that really aligns more with. how we operate as a company. And I think a lot of our listeners are going to are going to find that as well. And I think just allowing for our listeners to, um, perhaps even get permission, maybe they need to realize that it’s okay to go and teach and pour in without feeling the need to sell and sell and sell in.

    [00:17:10] April Beach: According to your system and your process, you’re actually more profitable possibly because you don’t. Actually do that.

    [00:17:18] Charles Byrd: Yeah, absolutely. So again, I’ll draw these distinctions that could be helpful for people to self place where they may fit the best with some of these JV types. For one, I think everyone listening should lean into referrals.

    [00:17:34] Charles Byrd: It’s simple. It’s, it’s, uh, highly effective. Um, especially this doesn’t mean just from your own clients. I mean, I get a ton from clients, but it’s from my peer group. It’s from my friends. In fact, before we hit record here, you and I scheduled a call to line up great connections for each other. How much did that cost either of us?

    [00:17:56] Charles Byrd: Nothing. Um, so, uh, number one, start there. I will make a distinction with, uh, like my offers are quite high ticket because of the value they bring. But I’ll point out if if I had a two K offer or five K offer, I would be in front of broader groups. And I would be making offers in those presentations. It just has to do with where you are in the market where I’m talking to more advanced businesses in general anyway.

    [00:18:32] Charles Byrd: And when they hear a strategy that they don’t have in place and they want in place in a way, they don’t need to be sold. They’re like, I want that. So, um, whereas when I was running a group programs, which I did for many years, I’d actually fill them from, well, I guess three main places. One, I would do broader webinars and the call to action was to a sales call.

    [00:18:58] Charles Byrd: And, and so that would be people mailing their lists like that example, the Brian Tracy one, um, and I would present to the mid level masterminds, people in groups that are eight, 10, 15 K. Which those are way smaller groups, but they’re, they’re full of ideal clients. These people have invested in themselves.

    [00:19:20] Charles Byrd: They’re, they have enough traction in their business to do that. And typically the further along a entrepreneur is the way easier it is to help them because they have so many other ducks in a row. Um, and I’ll point out by consciously choosing to move up market Your life gets way easier.

    [00:19:42] April Beach: I’ve heard people say that for years and it wasn’t until I started doing that myself where I actually believed him.

    [00:19:48] April Beach: I think that was in the beginning, there was just a lot of intimidation there, but uh, over the years I, I realized you’re completely right about that. So that’s a really good distinction to my, yeah. My next question was going to be what, what is the vow? Who do you best connect with based on the value of your offer?

    [00:20:02] April Beach: And I know our listeners have offers absolutely from, you know, a few thousand dollars up to, up to 10 K whereas other, uh, other of our, our listeners have 50, 000 programs that they deliver as well. So what I’m hearing that you just said is based on the actual product that you’re selling, that’s where you’re going to The way that you would approach and deliver your content within this JV partnership would be based on the actual, um, really financial level or the audience.

    [00:20:33] April Beach: Um, I don’t want to say maturity because that’s not right. Uh, the, the audience, how advanced the, the buyer is with, with correlation with that offer in what they usually tend to need to buy because you’re right, because, you know, are more advanced or profitable entrepreneurs. They have their teams, they have their systems, they’re not so busy, uh, in the things that those people that are, are trying to break like that.

    [00:20:58] April Beach: 30 or 40 K a month ceiling or try all of those processes that, that tend to need to be brought into place for those other kind of mid level entrepreneurs. So that’s, that’s a really, really good point. So let’s kind of recap again, some of these, you said there are four primary types of JV partnerships that you love to guide people through.

    [00:21:20] April Beach: Can we recap those one more time? So I’m just trying to cover those again for our listeners.

    [00:21:25] Charles Byrd: Yeah. So number one is presenting to other people’s audiences. And you could kind of put that in a few camps, um, that could be, uh, speaking on a stage in front of a physical room. It could be presenting virtually to a group and, and then the caliber of that group, it, it could be a higher level group or it could be a broader webinar to a big list, a big audience.

    [00:21:51] Charles Byrd: Um, so all of those are. Presenting to a group number two referral partnerships again, highly recommend these and keep in mind referrals. Don’t have to just be to clients. Although those are lovely. Of course, you can get referrals to joint venture partners. You can get referrals to stages like If you want more podcasts, get your referrals to podcasts.

    [00:22:16] Charles Byrd: So you, you aim the cannon at what you are after. Um, then there’s embedded partnerships. Again, this is where there’s different configurations, but in general it’s where your product or service is inside of someone else’s offer or some of your content is in someone else’s offer that’s like a lead source for you.

    [00:22:39] Charles Byrd: And those are Some of my favorite because you’re making a singular deal that represents ongoing lead flow. Um, and just to cite an example of that, uh, one of my clients, Jackson Milan, um, came to me when it was at 1. 8 million a year later is over 6 million in cash collected through joy ventures. He was running Facebook ads that weren’t working particularly well and started working a lot worse when Facebook shut down his account and That’s when he was referred over to me and he’s a quick start.

    [00:23:13] April Beach: I love Jackson I’ve taught I’ve taught a master class in Jackson’s group before I think Jackson actually might have been one of the people that originally introduced us now that I’m thinking back before our other friend Brian this is So I, I’ve seen the ins and outs of how Jackson’s stuff works and, and you’re a genius, my friend.

    [00:23:37] Charles Byrd: Yeah. Um, Jackson, he, this guy’s he implements, so he booked, he hired me. We dove in on a strategy, identifying ideal partners, how to land those partners. He, he landed 70 joint ventures in two months, which is. Um, and then I taught him how to create embedded partnerships, and he lined up 15 of those. Uh, he more than tripled the business all the while touring Australia with his wife and two dogs in a four by four camper van before buying a farm by the, uh, Ocean and jungle.

    [00:24:14] Charles Byrd: Um, he wrote an intro for me two weeks ago. I, I think I got a screenshot of it. He does this intro and he’s like, Charles has made me more money than any human on planet earth. Right.

    [00:24:27] April Beach: Right. I believe it. I, I believe it. Um, Absolutely. What a great case study. And I, and I, and I love, so I can like continue to share a little bit, you know, with, with our audience that I, that I’ve actually been within his ecosystem, um, and seen that.

    [00:24:44] April Beach: And it’s a very well oiled machine. I will say that.

    [00:24:49] Charles Byrd: Yeah. He’s done a beautiful job. Um, I want to point one other thing out is, uh, I started with joint ventures off a 200 product, so you can do this the whole way. Like, and it is a risk free lead source, meaning. You only pay commission on sales that have been made.

    [00:25:13] Charles Byrd: So some, some promos work great. You send your partner money. In fact, I made a sale earlier today from a referral from a good friend of mine. And I’m like, remind me your PayPal, like going to send him money. Um, now keep in mind, he didn’t do the intro to make money. He did it because it’s the right fit for that person, but who doesn’t like getting money in the process?

    [00:25:37] Charles Byrd: So again, 200 product. Successfully jv’d with that. And then as, as I evolved as a entrepreneur and prices went to 2k and then five and then eight and have continued. Up past 45 for different offers. Um, it’s the strategy the whole time. Um, I, I do, I guess personally like it when folks offers are a little higher ticket because they can ROI me so fast.

    [00:26:08] Charles Byrd: Um, just as an example of Todd Hartley, he’s got his core offer was an 8k offer helping. businesses leverage video in their sales process to increase conversion. Um, Tony Robbins hired him to train all of his sales sales teams across his companies that worked so well that now Tony has him on stage for business mastery.

    [00:26:30] Charles Byrd: And he wanted to learn to JV with other people, not just Tony. So within four weeks of working together, he’d. We helped get this whole system in production. He’d lined up six JVs. He happened to pay me 35 K. His first joy venture brought 125 K next joy venture, 125 K. He’s added a hundred thousand a month for the last five months in money.

    [00:26:57] Charles Byrd: He never had previously. So, um, Anyway, with higher ticket offers, like not that everyone does this, mind you, but if, if he can four or five X his money on deal number one, but he’s lining them up multiple per week going forward, it’s a pretty nice thing.

    [00:27:16] April Beach: That’s a pretty great way to justify the investment of the genius you bring to somebody’s business too.

    [00:27:22] April Beach: I mean, this is just like, it’s, it’s great for him. It’s great for you. Um, I want all of our listeners to be thinking about just. Totally a little sidebar here. You guys, um, on your program, you know, can, can, can your students, uh, you know, four or five times the ROI on your program to besides the JV side of it.

    [00:27:43] April Beach: And, uh, it’s always something to, to be mindful about, or how long would that take them or actually what do they need to. do to be able to do that. So this is such a great conversation. Okay. So I think because I totally sidetracked us, you talking about Jackson. So we went over the four, the four basic types.

    [00:28:00] April Beach: Of course, I have my notes here. Cause I, I love learning from you. If you talked about presenting in front of other people’s groups, we talked about the referral partnerships. We talked about the embedded. Um, partnerships, which you and I both love you from a JV standpoint, me from a licensing standpoint.

    [00:28:17] April Beach: Those are just so powerful and so simple. Um, did I miss the

    [00:28:20] Charles Byrd: fourth one? What’s number four? And the fourth one was a social JVs, much like this kind of interview. Social. Oh my

    [00:28:27] April Beach: goodness. So cool. Um, my friend, I have, I have my chicken scratch notes here that I’m going to turn into our show notes, which I’m sure will turn into more resources for our listeners to, to recap, because there was so much, so much wisdom here in this show.

    [00:28:42] April Beach: So thank you. Thank you very much for your time and sharing this. How can people get into your ecosystem? How can people tap into where do you hang out? Uh, how can they continue to learn from you and, and tap into your world? Like, like our company is tapping into your world.

    [00:29:01] Charles Byrd: Oh, wonderful. Well, thanks.

    [00:29:02] Charles Byrd: Thanks for asking. Uh, simply pop over to charlesByrd. com B Y R D it’s got more info on that. the kind of work we do. There’s ways to, to reach me and the team through there. Um, I’m also on Facebook, Facebook slash dot com slash Charles Byrd, B Y R D. I don’t use LinkedIn a ton, but you can find me on there too.

    [00:29:26] Charles Byrd: Um, so yeah, these would be good places to, to connect. Awesome. Thank

    [00:29:31] April Beach: you so very much, Charles. I love learning from you and appreciate you pouring into our community and your

    [00:29:36] Charles Byrd: time here. My pleasure. Thanks for having me.

    [00:29:41] April Beach: All right. What a great episode with Charles. As you heard, and we’ve talked about affiliate launches before on this show.

    [00:29:49] April Beach: You’ve met others that have been in here. Um, I will say to you that personally, one of our strategies is a company that We have been leaning into for the last couple of years is having me teach and other business masterminds in that sort of, um, you know, way number one here is presenting other people’s groups.

    [00:30:08] April Beach: I’ve even taught a podcast on how to create a training program that’s aligned for your next step. here. If you want to go back and relisten to that, um, on how to teach a masterclass and other programs, the way Charles does it, you guys is it’s just so organic. I don’t want to use, I don’t want to use the word authentic because unfortunately I think that great year, that great word has been overused, but it’s very organic and it’s a good fit.

    [00:30:34] April Beach: So my summary for you here is, if you do have a higher ticket, Definitely make sure you’re connecting with Charles Moore. It’s charlesbyrd. com. And especially for those of you guys that hang out on Facebook, it sounds like he’s over there on Facebook and connect with him more, follow along. He’s, he’s very, very smart and, uh, in giving man and will lead you in the right direction.


    Easy Licensing Offers with April Beach (Episode 310)

    Easy Licensing Offers



    Episode Bonus: 
    Access for help building your first licensing offer.
    Who is this episode for? 
    Established consultants, coaches or subject matter experts who are ready to scale and in levels 2-4 of my Online Business Roadmap 
    n this episode we are revealing easy licensing offers that every entrepreneur can do regardless of your experience with licensing, length of time in business, and capacity. Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve been at it for a while, if you’re looking to grow without all the extra headaches, this episode’s for you. Have some training modules or content under your belt? Tune in. 
    Licensing is a great way to scale your business and expand the work you’ve already done by allowing other companies to distribute your trainings, content, courses, systems, frameworks, or materials. But the process of licensing may seem huge, especially when you’ve never done it before. But, you don’t want to miss out on an opportunity to scale your business. 
    In this episode, we unpack 3 Easy Licensing Offers that will increase your profit with less work. You’ll learn each offer and determine which is best for you. This is the perfect place to start if you aren’t sure if licensing is right for you or you simply don’t have the capacity to package a larger program to sell for millions but you want to scale and increase in a sustainable, non-intimidating way. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the easiest way to get into licensing that anyone can do
    2. Have 3 easy licensing offers you can choose to create
    3. Gain confidence in scaling with less effort to increase profit 
    Join to build your first licensing offer. 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] Hi there and welcome back to another episode here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. This is episode number 310 and I’m April Beach, your host, friend, business mentor, business strategist. And I am really excited about this episode today because like all of our episodes are really business strategies and trainings that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:01:09] But this particular training, I know you guys need, I’ve received the LinkedIn messages. I have received emails from you and from all the phone calls I’ve had for those of you guys who are interested in getting into licensing your trainings. But, but, but, here’s the big but, but you don’t have a ton of time and you don’t necessarily have a massive amount of bandwidth and you probably have a bunch of other projects you’re working on right now.

    [00:01:37] So you’re interested in getting into licensing, but you’re not ready to change your entire business model. I hear you. As a matter of fact, when I first started licensing, what I’m going to talk about here on this episode, This is how I started. I started small, but powerful, small, but mighty. And that’s what we’re unpacking here on this show.

    [00:01:59] On this show, I’m going to unpack three different easy licensing offers that you can get into that are super simple and that are going to set you up to grow and succeed with licensing moving forward based on your capacity and where you are right now. So this is episode number 310. You can find all the show notes, all the resources we’re going to give you over at SweetLifeCo.

    [00:02:22] com. Simply click on the podcast episode number 310. And then also if you want to dive in and you want me to work with you on the things that we’re talking about on this show and build your first easy licensing offer, make sure to join us. in license to scale. That’s license. The number two, the word scale.

    [00:02:43] com. You can join our workshop. We’re actually hosting two different events here in the month of October, November, the month of November, 2023 local here at our entrepreneur lab in Boulder, Colorado and online worldwide as well. So cruise over to license to scale. com register. And I’m going to hang out with you and we’re having a great time.

    [00:03:05] quick grab licensing offer to gather. Don’t miss that because I only host that live workshop a couple of times a year. Now let’s go into diving into the overview of all of these different possibilities and the three different quick type of licensing offers so that you can scale in this way that is not overwhelming and it’s going to be a really lucrative way for you to grow your business.

    [00:03:28] All right, let’s do it. Okay. First things first, let’s talk about what is licensing. If you aren’t familiar with it again, go back and listen to all of our other podcast episodes on how to license basic of licensing. We have so many resources. It was just blow your mind, but let me give you the nitty gritty here as you need to know it for this particular episode.

    [00:03:48] Licensing is like giving another company permission to distribute your trainings, your content, your steps of service, your genius, your frameworks that you have been coaching or consulting other people or even other businesses on for some time. Licensing is where we take your process, whether it’s built into a course or not, that we know works and we allow other companies to share it either internally with our own staff or Externally as part of their offers.

    [00:04:21] And so licensing is a really powerful way to scale your business instead of selling individually. Even if you’re doing launches for your programs where you know you’re selling everybody at once. What this allows us to do is sell it to one person. But they’re going to allow more seats to access it. And so therefore you get one sale for more money.

    [00:04:42] That’s what licensing is. We have clients that close huge licensing deals. As a matter of fact, I had a client just last month who turned a 6, 000 workshop into a 298, 000 licensing training that she licensed to a company and it only took her a month to do that. So this is a really lucrative way. But let’s say that you, aren’t really ready to get into the sales process to close a 300, 000 or a half a million or even a million dollar deal, which I’ll be honest, closing those licensing deals takes longer than the ones we’re talking about here on this episode, but you want to get started with licensing.

    [00:05:19] So what we’re going to do is we’re going to unpack three easy licensing offers that will increase your profits, but they don’t require all this sales time and effort. And let’s kind of start out with a little backstory about this. When I first got into licensing, this is how I did it. As a matter of fact, I did a lot of these things that we’re going to talk about here.

    [00:05:41] This was before I closed my first big licensing deal with a corporation. I had been working on these little licensing offers for a few years leading up to, frankly, having the confidence. and the understanding to be able to go in and close my first huge corporate deal. So you can get started with this like I did, but you don’t have to figure it out from scratch like I did.

    [00:06:05] You have me. So here you go. Let’s talk about this. So again, if you have a training or a program, And it is, it could even be one little module of a course, or maybe it’s a process that you’ve built out. When we’re talking about licensing, we’re talking about taking it from you having to be the one to sell and deliver it to an individual to allowing another company to take it and distribute it for you.

    [00:06:30] And it’s really a great way to scale your business and expand the reach of your work. When we allow other companies to just. Pick up the flag and carry it, and you get to make the money from that. Also, what’s really powerful about licensing is it levels up your thought leadership in your space. And so the three little easy, quick licensing offers we’re going to talk about today, you don’t have to lose the B to C side of your business.

    [00:06:57] You don’t have to fully go into licensing to do these little offers. So you can dip your toes into it. You’re going to get totally addicted, but you can dip your toes into it and see what this is all about. So let’s go ahead and dive into these three easy offers that will increase your profit. With little sales time and effort.

    [00:07:17] Now, number one is teaming up with your network. We know how important and powerful our network is. If you haven’t been spending time building relationships with your network, that is one area of sweat equity that I highly recommend you do in your network. There are other businesses. that might not be exactly like you.

    [00:07:36] They may not do exactly what you do, but they have programs or services or products that reach your same audience. So the first quick, easy licensing offer is teaming up with your networks and offering one course or one module, maybe from a whole course or training that you have. And allowing that other entrepreneur that’s in your network to add it to their current offer or program.

    [00:08:04] So you’re not losing it. You probably still release it and sell it yourself. But you’re taking one little piece and you’re augmenting their existing services with your one little piece. So I want you to be thinking about, first of all, who is in your network? What other businesses or specialists in your network reach your same clients?

    [00:08:24] And ideally, here’s, here’s the expert advanced move I want you to be thinking about. I want you to be thinking about businesses that are working with your clients, usually prior to when your client will be needing your full service. This is especially important if you’re still keeping that B2C side of your business so they can get a little taste of how amazing you are through somebody else’s program, and then they want to move over and work with you.

    [00:08:51] So. What is this concept? How do you do this? Number one, I want you to think of who is in your network that also serves your clients. What are their type of businesses or programs? Number two, I want you to look at your content and I want you to think about what sort of training or module and we’re talking micro guys like it doesn’t have to be this big, huge thing.

    [00:09:09] What sort of small video series or one video or one worksheet or one process would be helpful to allow your network to include in what they’re already doing that would be beneficial for the end user. And then the last part of that is I want you to think about who in your network works, and that’s the advanced move.

    [00:09:28] Not just anybody. I really want you to build relationships strategically because our time is more valuable than money. And so who in your network is actually working with your clients usually prior to when your clients are either looking for you or ready for your type of services. And then I want you to reach out to them, connect with them.

    [00:09:46] And the conversation goes something like this, super simple, Hey, listen, I love what you’re doing. I value that. I know that our areas of strength really compliment each other. And I would love to talk about how some of my content may be able to be added to your program and augment it so that we can work together as a team.

    [00:10:06] So that is way. Number one. doesn’t require huge sales processes. It’s really connecting with other people, taking part of your content and putting it into other people’s programs. Yes, you get paid for that. The financial arrangement can be as simple as a percentage of sales, or it can be a bulk payment upfront.

    [00:10:25] As a matter of fact, I’m thinking right now, I have a client that we’re working on right now doing this exact same thing. And she has a training in a program where we want to take a company’s program and the other. Other company has actually offered her a flat fee up front or a lower flat fee up front with long term residuals.

    [00:10:46] The decision is totally up to her, just like the decision is totally up to you. It depends on the value and how this particular licensing offer is fitting into your ongoing cashflow. I don’t know. Personally, I love having ongoing cashflow and residuals that I forgot was coming in. And all of a sudden I look at my bank account and there’s a royalty in there.

    [00:11:05] But you may want a bigger chunk up front. So easy way number one is teaming up with your network and finding what you can add to their programs. It’s going to be good for you and good for them. It’s an awesome way to go about doing it. It takes very little effort, very little time, and it’s super. Easy.

    [00:11:25] Frankly, exactly what we’re talking about here today. Number two. This is one I get a lot of buzz about. So people message me on LinkedIn when I say these words, they love it when I talk about this. So see if you geek out on this too. It is turning your competition into your clients. It’s kind of cool, huh?

    [00:11:44] It sounds pretty sexy, huh? Well, this is the way it works. And I, and I did this as well. So when you have other coaches that are doing the same thing or consultants or subject matter experts or strategists, basically they’re just like you, they’re literally your competition in your space. And you, however, have a great established Training or program.

    [00:12:07] It doesn’t even have to be huge. It can just be one part of a module, just like that networking collab we talked about before, or it can be a complete training. And let’s say that maybe you don’t want to sell these anymore. Have you grown out of selling some of your trainings? at one point in time, we have 56 online courses that you guys, I don’t even sell anymore.

    [00:12:27] And we are starting to release these to other business coaches to license because it just doesn’t fit into where we’re going. And frankly, what we’re talking about as a company. But there are great programs. They’ve gotten people results for years and years. So other business coaches who you could consider my competition are starting to license those for me because I’m not selling them anymore.

    [00:12:51] See how that works. So what do you have that you’re either? No longer selling, uh, or it’s not really part of your future growth plan. You can take this training and you can turn your competition into your clients by licensing your particular training to them. And this is super simple. As a matter of fact, I still do this in one of my other companies, and how it works is I literally have a brochure of trainings that people can download.

    [00:13:23] They can see the description of the training, get a sample of the training, and if they want it, they literally go online and actually purchase the classes that they want, sign my licensing agreement, and the whole thing is transferred to them to use within the terms that I have set. I don’t even talk to them on the phone, you guys.

    [00:13:42] It is a fast sale. It’s a fast deal and they’re out the door. So that is number two. And I will add the benefit to this is two years later, they show back up to pay me more money to renew their license of my trainings. It is a beautiful thing for everybody. So that is way number two. It’s actually turning your competition into your clients by taking trainings and programs that you’re just not really selling, not really pushing, or they aren’t part of your future.

    [00:14:10] Maybe thought leadership agenda in the book you’re writing and all the other. Fancy dancy things that you want to do in the future, but they’re great and they’re just sitting there. How many trainings and programs have you already created that are just sitting there collecting dust on the shelf? This option is for you.

    [00:14:28] So so far we’ve talked about networking and adding a small piece of your program to another outside businesses training. Now we’ve talked about turning your competition into your clients. And it’s a beautiful thing. And then the third way is this. I also did all of these. The third way is actually growing your team.

    [00:14:49] This may seem a little bit more complicated when I explained it, but I assure you it is very, very simple. So this is allowing other coaches. consultants, uh, subject matter experts, however you identify yourself, allowing others just like you to operate under your trademark. Okay, let me explain this. It’s not a franchise, but it’s where you give them a license to operate under your trademark, where they can Have a page on your website that shares who they are, and then you give them access to your trainings to distribute.

    [00:15:27] So you’re growing your team. This is a way to grow your team without you having to manage them, without them being employees, and they are licensees that have permission under the right framework to operate under your trademark and deliver your services. I did this. Okay. So let me explain this to you.

    [00:15:47] How I did this. This was way back in 2006, 2007. I had a very busy parent coaching business and at the time I was literally totally booked with clients. I had three little kids at home and frankly I just didn’t feel like working more, uh, nor, nor honestly, I mean in those days I think I was still breastfeeding.

    [00:16:07] I don’t think I could have worked more if I wanted to. But I was also coaching other businesses. So in the process of coaching other coaches, I came up with the idea of saying, Hey, listen, why don’t you just join my team? Why don’t I give you the ability to operate under my trademark? I can work less, the, the expanse, the name, the brand of my trademark grows, and I get to elevate my thought leadership.

    [00:16:33] And let me tell you how simple this was. It was giving them permission and access to operate under my trademark, creating different sort of rules that they abided by to operate under my trademark. But I also gave them all of the services and the steps and the processes and the forms and the sheets. And I basically gave them an entire business in a box.

    [00:16:54] And it was absolutely amazing. And within a year, my brand grew to offices in eight different states across the country so much that we received a ton of national media press and attention. So it seems super complicated. But it’s not. I didn’t feel like working anymore. And if you know a little bit about my history, this was a parent coaching business.

    [00:17:17] I’m one of the creators of the baby planning, kind of parent coaching industry, but that’s not my background. I’ve always been a bit, I was a business coach for 10 years, even before I started doing that. So believe me, I couldn’t wait to get out of actually parent coaching. I was the one that wanted to have other people do that and I needed to get back into that place where I was helping other businesses grow.

    [00:17:39] So I got to remove myself from the actual consulting side, which I really didn’t feel like doing anymore and move back into the business mentorship side while still growing my brand, expanding my trademark. and making money by allowing other parent coaches to use all of my good name and the brand that I had built and all the services and processes and trainings that I already had in place.

    [00:18:05] It was great for them. And believe me, it was. Awesome for me. So these are three very simple type of licensing packaging offers that you can think about. And, you know, I know on LinkedIn and on this podcast, I’m usually I’m talking about the big corporate deals, right? In selling big training programs to, uh, the government or Veterans Affairs or the state of Colorado or, you know, Google, you know, we’re talking about these big programs that close for hundreds of thousands of dollars, but these ones that I just talked to you about.

    [00:18:41] They’re easy. They’re fast to close. You are not going to make as much money on these each as if you’re selling and licensing your program to Google. We both know that, right? But it’s going to be one tenth of the time with one tenth of the work. And that’s why these easy licensing deals work. are so awesome, especially if you want to get into licensing, but you don’t have the capacity.

    [00:19:05] Maybe you don’t even know if you want to go into full blown licensing of your programs to other corporations, or maybe you don’t know if you want to release your marketing training to a university. You can start here and it’s very, very simple. So let me recap those three different easy licensing offers for you.

    [00:19:21] The first one was go to your network, take a piece of a training and add it to another program. So somebody else’s program in your network, again, ideally with a service that is prior to when somebody would need yours. Number two, you can turn your competition into your clients by taking the content and the trainings that you’re really no longer using and allowing your competition to distribute those.

    [00:19:45] And then you can go on to build your next level programs, your next level offers, and maybe move into a next level direction. And then number three is just to simply license your trademark, just to simply license the ability for other coaches to operate under your trademark and access some of your materials.

    [00:20:02] These are three very, very simple ways that you can scale your business with little effort. So how does that sound? I know it may seem new. All of these things are new to people and uh, that’s why I get so excited sharing them with you because everybody’s like, wow, their minds are blown when they hear about all these different options.

    [00:20:25] But these are fast and easy ways where we can expand the reach of your work. And we can level up your thought leadership and we can increase your profit with very little effort. So that’s what we’re talking about today. What do you think? This has been episode 310 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:20:44] If you would love to dive in with me so I can build your first easy licensing offer with you, of course you can cruise over to license. The number two and the word scale. com register to join us online or in person this month, November 2023. If you’re listening to this later and you missed that just cruise over to SweetLife co.

    [00:21:07] com and all of our licensing workshops and support resources will be there for you. All right. I love that you guys have tuned in. Thank you so much for hanging out with me on today’s show. I refuse advertisers. I have for six years, so if you don’t mind sharing this with your friend, we would greatly appreciate it.

    [00:21:23] That’s how we get the word about the word out about what we’re doing here and I Have an awesome day.


    Neuroscience and Money Mindset for High Achieving Entrepreneurs with April Beach and Danya Douglas Hunt (Episode 309)

    Neuroscience and Money Mindset for High Achieving Entrepreneurs



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 3-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”)  who are scaling to 7-8 Figures
    What is the science behind mindset? A lot of coaches teach mindset but don’t fully know, or teach neuroscience. When you understand it’s not “woo woo” and mindset strategies are backed by science, it can help you to implement for faster results. In this episode, Danya Douglas Hunt unpacks what’s behind mindset and takes listeners through actionable steps to close milliondollar deals, sell more of your consulting or coaching services, and utilize proven processes to push yourself through barriers that may have been holding you back, whether you were aware of them or not. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Change your mind about “mindset” if you were never a big fan
    2. Understand more about the importance of neuroscience for your life and business
    3. Have actionable steps that can push you to higher profit in your business
    Danya Douglas Hunt’s Instagram
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:47] April: Hi, you guys. In this episode, we are diving into the science behind mindset. It’s a very special episode. As you know, I’m not a mindset coach and frankly, I think there’s a lot of mindset coaches out there that just have you chant things and do things over and over again. And now I am a believer that envisioning things and setting your projection on things works.

    [00:01:09] April: I actually know that there’s science behind it and I don’t. think that science is talked about enough, science is uncovered enough, and I kind of geek out on science. And so I’m super excited to bring Dania Douglas Hunt onto the show today. So if you’re a high achieving entrepreneur, you value mindset coaching, or you want to tap into mindset coaching to reach eight figures or seven figures. This episode is for you.

    [00:01:40] April: This is not for beginner coaches. This is for those of you guys that you’re good at what you do and it’s time to push you through to the next level. You value mindset, but you really want to know that there is science behind it. And when you know the power of neuroscience.

    [00:01:56] April: and money mindset strategies like we’re going to uncover in this episode today, then you’re going to understand why it’s important for you to tap into that and really bring it into your business and into your life overall. So this is a jam packed episode with Danya Douglas Hunt. Now, Danya was a former Olympic athlete trainer turned mindset coach for seven and eight. figure entrepreneurs, because when we look at peak performance athletics and entrepreneurships, we have tons of similarities and we have some of the same blocks as well. Danya is actually part of our expert dream team that comes in and works with our clients every single month. We’re so glad to have her.

    [00:02:37] April: And I’m going to admit when my clients were begging for her to come in and she’s a friend. And so we brought her in as part of the team. And at first I was like, I don’t need this. You guys have better believe that I am the one up front and center. Every single time Danya is in there, she kicks off every single month. for our clients and our wave makers program and our, our amplify and our scale programs. And she’s just a rock star.

    [00:03:03] April: So in this show, we’re going to unpack, like I said, the neuroscience behind mindset, and she’s going to take you through very practical strategies. So you know where you might be blocked and what you actually want to do in order to hit that next level. By using neuroscience and money mindset strategies. And so if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in. All right, you guys. I’m so glad you’re here with my friend, Danya and we’ve talked about her. I’ve been warming up to this episode. And if you don’t know, Danya you’re definitely going to want to be connected with her after this show.

    [00:03:36] April: You know, when we talk about mindset, that isn’t something Danya, like you and I laugh all the time. April is not a mindset coach, right? So, so, so where, where do my people get fed? Where do our clients get fed? Where do our clients. Keep getting that fire within to go to the next level. And our secret weapon is Danya Douglas Hunt. I’ll be real honest. So I’m really excited to have her here on the show. Welcome to the SweetLife Podcast. I’m so glad you’re here.

    [00:04:07] Danya: Thank you for having me. Yeah, it’s, we always have such fun conversations because. You’re an expert in what you do in business strategy. And I unpack all the personal strategy that helps implement your strategy and take action. So it’s a, it’s a great combo. It’s fun to have conversations and I’m pumped to be here. Let’s, let’s create some shifts and help people play bigger.

    [00:04:25] April: Right. Right. So in the truth of the matter is I remember when I, when I first brought you in, I’m like, Oh my gosh, my people need this so badly. And you guys, if you see the video recordings of when, when Danya is in there every single month, who is the one that’s like front and the center on the edge of her seat to all the stuff, implementing the shit, all of it. Yes. It’s yours. Truly. I’m like, Oh man, this is so good. I needed this so badly. So you know, the reality is I’m like, I’m good. I don’t need this. I’m just going to, I’m just going to help our clients. I’m just going to get this for our clients. Uh, uh, uh, uh. I do not miss one of those.

    [00:05:00] April: So, uh, I’ve learned so much from you. I’ve learned so much from you also. So today we’re going to talk about money mindset, right? And this is, there are so many big shifts on a relationship with money and all these other things. But you know, like what our clients are doing, some of our clients are sitting at the table selling what has been a 99 course now for half a million dollars. And it requires. A different understanding, a different belief to do that. Yeah, and that’s where you come in.

    [00:05:33] Danya: Yeah, and so I just want to echo back to what you just said about even being on the calls. Like, I think a big misconception is people think first mindset works just like, Oh, think positive. No, it is about getting your subconscious mind and your nervous system on board to your desires.

    [00:05:49] Danya: And real quick here, your brain hates change. It can’t predict it. Even though consciously you’re like, I want the million dollar a month. I want this. If you have not got your subconscious mind or nervous system on board to that, your brain’s going to perceive whatever your desires are to be a threat. And so then what happens is, as you’re working towards your goals, have fun, burning out, feeling stressed out, not being fulfilled on this hamster wheel, because your mind is not actually helping assist you to get there.

    [00:06:14] Danya: It’s trying to protect you from that thing it thinks is a lion. So as people are scaling their businesses, the, some of the most vital work you can do is mindset work, nervous system regulation, because of how the brain operates. And so it’s like, Oh, I’ve got, I have lots of money. I know most people who actually need the money mindset work are people who have lots of money.

    [00:06:33] Danya: Just going to say it because what tends to happen when you get money. So first there’s like, Oh, I just, when I’m going to get the money, I’ll be happy. That’s a false misconception. But then you get the money. What happens having this experience where it’s like, okay, now I sold a hundred K offer or I’m making half a million dollars a month.

    [00:06:48] Danya: Your nervous system is freaking out because now we’re worried about what people are going to think, or if I’m going to lose it, or whether she was going to drop, or we’re looking at how we’re operating. And it’s like, I want to scale the next level. But I can’t possibly work harder or put more time in.

    [00:07:00] Danya: And so then a lot of us almost build these traps for ourselves, but just based on our perceptions and beliefs around money, we think we have to do with what’s possible required of us. And we maybe have the accolades, but we’re not feeling fulfilled, or we’re not present with our families or taking time off.

    [00:07:14] Danya: And so it’s this. It’s this beautiful amalgamation of, as you grow and scale yourself, you’re going to grow and scale your business naturally. And most people focus just on the strategy, which is absolutely vital. You need that like law of action. We live in a 3d world where we need to have strategy, take action.

    [00:07:30] Danya: However, the intention, the energy. Behind those actions is what’s going to dictate your results. And most of us aren’t aware of what’s actually creating those results or creating our experiences of money. So I look at entrepreneurs I work with, just like the Olympians I used to work with. Olympians are really good athletes.

    [00:07:49] Danya: They’re good athletes, right? And they’re looking to increase and optimize themselves to the next 1%, the next 0. 5%. In my mind, the entrepreneurs that work with are just like Olympians. They’re the Olympians of business space. You’re constantly looking to optimize, refine, do things better, easier, like, and it’s just this constant evolution.

    [00:08:07] Danya: However, if our mind and our body aren’t on board, it’s a lot harder, a lot more stressful, a lot more unfulfilled. You’re going to have, as things hit the fan, like maybe your launch fails or a client. Sue’s you, or there’s a Facebook ads account that gets hacked down. If you don’t have the mind and body regulated to that level of what you’re calling in and where you’re going, it’s going to be a really stressful, unenjoyable journey.

    [00:08:29] Danya: So that’s where I come in. And I just wanted to echo that. Cause like people are like, Oh, just mindset. No, it’s not that it’s so much more than that. And it’s going to help assist you to your goals way easier and faster.

    [00:08:39] April: Yeah, I’m so glad that you said that. And one of the things you said was about, you know, being nervous about making more money.

    [00:08:44] April: And, and I remember that like around a decade ago, I used to think that, you know, I used to have these preconceived beliefs that, you know, everybody with money is a total asshole. And I didn’t want to be that person. Um, and then. I thought, Oh my gosh, I don’t even want to make that much money because I don’t want that responsibility.

    [00:09:01] April: That seems like so heavy to me. Like the more money I make, and I remember this feeling of just being weighted down and it was probably a good five years of intentional work that I had to actually push through that and change. All of that that you were saying, I probably wouldn’t have taken me five years.

    [00:09:18] April: Had I, had I known you back then, but yeah, all of those things are so true. And I think one of the, one of the coolest things that I have learned in the process of, of having you come into our client ecosystem is all the science behind this is understanding, you know, who we were. In the past and how that affects us today and how, yes, like, Oh my gosh, you see this and you, your, your mind, your body thinks lion and all of these, honestly, back to the basics of why instead of just, Oh, we’re just going to manifest something, you know what I mean?

    [00:09:57] April: Serious science behind this and I’m a science geek for the, for the millions of college classes that I did take and zero degree to show for it. Every single class I took was a science class because I’m a science dork, right? And so I think also when we’re talking about mindset, that really helps me in your expertise because you bring in all of the science behind it.

    [00:10:18] April: Yeah, totally. Factual it makes sense. It isn’t just putting fairy dust in the air and hoping and believing and jumping off a cliff, right? So I I just I just have to say that um, so when what are the problems so so we’re talking about Looking and moving forward getting to the next level our listeners. Our clients are getting to the next level Yeah And there are issues getting there that isn’t just strategy. What, what’s the deal? What’s the problem?

    [00:10:50] Danya: Yeah. So first we, I will keep it short and tight. First, we need to recognize, understand that our subconscious mind is something that’s responsible for 99 percent of everything we do.

    [00:11:00] Danya: So let’s put this into context though, because I need anchoring down. What the heck does this even mean? Right now, my heart’s beating. I’m not worried about my heart beating. It’s doing it on its own right now. I’m talking to you and words are coming out my mouth and somehow my tongue is moving and air is coming out and sounds.

    [00:11:13] Danya: And you’re able to perceive that and listen and interpret that, right? That’s subconscious mind. Um, me driving is now automatic. I just drive and I don’t have to think about that. So your subconscious mind is a supercomputer that runs everything we do or. And it’s necessary because if we had to sit here and think about how to move my finger or my lips, like we would just be oversimplifying the data.

    [00:11:34] Danya: The thing is though, most of us don’t recognize that our subconscious mind that runs everything is programmed from a young age and it continues to be programmed based on what was around us, what was modeled, what we heard, what we listened to. And so many entrepreneurs right now, whatever age you are, Are running your businesses with like your five or eight year old mind.

    [00:11:52] Danya: Now, I don’t know about you, but I don’t want my five year old running my business. Like it’s not helpful. And so a big part of what happens as we’re developing from zero to seven is we don’t have that critical factor to reject information. So when it comes to money, just even to have awareness. Because unless, until you make the con, the unconscious conscious, we can’t change it.

    [00:12:11] Danya: So a big part of where we start with entrepreneurs is let’s just bring awareness to where is my money stores? What are my money beliefs? Well, guess what? So much of that is shaped around you. And you can look at like my sister’s four year old is already making connections with money of like out money for this.

    [00:12:25] Danya: And this is, you know, it’s like your brain is constantly making interpretations and taking experiences and taking almost like pictures of snapshots that are being stored as like a picture in the brain. Um, Yeah. And so if we ever had an experience that, um, causes emotional turmoil as a young age, whether we remember it or not, your brain is constant scanning the environment and filtering it through like the 4 billions of bits of data, filtering it through your own identity, your beliefs, your values, and your senses and past experiences to present you with, um, the whatever, five or seven bits of information.

    [00:12:57] Danya: So most of us are in our businesses as five year olds or eight year olds. And so let’s, let’s get some, um, awareness here. Think about when you grew up, what did you potentially witness or experience about money for some, it’s like you witnessed parents fighting. Maybe divorce was caused because your brain’s been a connection of money.

    [00:13:17] Danya: It’s not, it’s not actually that, but maybe your brain thinks that, um, made interpretation of that. Maybe, um, you heard things like, we don’t have the money. We can’t afford that. You have to work hard for money. Maybe you watch things on TV, your coaches, or you experienced like, so beliefs and identity gets shaped from a young age.

    [00:13:33] Danya: And we can just look back and say, what was kind of happening in and around my early childhood around money, conversations, experiences, um, events, listening to things and recognize until we uncover that and reprogram that that’s going to be continuing to run the show. So that’s where I want to start with people is recognizing what’s actually causing us to create those results.

    [00:13:55] Danya: Now we talked about even before in the show, what does create results? So if we put results on the far right hand side, that’s like the end of, if you’re looking at me right now, I’m wearing, okay, this gold chain, that’s the result. There’s a cause behind this result. So there’s law of cause and effect. Okay.

    [00:14:12] Danya: So the effect or the result always has a cause behind it. I maybe saw this on my dresser and I was like, I want to wear a gold chain. So it was an amalgamation of me looking at it, maybe seeing how I wanted to feel that caused me to put on this gold chain. And now the effect is I’m sitting here in front of you, April, with this gold chain on.

    [00:14:28] Danya: Make sense? Yeah. Now look at our bank account. That’s the effect. Look at everything you have in your external reality. That’s the effect. That’s the result. What actually creates those results though is first action and strategy and behaviors proceed results. Okay. So strategy, business, Facebook funnels, email marketing, whatever.

    [00:14:47] Danya: So that comes before the results, the effect. Well, what comes before strategy, business, um, action behaviors is our state. Our vibration, our frequency, how we’re feeling, okay? Because people are like, Oh, I don’t care about my feelings. Your emotions are causing you to do or not do something. That’s the role of them.

    [00:15:06] Danya: It’s take action, not take action. For example, the sensation of hunger makes you go get food. The sensation of being tired makes you take a nap. The sensation of anything is causing you to do an action. So if we are in a muddled state. Like maybe we’re like disempowered. We’re worried about people, fear of judgment.

    [00:15:24] Danya: We’re about to do something new and we’re in fear, scarcity, whatever. That state, we tend to take very different actions. which get us very different results versus if we’re in a really empowered state, I’m badass, I’m confident, I got this. I tend to take very different actions or behaviors and they get different results.

    [00:15:40] Danya: So your state is, can dictate the ripple effect of results, but what comes before your state? It’s going to be the thoughts. Now, how many of us have thoughts and repeat, like, Oh, I’m not good enough, or like, I can’t do this, is this even possible? Is this even worth it? Just on loop. Well, where did those thoughts come from?

    [00:15:56] Danya: Right? Like, thoughts and state mirror ourselves very closely. We can think of thought, I have to do this, and it causes pressure in our body. Or, I get to do this, and it causes expansion in our body. Okay? So, words, thoughts, science proves this, have frequency. They’re energetic and their frequency, what I’m thinking, what I’m verbalizing is going to shift and cause my state to shift and change, which guess what actions and results, but then what comes before our thoughts are subconscious, our mind, our identity, our beliefs, our values that was programmed in.

    [00:16:27] Danya: And we can look at even the site of genetics where it’s passed down generationally. All of that right there comes before our results. So most entrepreneurs are just folks on the action, working hard, doing it, and there’s nothing wrong with that. However, When entrepreneurs typically come to me, it’s because they’ve hit a result or a plateau and they’re like, Oh, no matter what I do, how hard I work, I’m still getting the same thing.

    [00:16:47] Danya: Or they’re at this point where there’s like, I can’t possibly work any harder, but I want to scale my business. And so now we look at, okay, most of us are only focused on the last two elements is behavior, actions, and results. And we really need to start unpacking under the hood of like your state, your thoughts and your subconscious mind and getting that on board.

    [00:17:05] Danya: Because once we have this on board, the results are a natural by product. Right. If I’ve got a belief of money comes to me freely and abundantly, or like it comes in easily and I’m not in scarcity and fear, I’m going to get very different results. And not only that your subconscious mind’s job is first and foremost survival to protect you.

    [00:17:22] Danya: So if it goes against anything you believe to be true, deep down inside, your brain’s not even going to show you it. It’s going to, it’s going to try and help protect you from that line, even though it’s not a line anymore. The second thing is your brain’s job is always trying to find evidence to prove you right.

    [00:17:35] Danya: So if we have a belief that rich people are a holes, guess what you’re going to see? Rich people are a holes. If you have a belief that rich people are kind and generous, you’re going to see rich people are kind and generous. Your brain’s job is to literally prove you right and protect you. And so as we’re looking at this kind of conversation, start to understand, like.

    [00:17:53] Danya: What are my beliefs about money? What did I hear growing up? What are potential the programs running on autopilot in the background? I didn’t choose. I learned that are creating the result. I have right here right now. If you’re not sure, look at your results. Look at your bank account. Look at how you feel about money.

    [00:18:07] Danya: Look at your, are you able to be present? When you have downtime or so like a fear of like, Oh, but it’s going to drop and I can’t take time. Like I talked to one entrepreneur and the thought of taking five minutes to herself caused her a massive anxiety and panic attack. We know it’s not going to kill her, but there’s some perception, some belief that’s driving that behavior, which gets the results of now burning out.

    [00:18:30] Danya: So hopefully that kind of impacts of like, it’s not just it, both of them have to work together. Cause you can’t just kumbaya and just do subconscious programming. You have to take action. You can’t just sit here and be like rainbows and butterflies. No, but so many of us, the question I want everyone to start asking yourselves is what’s the intention behind this decision or action.

    [00:18:49] Danya: Is it rooted in fear, scarcity, worry, proving myself, validation, whatever, or is it rooted in alignment, expansion, abundance, et cetera, because whatever energy it’s in is going to come in the result as well. It doesn’t change. It doesn’t like you don’t get all the money. And here’s where I’ll make a caveat to that.

    [00:19:07] Danya: How many of us have gotten the money and they were like, Oh, that’s going to make me feel safe and secure. Right. And in fact, it either makes it the opposite, like, Oh no, I’m going to lose it. Or now it lasted for a second and you’re like, how do I repeat this? How do I do this? And it’s like this next, next, next thing.

    [00:19:22] Danya: There’s a lot of sneaky ways how money, beliefs, and identity can show up. And it first starts at the awareness of checking into your place and ask yourself questions and, or look at your results and based on your results, you can kind of backtrack of what’s the belief of identity that created this result.

    [00:19:37] Danya: And if you want things to be, here’s the thing too, it’s like money doesn’t have to be hard or stressful or like, like laborious at all. It can be easy and fun and enjoyment, not with our current level of programs and beliefs though. So that’s how we’re going to pack that. Did that long answer your question of like, just some stuff there about some neuroscience, but also some understanding of where we can leave the scientists like for a few mindsets.

    [00:20:01] Danya: It’s just what actually creates our results.

    [00:20:03] April: Right. And, you know, a couple of things that you said that was, it was really interesting that actually. reminded me of, uh, of entrepreneurs when they’re just for starting to hit those consistent 10 K months. And you said something, you know, do you believe it’s gonna happen?

    [00:20:17] April: Or are you so stressed out that you’re trying to prove to yourself? And I think that the majority of entrepreneurs why hitting those consistent 10 K months and then you get to 20 and then you get to 30. And I think one of the things that’s so hard about that Is it they are like, I have to do this. Am I going to do it?

    [00:20:36] April: It’s such a it’s not a deep rooted belief that of course this is going to happen. It’s I need to prove it to myself and I need to prove it to everybody else. And I have this big thing I have to prove. I just spent an hour on the phone with a guy yesterday who’s I have to completely monetize my podcast so I can quit my nine to five in 30 days.

    [00:20:55] April: And you know what I mean? I mean, half of me was like, please don’t like bet the mortgage on this. I was really honest. I’m like, okay, dude, let’s kind of like come back down to earth. You know what I mean? But in the same stage too. He had no doubt that he was going to do that and he just needed the strategy behind it to do it, right?

    [00:21:14] April: Yeah, that’s actually very rare. Most people I talk to that are still, you know, that are just trying to they’re like, oh my gosh Well, I have to do this because what if I can’t quit my job here, then they’re they’re deep rooted in fear Um, and in fear of failure and in in that they have to prove to themselves.

    [00:21:29] April: So I just, I, I, I see that all the time. I, I actually don’t very often see the guy I talked to yesterday. He’s like, I’m going to do this. I usually see nine out of 10 people are like, please, like, you know, Hail Mary, can I figure out how to do this? Um, so, but

    [00:21:49] Danya: Can you what you just said too, about what actually happens to our brain when anger and pressure take over.

    [00:21:55] Danya: Yeah.

    [00:21:55] Danya: Cause like. I can’t tell you how many, like, especially like my A type personality is like, look, this is my edge. This is, I need this edge and pressure. Now I understand, like I worked with Olympia athletes and I work with very driven entrepreneurs. I get it. What’s the intention behind that pressure and anger though?

    [00:22:15] Danya: Because if it’s rooted in like, actually this helps me focus and get in flow state, that’s different. But if it’s coming from like anger or fear or stress or anything that’s causing us to go into any sort of, and we know we can, I’m not gonna lie to ourselves, like it causes us to go in any sort of disempowered state or proving state or like scarcity state.

    [00:22:31] Danya: I really want everyone to hear this. When you go into anger and fear, you are literally becoming dumber. I’m just gonna say it. So those two emotions or those two sensations in the body, From a neuroscience perspective is literally shutting down that the access to the parts of your brain that would help you get out of the situation or perform better and see the creativity and solutions and intuition, et cetera, to prepare your legs to get strong or your job to get stronger to run.

    [00:23:00] Danya: So going back to the physiology, we have the same nervous system and subconscious mind as animals. It works incredibly well for animals. What differentiates us is our conscious mind. So, whenever we signal, and let’s just talk about what even this is, anger and fear are an emotionally, uh, emotionally physiological response to a perceived threat.

    [00:23:20] Danya: Perceived threat. Most of us are having perceiving threats of what people are going to think of us. Oh no, the traffic. Someone just cut me off. Or, um, what is, if I have this money, what if I now lose it? And we’re constantly signaling this low level fight or flight response in our body. Now for animals, it works fantastic because it turns on and it turns off right away.

    [00:23:40] Danya: Humans can perpetuate the fight or flight state, which is causing anger and fear in our body, which literally again signals fight or flight, which my legs will become strong. My jaw will become stronger and my parasympathetic system. So I’ve got fight or flight, which is sympathetic. Let’s kick on right away from lion or parasympathetic, which is all about healing, digestion, restoration, um, accessing, seeing possibilities, solutions, et cetera, creativity.

    [00:24:04] Danya: If fight or flights kicked on, which for most entrepreneurs, it’s kicked on all the time, low level. There’s like a thousand tabs in the background. They’re just constantly causing this, like fight or flight state. Great. Well, I know that most entrepreneurs are working well, but just like Olympic athletes, there’s like, we’re looking for the next 1%.

    [00:24:20] Danya: Imagine what it would be like if we could close down the thousands of tabs. That are causing like this, the perceived threat of like something that happened to you when you’re three years old. Now the thought of this email coming through, Oh my gosh, I left a mean comment. Oh my gosh, my bank account dipped a second.

    [00:24:32] Danya: Okay, my revenue dipped to 20%. All of that is signaling fight or flight in the brain, which is causing your legs to become strong and your jaw to become strong to run away from a threat that’s perceived. And you’re tapping it, you’re taking out your resources that actually can help you optimize and be more efficient as a leader, as a CEO, as a visionary.

    [00:24:50] Danya: So, for those of us who are like, but I need that edge and anger, I just want you to imagine every time you have that feeling or sensation or thought, your brain’s thinking there’s a line in front of you. And so your legs can become strong and your jaw becomes strong. But it’s not useful for humans. It’s not designed for a sophisticated world.

    [00:25:06] Danya: So can we get to a state where we can release that so we don’t have looping thoughts on repeat and we don’t have that physiological sensation happening? Yes. And that’s where we go and uncover some stuff of like, what’s causing the signals in my brain to say, there’s a line, run. Otherwise, we’re just not accessing so many resources that are going to help us even operate better, more efficiently, getting out of situations and possibilities that will help us.

    [00:25:31] April: Yeah. That’s a perfect segue into giving our listeners like some steps to implement because every single one of our listeners has been in that state, you know, as much as we would all love to admit it, we’ve, we haven’t been scared or we haven’t been stressed out. That’s a lie. And how do we respond to that?

    [00:25:49] April: And you know, that you’re like, this is what Dan coaches me on. You guys like, about, like, I always like need that edge just ’cause I, that’s my background. That the adventure edge. I love putting myself in dangerous outdoor situations. ,

    [00:26:03] Danya: I know, I feel like when we hang out, it’s gonna be bad. ’cause we’re both like, let’s go, let’s just jump off this thing.

    [00:26:07] Danya: Let’s just do this, let’s jump off this clip. Right?

    [00:26:09] April: Yeah. This, this looks, this looks like an adventure, you know? Yeah. And, and I do. And, and I need that. Mm-hmm. , I need that.

    [00:26:17] Danya: I’d ask you though, like, so some people only have that it gets them in flow state that’s different. Yeah. And this is like totally focused, like fear, like anger state, right?

    [00:26:28] Danya: So if it’s causing a physiological response to my body where I’m feeling stressed or there’s lots of energy and whatever, just recognize your brain is seeing whatever’s in front of you as a lion. And now you’re, you’re literally becoming dumber. Or is it priming me to be? So a flow state where I feel expansive and I feel like let’s go.

    [00:26:44] Danya: It’s different. And only you’re going to know the intention energy behind it. But most people are like, go to the fight or flight anger, like bro state. Like, so it’s, it’s a nuance. I appreciate that, especially with athletes, but here’s the thing, even athletes, you don’t want, like, let’s say you have a boxer.

    [00:26:59] Danya: You don’t want your box to be angry. Cause they know you, what happens when people become angry or, or trigger that the thought can trigger anger. We, JAWS become like more pronounced, you know, like you narrow focus and you can almost predict the moves that they’re going to do because it’s like their brain is just shutting down and focusing on like survival right now.

    [00:27:17] Danya: So even athletes are in combat sports, you want them to be as clear minded and open and calm and not triggering fight or flight. You’ll know if you’re triggering fight or flight based on your physiology, um, because it keeps you open to accessibility of seeing creativity, solutions, intuition, et cetera.

    [00:27:32] Danya: So only you’re going to know April if it’s like, okay, is this like triggering that for me? And, or is it no, it’s actually keeping me in a calm flow state and it’s helping me and only you’re going to know that.

    [00:27:43] April: Yeah. And for me, it’s always flow state. And I mean, it has been since I was a little girl. And, and that’s really a good thing for you to point out because I just assumed that, well, of course it’s going to put everybody else in flow state too.

    [00:27:54] April: Even the people that haven’t experienced it before. This is so funny. Okay. This is a total, this is a total reveal behind the scenes. So little sidebar. So I host these entrepreneur adventure retreats and fun. What we do is the first day is I always take people like up into the mountains and like out of the element and we’re pushing ourselves to some sort of extreme.

    [00:28:15] April: Like nothing is like super dangerous. Um, but it’s usually things that people just don’t do every single day. Right. And honestly, the people that actually joined me on the first adventure day, usually here, especially when we do them in Colorado, they’re so much more successful in their business. Strategy the rest of the weekend.

    [00:28:32] April: But now that you say that, and we do like ice baths and all these things right now that you say that, um, I just assumed everybody would get in flow state. Maybe, I mean, I have these retreats planned for next year and everything too. We’re going to go be doing this really cool outdoor thing. And then business strategy.

    [00:28:48] April: Maybe I should make sure that you’re there. So for that, because I just thought, Hey, this is going to be great. Everybody’s going to tap into flow and it’s going to be awesome. But maybe I’m totally doing people a complete disservice, just assuming everybody’s going to be, well, historically everybody has.

    [00:29:05] April: So. Thank you, God, that everybody’s been okay so far. But now that you say this, I guess just because that is me, this is my experience, it’s always tapping into flow. But you pointing out that that might not be the case for somebody else is like. A lot of people.

    [00:29:22] Danya: Oh shit. Yeah. And I want to, let’s bring this back to, it’s like, it’s never the external situation that causes the feelings or thoughts in our body, but rather how our mind is perceiving and processing data.

    [00:29:36] Danya: And so oftentimes if we’re perceiving a threat, it’s going to cause us to go into that fear or anger response, right? So because look at it, some of us can have lots of money. And have like no fear response and other people can be like, Ooh, lots of fear response. So is it the money that’s causing it? No, it’s my perception based on my own identity, my beliefs, my past experiences that are causing me to have some sort of like blip of data that’s not processed through.

    [00:29:58] Danya: So for you, you’re like, yeah, cool plan. Just paraglide off the mountain. Great. For most people, they’re going to be like, what the F? Like they’re literally sphincter is going to tighten up and they’re going to want to vomit. Because it’s not the external that creates that. It’s my perception of that, that’s actually creating the experience within me.

    [00:30:14] Danya: And that’s, if we’re like, um, well, how do I know what that perception is? Then that’s when we start to uncover and unpack kind of like, there’s probably some past blips or past experiences that your brain still thinks is going on. That hasn’t. Processed through yet. And so can we clear those things?

    [00:30:28] Danya: Absolutely. But everyone has a different perception, but it’s never the actual external thing that’s causing that within us. It’s how our mind is perceiving data and reeling it back through our own identity, beliefs, and experiences that causes the sensation in our body. Make sense?

    [00:30:40] April: And I’ll be sharing you with you, our retreat calendar for next year.

    [00:30:44] April: Uh,

    [00:30:45] Danya: yeah, that’s kind of mine, but what you’re doing as well, though, what you’re doing April as well, is you’re exposing them, right. To like, I know even cold plunging. That can be a very different experience for people. But so for everyone here, let’s get some, some intangible. What happens if I do have a perceived threat?

    [00:31:00] Danya: What happens if I do? I mean, I’m scared of doing something. So use the power of your mind. Your subconscious mind doesn’t know the difference between what’s real or not real example, movie, or let’s say, I’m going to send you a video and you’re watching this video on a Tik TOK or something, and then the spider jumps out of your face, how many of us have thrown the phone or like, right.

    [00:31:16] Danya: Okay. But the spiders in your phone, it’s not coming out. We know that consciously, but our subconscious mind doesn’t know the difference between what’s real and not real. We’ve watched a movie and like, Oh my God, felt heartbreak or felt scared. Okay. So use that to your advantage. There’s two ways you can start kind of edging yourself as your comfort zone.

    [00:31:33] Danya: So for those of you who are thinking of scaling, going on stage, whatever that is, that’s causing that emotional physiological response. Here’s two ways you can hack it. One, prime your mind. So you can spend five minutes tapping into your senses of living the experience as if it’s habit. Get your mind on board.

    [00:31:47] Danya: Create a mind movie. Get your senses involved. Just like the movie you watch, your brain doesn’t know what’s real or not real. So create the experience because if it perceives it as change, it’s going to see it as a threat. So now if you normalize it in your brain over and over again, when you go to do the thing, your brain’s going, Oh, you’ve already done this before.

    [00:32:03] Danya: Okay. So it’s not a threat. It’s not a lion. The second thing you can do is start, start taking small baby action steps towards it because who the heck is going to move towards a lion that’s in front of you that’s trying to kill you? No one. So as I take small actions towards whatever thing is scary or presumed to be a threat, you’re telling your subconscious mind that this must not be a lion because why the heck would I take action towards it?

    [00:32:25] April: Totally. Totally. Um. It, and it also makes me now, now I want you to take our clients through this month, like, like creating that mind movie for them sitting, sitting in there in sales conversations. So I’m like, okay, let’s do, let’s create mind movies of sales conversations.

    [00:32:43] Danya: This worst case scenario too. And this is a thing too. Cause look, you’re, if you have a fear, expose the fear, what am I worried about happening? Well, great. Let’s just experience it because you’re going to recognize you’re not going to die from it. So I remember I had some people go through sales calls and what am I going to say the wrong thing? What if the hand can be great?

    [00:33:00] Danya: Let’s do the worst sales calls possible. Let’s say the stupidest shit possible. But just to show your brain, okay, they hung on to me. It’s not a big deal. But until you uncover the fear and expose it, and then almost like, not saying we have to do it, it’s not exposure therapy, but you’re just showing your brain, there’s, it thinks there’s a lion and it’s not a lion.

    [00:33:16] Danya: So what’s the fear? Can I uncover that fear and go to worst case scenario, even just in my mind, you don’t even have to do it. Like, let’s say I’m speaking on stage and my pants fall down. Okay. Then it’s not saying you’re going to manifest and bring that in. However, what you’re doing is you’re showing your brain.

    [00:33:30] Danya: It’s not a lion. It’s not going to kill me. So yeah, we can do some fun stuff around like, what’s our fear about sales calls? Let’s, let’s just show you it’s not gonna kill you.

    [00:33:39] April: Let’s play it out. That’s awesome. Okay. So as we, as we wrap up, let’s give our listeners like three different action steps that they can do from this show to actually understand where their current state is and how they can go about Changing that because there’s so much education on this podcast.

    [00:33:58] April: You guys please follow Dania. Um, she’s just absolutely incredible. As I know, you know, cause you’re still here listening to this, but let’s they’re like tuned out. This guy’s crazy. Like, Oh my gosh. Um, let’s break it down into some simple action steps that somebody can do right now as they are turning this podcast off and they’re going that they want to create some change.

    [00:34:21] Danya: Beautiful. Okay. So first step is awareness. So what I want everyone to do is just to have the awareness of like, what are our current external results? What is that your bank account, your environment, what you have and stuff. And now I want you to ask the question of like, what potentially is the belief or identity that’s created this result?

    [00:34:37] Danya: Knowing it all comes back to that. So if I can start to say, okay, where am I currently at right now? And what paradigm has been created from my own internal blaze? That’s going to give me awareness of where I am. Then I want everyone to look at their, where they’re going, where they want their desires. And I want you to ask yourself, what would the version of me be?

    [00:34:56] Danya: What would I believe about money? What’s possible business, et cetera. If I already had that, because if we don’t know where we’re at and we don’t know where we’re going, this is a common saying of what got us here, won’t get us there. So our current beliefs are kind of any goddess exactly where you’re sitting with right now.

    [00:35:09] Danya: Beautiful. If we want different, we have to go within and create shifts and changes within ourselves. So awareness of where we’re at and look at the, um, where you want to go. And so asking yourself, what would I have to believe to be true about that? Right. What’s the identity of me? Who has that? Start to unpack that because even a shift of like, Oh, well, I wouldn’t think money’s evil if I want a butt ton of money.

    [00:35:27] Danya: Like I think money’s abundant, whatever. You can start to have the awareness and that can already start to shift things to something that’s going to be really helpful. Everyone here is before they take an action or do a decision, ask yourself what’s the intention behind that action or decision. Is it rooted in scarcity, fear, worry, proving myself, validation, knowing where that’s going to get us, or is it rooted in groundedness, present abundance, whatever your intention.

    [00:35:47] Danya: If you can just seriously before even making a business deal or having a conversation with your mom or whatever it is, ask yourself, what’s the intention behind what I’m about to do that pause and the interrupt and the pattern can already create a shift of like, well, hold on, I don’t need me. Maybe you need to do this, or maybe I can do this differently.

    [00:36:04] Danya: Or I’m looking at it from a different perspective. If we can’t uncover what we’re not aware of, we can’t start changing it. The third thing is practicing that mind movie. So look, if we’re going, you’ve maybe exposed where you want to go, but now there’s some fear, there’s some physiological in your body.

    [00:36:19] Danya: Okay. So I want you to say, well, what’s the worst thing that could happen and just take yourself down that scenario. It’s not going to say it’s going to happen, but until we expose the fear or the resistance on our way to our desires, guess what’s always going to show up until we clear it. The fear and resistance.

    [00:36:33] Danya: So on your own, you can start to ask yourself, okay, well, let’s say I have a belief about money and, um, a prompt you can use is in order to make more money, I have to just fill in the blank, sacrifice more time, uh, travel a lot. I’ve got to hire a bunch of people on my team, whatever it is. Start to take some time unpacking the fears and beliefs that are currently driving your decisions and watch what changes you start shifting your perceptions on them.

    [00:36:57] Danya: Do you want us to go over a couple of like, um, uncovering the resistance questions really quick?

    [00:37:01] April: Yeah, that would be great. Yeah. Let’s wrap it up with that.

    [00:37:04] Danya: Okay. So let’s, because we’re talking about money, um, ask yourself this question a couple of times. I believe you’ve done this before. So there’s general beliefs like money is fill in the blank.

    [00:37:12] Danya: Money is what is money to you? Scarce, abundant, a tool, resource, hard to come by. Notice where your current beliefs are and just to remind everyone to you didn’t choose these you’ve learned them, which means you can unlearn them neuroplasticity shows us that as neurons fire together, they wire together so you can shift them, but we can’t shift.

    [00:37:29] Danya: We don’t know. I want everyone to ask themselves, what is it going to cost me to get to my desires? Notice what comes up there. Is it time? Is it money? A sacrifice? Is it nothing? Or what might be the consequence of getting my desires? And you’re like, there’s no consequence. Look, if we don’t have them yet, there’s some part of your brain protecting you from receiving it.

    [00:37:49] Danya: So let’s uncover what’s the fear. What’s it going to cost us? What’s the consequence of getting it? And then as you start to uncover these, ask yourself, is this useful? Is this belief, is this way of being useful? And do I know anyone else? If myself is from past evidence or someone in my circle or someone who I’m looking up to as a mentor that doesn’t believe this to be true, start just unpacking it.

    [00:38:10] Danya: Um, another easy one to ask yourself is being rich means what, or rich people are what very simple kind of prompts to start uncovering the subconscious because your subconscious has to answer the questions that you give to it. So just to getting a thermostat of where your current programs are around money, what’s possible, et cetera.

    [00:38:30] Danya: Now look at your current environment and say, okay. Does this even ring true? Like my current results is these, can I see how these beliefs are actually driving these decisions and creating these results? Great. If I want different, we got to do something different within first to create different without.

    [00:38:44] Danya: I want to keep like asking a thousand questions, but I know we’re like kind of kept on time.

    [00:38:48] April: Yeah, we have to wrap it. Um, but, and I want you like, I’m just sitting here absorbing. And every time you do this, I always re ask myself these questions. And, and I, and I do think, I mean, even if you’re listening here and you feel like this is something that you have mastered and, and that you’ve already been through, like we can always keep breaking through, we can always keep noticing and understanding ourselves and, and rewiring our neuropathways and all of these different things.

    [00:39:15] April: And so, and to, to those next levels. And the thing that is so. Important about this is, is where we started out in understanding that all the strategy in the world is not going to help you if you don’t believe that you deserve to be there or you can be there or it’s, you know, that you, you have this ability to be there.

    [00:39:37] April: If you have to prove it to yourself or somebody else, you’re already starting, uh, with a disadvantage and it’s, And it’s really, really difficult in, in the, there’s no joy in that journey. I just got to say it there. There’s just no joy in the journey. And most people are entrepreneurs to, to have joy, not that there is no end result to entrepreneurship. Let’s just like, let me say that again. There is no end. It’s the journey.

    [00:40:02] Danya: And so the experience of the journey, right? It’s like we can, we’re on the journey, but what’s our experience of the journey and recognizing that we get to determine that. So how many of us are building a business, but we’re miserable as fuck.

    [00:40:13] Danya: Or like we’re stressed out. We’re not even enjoying what we’re doing. We feel like we’re building traps. Like, well, hold on a second. Your business is a game and you’re the game. Like you, you create the game and you create the rules. So am I enjoying this journey? Am I, am I experiencing the journey I want to experience?

    [00:40:25] Danya: Like most of us create, came here to create lives of fulfillment, abundant and choices and autonomy and impact. How many of us are actually experiencing that though, right? Like, so it is a journey. I love how you said that because there’s no destination. Look, you hit a goal. What happens next? Next goal. Are you enjoying this?

    [00:40:42] Danya: Is your experience of this journey, something that’s fulfilling you and like feeling like present and you can enjoy moments of it, lots of moments of it, or is it stressful, chaotic pressure trap feeling we can shift that or we perceive it. So great end point.

    [00:40:55] April: Awesome. Okay. Well, if people want to find you, where should they connect with you?

    [00:41:01] Danya: I’m most active on Instagram. So my name, Danya, D A N Y A Douglas Hunt, and in there too, you can find a bunch of free resources. I think we’re going to link up for everyone here, the Morning Mindset Prime. So in that really quick, um, audio is you’re going to understand the neuroscience behind how to shift your state and why it’s valuable for you to create the life of your dreams.

    [00:41:21] Danya: Again, we talk about results in the beginning, what actually creates our results, will we get our mind and body on board? Your pathway to the action strategy is a lot less resistance than having your subconscious mind come up and try and protect you from change, AKA your goals. So that would be the most valuable thing for people here to do.

    [00:41:37] Danya: You start shifting your state in your mind now and just watch how things around you become a lot easier and more effective as you shift your mind and body to align with your subconscious desires.

    [00:41:45] April: Awesome. Well, we really appreciate you being part of our team and in our community and pouring into me and all of our clients and, and just the work that you’re doing and the science backed work that you’re doing, um, is, is what differentiates you from, from a lot in mindset coaches.

    [00:42:01] April: So I appreciate you so much. Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait for this. and I will actually see you this week and in our community. I’m really excited.

    [00:42:16] Danya: Me too. Me too. Thank you so much for having me. Bye.


    How To Run LinkedIn Ads for Coaches and Consultants with April Beach and AJ Wilcox (Episode 308)

    How To Run LinkedIn Ads for Coaches and Consultants



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”)
    Have you been tempted to run LinkedIn Ads but don’t know where to start, what type of ads are available and if you have the budget to run them successfully? In this episode our friend AJ Wilcox is back on the show again, updating us on the latest changes to LinkedIn Ads and how you can make the most of them. We’ll dive into tactics, steps, and even how to plan your budget. You’ll know the latest cost per lead and so much more.  If you run a consulting business and you want to use LinkedIn to grow your reach and increase your sales, this show is a great one. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the types of Ads available
    2. Understand which Ad type is best for you 
    3. Know what your budget needs to be and what you can expect from a solid Ads campaign
    4. Have simple steps to start using your LinkedIn Ads account effectively
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April: Hi, you guys. I am absolutely delighted to bring. One of my friends, I want to call this guy my very good friend because I feel like every time I connect with him, we have such a great connection and such a great friendship.

    [00:00:57] April: But the truth is we’ve actually never really hung out in person, although I would love that. You know, this person that we’re going to bring back on the show today. is a LinkedIn ads expert. And if you’re thinking about LinkedIn, if you’re tired of Instagram ads and Facebook ads and you’re becoming more active on LinkedIn, as especially we’ve been going through this entire series on the podcast on how to build your business and generate leads through LinkedIn.

    [00:01:21] April: Well the next natural question we’re going to ask is what about ads? So if you’re thinking about running LinkedIn ads and you’re not sure how much they cost, you’re not sure what type of ads are available, you’re just not even sure how to get started. LinkedIn doesn’t make ads as easy as Facebook, like just click a button and boost this post.

    [00:01:42] April: And there is good reason for that. Because historically LinkedIn ads have been really pricey. However, because you’re listening here to the SeetLife Entrepreneur podcast and your products, meaning your programs that you’re building are highly valuable, then you are a candidate to run LinkedIn ads as long as the, we’re going to get into all the numbers, but as long as your product and your program has a minimum lifetime client value.

    [00:02:10] April: So we’re going to break out the numbers of what your minimum ad spread should be, what Your minimum product price should be how to expect that and estimate that within the lifetime value. And then our guest today is actually going to take you through the step by steps on actually how to set up your LinkedIn ads account.

    [00:02:26] April: So AJ Wilcox is back here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. He’s been on the podcast before. And every time I get feedback and messages about how helpful his Interview here. His show was, so AJ is a LinkedIn Ads Pro who founded B2, which is the LinkedIn ads agency in 2014. He’s managed over $150 million in ad spend on the platform.

    [00:02:54] April: They’re officially LinkedIn partners. I remember when that happened, which was so cool for them. And he’s the host of the LinkedIn ads show. podcast. He’s managed five of the world’s top 10 LinkedIn ads accounts. So five of the 10 ads accounts in the world on LinkedIn have been managed by AJ and he’s a ginger and a triathlete and he lives in Utah with his beautiful wife and his.

    [00:03:21] April: Five adorable kids and his company car is a wicked fast go kart. You guys are going to love this guy. And I swear every time I talk to AJ, he’s on a treadmill and he, the man literally inspires me to be better at moving and working. So let’s see here. Who’s this podcast for? If you are looking at a place to generate leads and you have an ad spend and you want to be strategic about running ads and you’re considering running ads at the end of this episode, you are going to know the top type of ads you can run, the minimum ad spend, and how to get your ads accounts.

    [00:03:56] April: Set up. Also, AJ has a ton of free resources his, where you can go through a totally free checklist on how to set up your ads count. So without further ado, here is my friend AJ Wilcox. All of the show notes and links are found Just click on the podcast, and this is episode number 3 0 8. All right, let’s go. All right.

    [00:04:22] April: Hey, everybody. Welcome back to the podcast. My friend, AJ Wilcox is here again in the flesh. Well, the vertical or virtual flesh here, and we’re going to dive into all things LinkedIn ads. We recorded this show years ago, and then here’s a little secret. We actually recorded it again, like 10 months ago, and And I didn’t fit it into our content calendar.

    [00:04:43] April: So AJ is such a good friend. He agreed to come back. So you guys are getting absolutely the most up to date information on how to use LinkedIn for ad strategy. So welcome back to the SuiteLife entrepreneur family of guest experts.

    [00:04:58] AJ: Oh, yeah, so excited to be here again. Thanks so much, April. And for the record, my virtual body is very fit. It’s very skinny. It’s very strong. So don’t pay too much attention to what you see on the camera. It was my virtual body is awesome. My virtual flesh.

    [00:05:15] April: I love it. I love it. Uh, we do have, this is in video now, so people can watch like behind the scenes on YouTube, which is so cool. And of course our traditional audio broadcast here.

    [00:05:26] April: So let’s dive into all things running LinkedIn ads, including who are they good for, what type of LinkedIn ads people can run, and what is a budget that That somebody actually needs to be able to come to the table is to even make this worthwhile.

    [00:05:44] AJ: Perfect. All right. So lots of little pieces here. Feel free to steer me back on the right direction, but starting with who LinkedIn ads are good for. Um, just so you understand about the LinkedIn ads platform, we have the best targeting on the planet for reaching business professionals. So usually that’s going to be in business to business, but there are business to consumer applications that we can talk about, but the reason why it’s so good. Is because we can target people.

    [00:06:09] AJ: I mean, it’s really the targeting. This is why people come to LinkedIn and are willing to pay a premium to advertise there. We can target by job title and department and seniority. We can target by company name, uh, by company size industry, all of that. And, and it’s absolutely incredible. But like I mentioned, we pay a premium to be here.

    [00:06:29] AJ: The average cost per click, if you’re targeting anyone in North America is like 10 to 16 right now. So yeah, that’s 10 to 16 per click, not per lead, not per conversion, not per sale.

    [00:06:42] April: Yeah, that, and that’s what let’s make really, really clear. I remember years ago when we were recording this, it was like 25. And I don’t remember if that was cost per click or cost per conversion back then. Well, that was like three, four years ago when we first started talking together. So about 10 to 16 bucks to even get somebody to click on your ad. Okay. Wowzer. Now, what are we looking at for an average actual conversion or a lead?

    [00:07:10] AJ: Well, this one’s actually really hard to, to express because what we found, you know, for B2B, uh, I would say probably 10 years ago, used to be very like, Hey, let’s take cold traffic. Let’s show them some kind of a, an offer, some kind of a lead magnet, and then sales will follow up once we’ve collected their, their info.

    [00:07:29] AJ: And over the last several years. That strategy doesn’t seem to work anymore. Uh, marketing teams will take a look at these leads that come in that are cold and, uh, they’ll call it an MQL or a marketing qualified lead, but they find that there is a 1 percent conversion rate from MQL. To SQL, which is sales qualified lead.

    [00:07:49] AJ: And this all comes down to the fact that a cold prospect, they’re not going to respond to someone that they don’t already know, like, and trust. So yes, if you want to show like a lead magnet to a cold audience, you can probably get a cost per lead down to like 75, but. If you have a whole bunch of these leads and sales cannot get them to respond on email, they will not hop, you know, agree to a meeting.

    [00:08:12] AJ: Or if they do agree to a meeting, they don’t show half the time. It’s not the best way to conduct business. So we’ve shifted our whole strategy to where now we are very much like, let’s be helpful. Let’s brand ourselves. Let’s get people to know, like, and trust us first before we start asking them to fill out a form.

    [00:08:30] AJ: And if you do all that, right. Yeah. You’re, you’re going to pay for the same person. 10 to 16 a click to interact multiple times, but by the time you get the lead, they’re going to be on the phone saying, where do I sign, which is so much better than a cold lead who is saying, okay, who are you? Why are you any better than your competitors? Who are your competitors? Just. Totally different conversations.

    [00:08:52] April: Okay. So that, that’s just across the board in marketing for any of you guys that are listening. I mean, we used to run, it doesn’t even matter, just LinkedIn or wherever, just the practices it, what you just said, summarizes the changes in online marketing that we have seen over the last.

    [00:09:09] April: Frankly, five, six, seven, eight years, right? That that know, like, and trust factor is so much more important. And it’s fascinating how people are really honing in on that because they can’t afford not to on LinkedIn. They might be able to run like crappy ads with terrible leads that are disqualified on other platforms.

    [00:09:25] April: But on LinkedIn, when you’re paying that much, you are not going to literally take a lighter to, you know, 100 bill per lead that you’re paying. Yeah. Probably according to what that data shows, isn’t even going to show up. What a waste of money. And so what I’m hearing you say is there’s so much more that needs to go into that relationship building on LinkedIn for brands and individuals.

    [00:09:49] April: Like let’s kind of talk about. Let me kind of take us there. Next. I’m thinking of the questions our audience has, is, has, is, has, while you and I are chatting, is it better to run ads from a business page or a personal profile?

    [00:10:06] AJ: Ooh, I love this question. Okay. So if you would have asked me. Three months ago, um, that’s the exact question. I would have said, Oh, well on LinkedIn, we can only run ads from a company page. Um, you can’t run from a personal account, but what we got on June 20th, this year in 2023, uh, we got access to where we can now boost personal posts. And they call these thought leader ads, and I’m so excited about it because, you know, I’m sure that the crux of the question here is that when you’re representing a company, no one will interact with the ads.

    [00:10:39] AJ: They won’t like them or comment on them because there’s no reason to interact with the company’s ads. There’s no human face on the other side of that when you show ads from a person. All of a sudden there’s reason to interact. And every time you get an interaction, it brings costs down overall. So this is a less expensive platform to advertise on when you’re using these.

    [00:11:00] April: Okay. That makes me so excited. And now I’m really excited. We re recorded this updated version because personally for me. That would be exactly the strategy that I would want to know more about. So, now, even with these thought leader ads, though, it’s still, we’re still looking at 10 a click up to, you know, 75, 100 per conversion. Or are we looking for the same, the same pricing on these thought leader boosted posts?

    [00:11:25] AJ: Yeah, it depends on how they perform. But if you had like from a company page, it’s really often that your ads will get a click through rate. That’s a little less than half of a percent. And that 10 to 16 a click is kind of based off of like, if you’re just performing average, um, these thought leader ads, it’s a lot easier to get high performance, higher click through rates.

    [00:11:46] AJ: And so what we see is like. If you have a thought leader ad that’s getting a click through rate of let’s say, um, three quarters, three quarters of a percent, or maybe 1%, all of a sudden now your cost per click drops and you might be paying more like seven to 9 per click. So it does, it, it becomes increasingly more efficient.

    [00:12:07] AJ: The, the higher the engagement rate, your ads get.

    [00:12:10] April: Okay, cool. And then Nick’s question is, are these just conversation starter posts or do these posts actually have a call to action? Are we trying to get, I mean, obviously if you’re going to pay, you know, 10 for a click, we want to, we want to generate a lead with that, but do people run thought leader ads literally just to establish themselves as a thought leader? So there’s more visibility in that, or are they all? You know, being really mindful of collecting a lead with each one of those ads.

    [00:12:41] AJ: They are pretty limited in how you can collect a lead. So I see this very much as being like maybe the first or the second step in the funnel where you are getting someone to notice you.

    [00:12:52] AJ: And it’s more like now they’re starting to like you, uh, before they kind of come to trust you. So we’re a little bit limited. Like I said, you can’t attach a lead gen form to it. Um, it can be a single image. Ad or text only, or now video. They just gave us a video a couple of weeks ago. So if you imagine if you personally, if you go and post something on LinkedIn, that’s either a video or text only, or with an image, you could then boost that post through the ads platform.

    [00:13:21] AJ: But that means that if you’re trying to get someone to convert. That post has to link to something. And usually if a post links to something, it’s not going to get great engagement. And so you might end up having to pay more for that. So I do see it as being very much like, let’s get you introduced to the brand before we’re sending someone to us.

    [00:13:40] April: Yeah. So, so good. All right. Let’s kind of go back to some basics. Cause I could get in the weeds about all of that. What are the types of ads right now that are available to be run? I know last time there was like sidebar ads and now we have this thought leader ad. What are the general types of LinkedIn ads that a company can run?

    [00:14:01] AJ: Yes. So the first option is the, the newsfeed. And that’s where I suggest everyone starts inside the newsfeed. You can do single image. Um, you can do video ads. Those are kind of my top two, but then you can also do carousels where someone can like scroll through, um, multiple pictures. You can do document ads, which are like a document post where someone could put a PDF or slides of a presentation.

    [00:14:25] AJ: Um, like a PowerPoint that someone can also scroll through. So lots of different variations, but for simplicity’s sake, I would say start with either a single image because it’s easy to create or video because it’s so good at making an emotional connection.

    [00:14:38] April: Okay, cool. And link, I mean, videos are doing really well on LinkedIn and we’re seeing that we’re seeing that traction. So that makes perfect sense. Okay. So in addition to the feed. And I know that the feed ads are the ones you can really target, we can really curate, right?

    [00:14:57] AJ: Yeah, and all of them get to use the same targeting, but they all have downsides to them that are pretty significant. Um, the next two ad formats are over in the right rail, but they’re only on desktop.

    [00:15:10] AJ: So it’s like, They’re definitely ads when you see them, and because they definitely look like ads, they don’t look organic. Uh, they have really, really low click through rates, but they also cost less, which is kind of interesting. Um, one of those is called text ads. It was the original ad format that LinkedIn came out with in 2008.

    [00:15:28] AJ: Um, it has a click through rate that is so, so low. The average is like two and a half clicks out of every 10, 000 times they’re shown. So. What I like about these, they cost next to nothing. Um, so they’re so good at like getting your brand out there. If every time someone loads the page, there’s this little thumbnail image of your brand.

    [00:15:48] AJ: It helps your other ads. So I do like those quite a bit, but the other one’s called dynamic ads. And it has a. It grabs your picture. So if you’ve ever been surfing around and you see LinkedIn took your picture and put it in an ad, that’s a dynamic ad.

    [00:16:02] April: I always laugh because they always tell me April here, here’s the job you’ve been seeking for. And I’m like, wait, what? I, I own, I’m not seeking for a job. So clearly I have my settings wrong somewhere. I’m like, well, I don’t need to apply for it was either Europe, whatever we see you working at, you know, some company that I would never work for. Right. Okay. Fascinating. All right. So we have the feed ads, we have the kind of old school text sidebar ads, and then we have dynamic ads.

    [00:16:28] April: So let’s kind of go to, first of all, some basics. What is an initial value? And you might not be able to answer that. And I don’t want to. Forced you to answer something that we’d actually don’t have a clear answer on, but is there, is there a minimum value of a product that you recommend a company have or a minimum cost per client or value, um, that you would recommend for any company who is like, you’re going to generate a minimum 5, 000 bucks or 10, 000 bucks per buyer, um, on with ads, like this minimum product price.

    [00:17:04] AJ: Yeah. Yeah, I would say LinkedIn ads make a lot of sense when the lifetime value of your product or service is 10, 000 or more. We found, I mean, just like reason through it, if we have to pay 10 to 16 per click and people have to click several times before they, they make a purchase and lots of other people are clicking who will never be a customer.

    [00:17:27] AJ: When you kind of add that math together, you really do need a pretty high lifetime value for it to make sense. But once you dial it in, I mean, that’s the beauty of an ad platform is once you dial it in and you find a pathway to success, then you can just scale it. It’s you turn a knob up and you go.

    [00:17:41] April: And about how long is it taking? I remember in the past, it would take LinkedIn about 30 days to actually learn an ad. Is it? Is it still that same length of time to actually start getting traction and for LinkedIn to actually, you know, learn and become more intuitive or is that different now?

    [00:17:59] AJ: When with LinkedIn getting to know your ads, when you very first launch, they usually figure out how much they like the ad and how much they’re willing to show it within the first day and a half.

    [00:18:08] AJ: So we call that the learning period. But then of course us as marketers, if you’re making changes every single day and the platform is like, I don’t know what change they’re going to make next. And this one. Really messed things up. Um, we tend to tell people like try to go at least a week or two weeks in between changes just so LinkedIn can kind of get its footing and go, Oh, okay, this is where they fit. And this is the kind of attention I can give them.

    [00:18:34] April: Okay. And is there a minimum? Account buy in like you have to deposit a minimum of 10 K into an ad account or is it? How is their billing actually work, you facebook and other ads you hit a certain threshold and then you get billed Does linkedin require a minimum investment into ads or a minimum period of time?

    [00:18:56] AJ: They used to they they used to make you put at least five dollars into it to create an ad account Thank goodness that’s gone away in the last several years. Um Now anyone can go and start up an account, even if you never plan on running an ad. So I would say, even if you never want to run a LinkedIn ad, go create an ad account.

    [00:19:13] AJ: It’s totally free. You don’t have to put any money into it. Uh, very similar to Facebook. Once you show ads a certain amount, that’s when they bill your credit card. I think. Facebook is billing me like every 500 right now. LinkedIn’s I think every 200 so somewhat similar. You can run an ad on LinkedIn as long as you’re willing to budget at least 10 per day and which to some might seem high, but that’s kind of the baseline to get started.

    [00:19:40] April: And that isn’t high, right? Especially if our products are valued at minimum 10 K and up from there. And so as I was going back through our notes from the last time, Uh, I, I remembered you’ll hear my, my dog sparking cause that’s what they do. Um, I remembered there was in this process and I would love for you to take our listeners through the process of just getting into the ads account.

    [00:20:02] April: I think many of our listeners haven’t even set up an ads account yet. They don’t even know where to go. And there’s a code in there. I remember you saying it from last time. And I was actually looking for it because shame on me. I actually never did this after the last time we talked about it. There’s.

    [00:20:17] April: Some darn code I need to put into something. And I’m remembering AJ said to do this years ago. I mean, this was years ago, man, I’m terrible student and I didn’t do any of it. And so I want to make sure that you’re going through that again with our listeners, how to get into the ads account, how to set it up in whatever this tracking pieces that you’re, you can explain so much better than me.

    [00:20:39] AJ: Okay. Don’t worry, April. This is a no judgment, no shame zone. We’re all good here. Here’s what you do. Just go to linkedin. com forward slash ads. That’s the fastest way that I’ve found to get in. Once you get there, there will be some button there that says something like create an ad or set up an account.

    [00:20:56] AJ: They’ve changed it recently. And so once you do that, the account is just, it’s set up. You have to be logged into LinkedIn to do this. And so they’re like, Oh, okay, here’s the account set up for you. And. It’ll ask you three questions. What kind of currency you’re using that can’t be changed. So if, if you’re in Canada, like choose Canadian dollars and realize like that’s never going to change or us, us dollars all pretty self explanatory.

    [00:21:20] AJ: You also claim your company page and you do need a company page to advertise on LinkedIn. So if you don’t have that, go set that up. It’s really straightforward to do. And the third thing is the account name that can change. So you can call it whatever you want. You can call it April beach right now and then go ahead and change it to your company name later or whatever.

    [00:21:37] AJ: So now you have this account. One of the best things that just like you’ve alluded to April, one of the best things that you can do once you have an account is you can go and install what LinkedIn calls the insight tag. Over in the left, uh, the left hand bar, the left hand navigation, there’ll be one of the options as you go through, uh, will be the insight tag.

    [00:21:58] AJ: It’s a little snippet of JavaScript code. They want you to install on every page of your website. What it does is every time someone comes to the website, to your website, LinkedIn gets to see like, hey, is this a LinkedIn member or not? And if it is a LinkedIn member, they Keep track on the back end and start giving you this reporting.

    [00:22:20] AJ: LinkedIn calls this their LinkedIn website demographics. I think they should have called it LinkedIn analytics personally, but what it does is again, you don’t have to spend a dime on ads in order to get this feature. You can log into your LinkedIn account. Click this button. That’s called website demographics.

    [00:22:37] AJ: And it will show you what the professional makeup of your website traffic is totally for free. It’ll show you like, where is the traffic on my website coming from in the world? Uh, what job titles do they tend to have? What companies do they represent? It might show you like your top 15 companies that have visited your website. Um, lots of cool demographic data that you just can’t get anywhere else.

    [00:23:02] April: That blows my mind. Okay. So no wonder why subconsciously I was saying April, you have to do this. And yet I have had to do that. So I will get up off of this and do it right away. So we can get those insights now when it’s time to run ads.

    [00:23:16] April: Can they retarget those people? Do they allow us to do any retargeting like the Facebook pixel of people who have come before? Cause I know there’s been so much security and privacy around that. So how does LinkedIn you do that?

    [00:23:31] AJ: Okay. So that was an expert level question. I’m so glad you asked now that this insight tag is on your website. The other thing, or there’s actually three things that LinkedIn can do with it. But the first we covered is website demographics, the free reporting. The second is your retargeting, just like you mentioned. So you have to go and set this up now because If you haven’t set it up, LinkedIn is not going to remember what happened in the past.

    [00:23:54] AJ: So go set up right now. What you do is you set up a retargeting audience, uh, it’s, it’s under plan and audiences, and then you, you click, I want to create a new audience of my website traffic and you basically just, your first audience is going to be anyone who lands on any page of my website, go, and it’s going to start tracking them.

    [00:24:13] AJ: Once that audience has over 300 people built up, LinkedIn’s going to say, okay, This is now eligible to be used in ads and you can start retargeting your website traffic.

    [00:24:23] April: Wowzer. Okay. I am, I feel so cool that I asked an expert level question. All right. So this is, I mean, already, I mean, we’re already at 20 minutes and I, and I knew that there was a thousand things that I personally wanted to know in this. So kind of let, let’s recap where we’ve come so far. Uh, we talked about updates and LinkedIn ads. We’ve talked about a minimum ad spend. We’ve talked about the fact that you need to have a lifetime value of a client of at least 10 K. We talked about the importance of.

    [00:24:55] April: Building the relationship with the audience before ever running LinkedIn ads, which is frankly just a best practice anywhere if you’re asking me, um, but totally makes sense. I know a lot of companies come with a big, huge ad spend and that’s how they launch and that’s fine. But for our listeners who are subject matter experts, Facebook.

    [00:25:24] April: Besides Instagram, where they can reach qualified buyers that want to really invest in being better at whatever it is that they teach. And so having a minimum product of 10 K usually isn’t a problem. As long as they’re very good at what they do. You know, having a, having a 10 K offer is kind of like now to a day is, is that base point really standardized investment to work with any expert and.

    [00:25:52] April: We talked about LinkedIn ads count, which we’ll come back to that in a second. But my question for you, as I’m remembering and unpacking what we’ve gone through, do you see very many consultants or coaches actually running successful ads on LinkedIn? Are they still brands products in, in larger, what we would consider actual smaller businesses, which could have a hundred employees, you know? So.

    [00:26:19] AJ: Yeah, I do think the majority of advertisers right now Our bigger companies, because they’re the ones that LinkedIn has targeted specifically like, Ooh, if you’re over a certain number of employees, chances are you have enough budget for LinkedIn. So let’s target you. So I think more of the solopreneurs and, and the smaller companies haven’t been targeted as much.

    [00:26:39] AJ: They may not know about it yet. It doesn’t mean that they aren’t ripe for it. Uh, just. They’re probably not the majority of those advertising right now. So I think what that means is there’s big opportunity for those who are going to say, okay, I know it’s an investment, but I’m going to make it because there’s not much competition out there of people.

    [00:26:58] April: Like that’s kind of what I’m getting at. Because in the past on other social media platforms, ads of consultants and subject matter experts have become so oversaturated that they aren’t even showing them anymore. So for those consultants and, and experts and coaches that have programs where the life, I mean, and we’re talking about one product value being 10 K, many of our clients, the lifetime value of some of their.

    [00:27:22] April: Clients are well over a hundred thousand after they work through them, especially those of our clients that are licensing their courses to other companies. Those contracts are 1. 1 million plus. And so this seems like a really great investment for the right people. So they’re established businesses are good at what they do.

    [00:27:40] April: They have great products. The minimum client value is 10 K. And of course, the last one is, is you have cash to spend in and actually invest for thinking, invest as far as putting it out there for that ROI. And so I learned so much about that. And then let’s kind of in your, do I, does that sound right? As I’m recapping that.

    [00:27:59] April: That makes sense. This is good information. Totally. So I want to make sure I’m not leading anybody astray because based on what you said, I mean, that fits where our company is and that would totally make sense. And of course I bring guests on here of things that I want to know personally about too. So it works really well.

    [00:28:16] April: And then, and then we go into the ads account. And again, um, that is called an insight tag. What was, what was the exact name of that again?

    [00:28:28] AJ: Yep. The insight tag you install it. It’s a little piece of JavaScript code and pretty much every ad platform you use has one of these. So every ad platform you use, it’s going to be the same process.

    [00:28:38] AJ: Take this little snippet of JavaScript, put it in your pages code. No one ever sees it except for the web.

    [00:28:43] April: Yeah, that’s absolutely. Absolutely. Fantastic. Okay. Awesome. AJ. And as we wrap up, I know you usually work with, you know, midsize companies, well established businesses that have huge, huge revenues, but how, how can our clients connect with you?

    [00:28:58] April: What is the best place for our clients to follow you, uh, our followers to follow you? To learn from you and to kind of take these little breadcrumbs at all of your big, huge clients, let fall on the floor. We’ll just eat them up and learn along the way. Like follow along AJ.

    [00:29:18] AJ: Feel free to come mooch for real. Uh, if you follow me on LinkedIn, I share almost daily, some tips, some strategy. Something that’s going to help you with your LinkedIn ads. We’ve got three awesome ways that we can help advertisers. Uh, the first is if you just want to do it yourself, if you go to our website, be two linked. com slash checklist, we published, and I don’t know how many pages, but let’s say it’s like a 14 page guide to walk you through exactly.

    [00:29:43] AJ: How do I get started advertising on LinkedIn? If you can do it all on your own, great. It’s totally free. It’s ungated like go get that guide. Um, the other thing is if you want to keep doing it yourself, but you want help, you want. Uh, someone to kind of do it with you or consult with you. We have a low cost community called the LinkedIn ads fanatics community.

    [00:30:03] AJ: That’s fanatics. b2linked. com. And it’s like 79 a month gets you access to our four courses that take you all the way from like beginner to expert. Plus gives you access to the community where other like minded LinkedIn ads experts are all bouncing ideas and and sharing and of course the third way is the done for you like which is like It’s the bread and butter of what we do as an agency.

    [00:30:26] AJ: Uh, but if you’re ever curious, belinked.Com and there’s pretty obvious buttons there on where to click to, to fill out the form and get in touch.

    [00:30:33] April: You are, um, a wealth of knowledge and you’re always so generous with how much you give and how much that you personally have helped me over the years.

    [00:30:41] April: And I just can’t tell you how much I appreciate your friendship and your wisdom and, and always being willing to come in here on the show. How can we thank you? How, besides finding you and going to those links, we’ll make sure they’re in all the show notes. Um, you know, is there a way that our listeners can come back and pour into you so it’s not just one sided and connect with you, uh, and, and actually elevate your voice more? What could we do for you?

    [00:31:07] AJ: Well, I love that offer April. Thanks so much. And first of all, I have to say a huge thanks to you for sharing so much and helping all of us like small entrepreneurs figure stuff out. You’ve been an incredible inspiration to me personally. For giving back. I mean, I, I just, I love to hear your stories.

    [00:31:26] AJ: So if you go out and test LinkedIn ads and you message me on LinkedIn, cause that’s free to do. Um, let me know about like what, what you’re facing and what you’re doing, what successes you’ve had. I love that stuff. And I’m also the host of the LinkedIn ad show podcast. And so if you’ve got stories that I can help share, I, I, You know, I’ll, I’ll take those clips and put you on the air and stuff. So I think that’s probably the best way I could get feedback from you.

    [00:31:48] April: Awesome. All right. We will do it. I’ll make sure all those resources are in there. Thanks for jumping back in with me, re recording this with the most updated version and always being who you are. We really appreciate you, AJ.

    [00:32:00] AJ: Oh, you know, April, I’ll have you back anytime.


    LinkedIn Etiquette: Build a Brand that Resonates and Converts with April Beach and Salina Yeung(Episode 307)

    LinkedIn Etiquette: Build a Brand that Resonates and Converts



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 1-3 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to generate leads using LinkedIn
    Are you committing any of the “deadly sins” of LinkedIn without realizing it? LinkedIn has become the go-to place for consultants, coaches and subject matter experts who want to generate quality leads and build a sustainable business. However, as the popularity of the platform grows, so has the onslot of terrible spam DMs and cold pitches. 
    In this episode we’re discussing the importance of LinkedIn Etiquette and our guest expert Salina Yeung, reveals best practices for positioning your brand, creating genuine connections, and actionable steps for your find your ideal clients, create content that converts, and connect with them in a way that highly converts. We also unpack an ideal posting schedule, creative ways you can build more trust and increase your leads. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Discover the “deadly sins” of LinkedIn and what not to do
    2. Know the exact posting ratio that Salina recommends for CTA posts
    3. Have a solid strategy you can confidently execute to generate leads and make valuable connections 


    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    00:00:46] April: Hi guys, and welcome to episode number 307, where we are diving into all things LinkedIn etiquette. So let’s talk about first, who is this episode for? So if you are a subject matter expert or a speaker, a consultant or a coach, and you are looking to generate quality leads, and you are willing to do what it takes to actually build relationships with people on LinkedIn, and you realize that by doing that, you’re actually going to increase your profit.

    [00:01:15] April: And if you’re like me, you’ve been on LinkedIn and you’re probably really tired of the spam messages. Just yesterday I had a, a well meaning young man send me a DM on LinkedIn and his only question was, do you have an Instagram for your podcast? Of course I was like, yes, of course. Here I have my Instagram channel for my podcast.

    [00:01:39] April: And I proceeded to receive an entire video about all the ways that I should be growing my Instagram. Now, I understand that leading with like tips and help is a really nice way to do things, but this guy had never commented on any of my posts. He had no idea who I was, what I did. He didn’t take two seconds to actually determine if I was somebody that even Wanted help growing my Instagram, and that’s where my frustration lies with LinkedIn.

    [00:02:08] April: Message me on LinkedIn if you feel the same way. I do want to receive those messages so I can connect with you. So in our process of building LinkedIn shows and having a series of LinkedIn here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast, I was on the hunt for people I really value and I really admire. On the LinkedIn platform that I feel like are communicating in a very substantially real way.

    [00:02:34] April: And you can tell that their LinkedIn success has definitely grown and it’s because of their skills in their LinkedIn communication and strategy. So in today’s episode. We get to bring in Selena Young. Now Salina helps you grow your business with LinkedIn and she is in a well established LinkedIn expert.

    [00:02:53] April: We’re going to be sharing everything we have here for you and all the show notes, and this is episode number 307. So you can cruise over. To SweetLifeCo.Com click on the podcast and this is episode 307 to find all the goodies that we have here for you. And if you are a subject matter expert coach or consultant, and you’re ready to scale your business to the next level, and you are ready to scale your business past the basics, then we would love to connect with you.

    [00:03:21] April: You can actually go over to the show notes as well, and you can download the six components of a highly scalable consulting and coaching business. It’s a. Complete list and a free guide that we would love to give you as our gift. You can find all of it by cruising over again to SweetLifeCo.Com. Click on the podcast and this is episode 307.

    [00:03:41] April: All right, let’s go ahead and dive in. I think that you are going to love what Salina says here and you’re going to resonate with her as well. All right, you guys. Welcome back to the show. I’m super excited to be here with my new connection, Salina, and Salina is all over my LinkedIn feed. Let me just say this.

    [00:03:57] April: I don’t know how I found her originally, but I have notifications on because I feel like she speaks a language that feels comfortable to me and comfortable with me on LinkedIn. So as I have been trying to grow my LinkedIn presence and being more active, I’ve really been taking your lead on how to it.

    [00:04:16] April: Best communicate in a real way that isn’t, uh, overly pushy or salesy or marketing. So anyway, yeah. So, uh, thank you so much for taking your time out to be here on the podcast with us and to drop in your wisdom. We’re all, we’re talking about LinkedIn etiquette today. So can you give us a quick background for our listeners of, you know, you’re the one that talks about this and how you got to this place.

    [00:04:43] Salina: Yeah, absolutely. Thank you so much for having me in your show. Like, it’s just so excited, like sweet live entrepreneur. Come on, everybody wants to be part of this. So I’m Selena Young. I’m the LinkedIn business strategist. So I started my business three years ago, um, teaching people all things LinkedIn, particularly how to basically monetize using the power of LinkedIn.

    [00:05:06] Salina: And me and April got connected because like one of my poses talk about how weird sometimes you’re just like so trusting about the whole, like, I think the audience on LinkedIn is really high quality, first of all. But like, sometimes you will just trusting people and decided to accept a stranger. And when they do, um, when we do accept it, the minute that we accept, we do not give you a permission to sell us right away.

    [00:05:31] Salina: And that’s the pitch slap that we talk about. That’s how we get connected. And today we’re going to talk about that a bit more.

    [00:05:39] April: Yeah. Yeah. And I think that was it. I think when I actually saw the words pitch slap written and then you have all your other connections and everybody agrees and there’s this whole chain of connections and everybody’s going, Oh yeah, the pitch slap.

    [00:05:51] April: Oh yeah, the pitch slap. I’m like, okay, these are my people. I want to know these people more. I want to hang out with these people and I want, and I want to learn from Selena. So let’s kind of dive into that. We’re talking about LinkedIn etiquette and LinkedIn best practices in, You know, where you have these deadly sins of linkedin that you share, where do you really start with people when they want to become more active?

    [00:06:14] April: They want to build their personal brand on linkedin. You know, what, what are these deadly sins that you just are like, please, let’s take note of this first.

    [00:06:22] Salina: Yeah, I love that questions a lot. I would start with thinking about the purpose and the goal you want to grow on LinkedIn. Like, is it to find clients?

    [00:06:32] Salina: Is it to land a media feature? Is it to basically start building connection? Maybe you just You know, starting out fresh, starting out on your business, then maybe networking. Right. But in a way that, you know, April and I talk about built a deeper connection with another person, like imagine you and them, it’s like a digital handshake.

    [00:06:53] Salina: Right. Instead of just like pitch slapping them with like. Hey, this is me. This is what I’m offering. This is my program. This is my website. Like, who are you? First of all, so I would start with your LinkedIn profile. I would warm up your relationship with that person through engaging with their content, like what we do, DMing each other, like understand about like, Oh, who you are, how do you help?

    [00:07:18] Salina: Who is your ideal, um, sort of avatar and then go it from there. And, and I think that is much more natural step than someone just like, Hey, April, uh, I’m Selena. I’m the LinkedIn business strategist. This is my website. Check it out. Uh, let’s book a call. I would be like, uh, wait a minute. Like. Please slow down.

    [00:07:36] Salina: Who are you? Right? So things like that will really helps to nurture the relationship and later down in the line, it’s exactly what I teach as well. It helps you with sales as well. It’s just take it longer to warm up the audience. But when they do decided to jump on a call and you guys are a match to work together, when you do on a sales call, it’s like a one call sales rather than like you already broke the initial trust and impression with the other person.

    [00:08:03] Salina: And then you take it from there, right? Yeah, so that’s, that’s how I see starting out on LinkedIn, figuring the goal, figuring the purpose.

    [00:08:12] April: Right, that’s such good advice. And I love that you said it’s gonna take longer, but with that, you’re so right, that when it’s time to convert into pre call, you know, cause we need to disqualify clients, just like we need to pre call.

    [00:08:24] April: Prequalify them is just as important and going through the process of connecting with people in the feed, connecting with people in the posts. And I love it when I receive a message from somebody who has at least like two of my posts or commented on something because they actually seem familiar to me and I’m not afraid even if sometimes, you know, they might be.

    [00:08:45] April: Pitch slapping me like as you call it, but I’m so much more open to it because I appreciate that they have taken the time to connect with me in the public feed. Absolutely. It just, it, you know, relationships sell. Yeah. And, and we can’t, well, maybe somebody would argue we can buy relationships, but really that level of trust comes with communication of conversation.

    [00:09:06] April: And a bit of time too. So for somebody who’s new onto LinkedIn, if they’re trying to find people to connect with it, do you have like a hack or a way that somebody can find the right people to connect with and start following so that they can start messaging people that could be there? Perspective clients.

    [00:09:24] Salina: Yeah, absolutely. I wouldn’t say a hack, but it’s more like really go down to what you just said about like who they are, right? Like if. They are targeting similar target audience. It’s easy to open up a conversation by saying, Hey, I really like your content, right? Just like April, you, you receive someone saying, Oh, I really like your content.

    [00:09:45] Salina: I really resonate. And exactly like, this is like podcast interview show. That’s this beautiful collaboration happened. Right. And just that instant, um, connection. And I think like sometimes we over. Engineering the part where people will not answer you, but it’s actually not true if you personalize in a way that it’s adding value to the other person, I think it’s ultimately is a big yes, whether it’s to jump on a podcast show interview like this, a collaboration or even to ask for the big ass of sales.

    [00:10:19] Salina: I think it’s, it’s very easy when you truly understand the other person who is their target audience, how you can help write things that, um, I find there’s two message, particularly really, really helpful. One started with, let’s say April, you and I are not connected on LinkedIn. I will go through your LinkedIn trying to figure out ways of the content that you’re creating on LinkedIn and say, Hey, I can add value to this.

    [00:10:44] Salina: This is something that you and I could work together on. That is one way of doing so. The other way of doing so is like really understanding, um. The offer that you are sharing, like, let’s say business coaching, you’re helping people to basically do business modeling that it’s very highly profitable.

    [00:11:03] Salina: Maybe, you know, another like big creator in the space on LinkedIn. Let’s say I know a lot of creators that is doing that. I would love to connect both of you together. That’s at value. But equally is not No. Something that people will find, Oh, that’s so salesy. Why are you messaging me? But there will be like, Oh, I’m open for this beautiful connection.

    [00:11:22] Salina: I would like to know the other creator that is doing exactly what I’m doing. And I can work with her to partner up or affiliate or things like that.

    [00:11:31] April: Right. And that is so valuable. And I love that you said that too, because it’s not just this and why I value your voice on this. Cause it’s not just necessarily this networking app.

    [00:11:42] April: It’s a place to truly build alliances and mastermind with other people and to connect. And I know that I would find that. you’re like, Hey April, you should know Joe or whoever, you know, and we try to do that. You know, I do that actually for our clients, but now that you’re saying that, I probably definitely don’t do that enough for my connections.

    [00:12:04] April: And so that’s something that I want to be better at. So as you’re saying this, I’m going, okay, I really need to look at my connections. Who do I value being like, you should know this person. And I know I value that. So I know that my connections would value that in, frankly, I just really never thought about that from a standpoint.

    [00:12:21] Salina: And you’re such a so so butterfly. I can tell people it’s like, yeah, I know, I know you through April. Thank you so much, April, for this. And then like, it helps you with like this snowball effect of business opportunity as well. Right? Like when someone think about business coaching, the first person think about is April because you already helped them so much.

    [00:12:41] Salina: Initially to make all those beautiful connection. Right. And I love that sentence that people say, if you want to go fast, go alone. If you want to go far, go together. And that’s, I think the together component, it’s what the most precious thing about LinkedIn. Um, people talk about business all the time and they carry a mindset of like, Oh yeah, we’re like creating this, um, partnership, we’re creating this. Opportunity either as business or a career, um, it’s, it’s normal in this space.

    [00:13:14] April: Yeah. And I think that for, I mean, I’ve been down LinkedIn probably since, uh, 2008, 2009, a long, long time ago. I’m aging myself. Right. But I think that for me, In the last couple of years, recognizing the value of really great genuine connections that we haven’t been able to really make on other social media platforms and people I can learn from and people I can contribute to.

    [00:13:41] April: And I love that you said that because that is the exact. Intention of why I know that many people are here. Like you were saying, they’re very valuable connections here and contributions, clients, collaborations, partnerships. And, and so I love that those are some of the ways that you lead with for your connections.

    [00:14:01] April: So let’s talk a little bit about some. Direct messaging, direct messaging, things that people should not do on LinkedIn.

    [00:14:12] Salina: Oh, love that. There’s so many, but I would start with the two, uh, of my least favorite. So I got a lot of people asking me to like send them a recommendation endorsement, and those are usually strangers.

    [00:14:27] Salina: And I’ll be like, who are you? Why would I endorse you? Endorse your skill. If I have not even like. Work with you before recommendation either. And I think this is like a big no, no on LinkedIn because you’re giving a task first to someone completely stranger. You don’t even build the initial, um, like sort of like, um, relationship.

    [00:14:49] Salina: And on top of it, you just like basically hurting your own personal reputation in this space because. But imagine if it’s a job, right, your future employer will call that person up or DM in that person. Hey, can you vouch for Selena for X, Y, Z? And that person will be, I don’t know who they are, but yeah, I endorsed them previously.

    [00:15:09] Salina: It’s hurt them the reputation for both ends, right? Because you’re the one that giving and you’re the one that asking. So I would say this is the number one. No, no, from my end asking stranger for endorsement and recommendation on LinkedIn.

    [00:15:23] April: Okay. I love that. And, and yeah, it’s, it’s your personal credibility too. And one of the things that we shared before we started recording is I’ve had people go through and kind of click certain endorsements for me, though I appreciate that I do who they are. And so, you know, then, then they would send a message, say, Hey, I just endorse you for this. And I would have this guilty conscience of like, Oh my gosh, I didn’t, I didn’t, but that has actually bothered me for years where I’m like, Oh, thank you. But I have no clue who you are or what you do, whether or not you’re good at it or what that is. So

    [00:15:59] Salina: I think when some LinkedIn guru started to give tips about this, and I think like people start doing it, but without like a purpose or like strong goal of doing it. Right. So yeah, don’t ever feel guilty, April.

    [00:16:13] Salina: It’s not your fault. It’s. Their fault, like they shouldn’t even start it with, you know, endorsing people that they don’t know and not really cultivating and like building that relationship first.

    [00:16:25] April: Right. Okay. Great. Thank you for my release of that. Uh, so now let’s kind of go into frequency of direct messaging as far as with people you do want to become your clients.

    [00:16:41] April: Do you have a recommended way that you, that you’ve known they have done the best practices, right? You’ve connected with them in the feed, you’ve built a relationship with them and you’ve added value. You’ve done all the things that you’ve said. And sometimes that, that jump to, Hey, what’s the next step feels like a pretty big jump to people getting prospects on a call.

    [00:17:03] April: Do you have any recommendations on how to convert? From the, the relationship just into the actual sales prospect.

    [00:17:10] Salina: I love that question so much. I literally just create a video, particularly around that topic. Um, it’s called the LinkedIn Grove strategies, just 15 minutes per day. So like obviously it’s like a 10 minute video.

    [00:17:25] Salina: It’s really long. I go nitty gritty, but I will put into like three buckets. One we talk about like April and I talk about the engagement piece, I think is a really, really big piece. And then engagement could actually go first before even connecting with another person. Just like the point that you talk about, right.

    [00:17:42] Salina: April you said. I remember this face like it’s on my feed. She supported my content. That instant connection will allow me to just accept that connection invitation. If that person is sending me in the second sort of like bucket that they’re doing right and the last one, I know what you mean by like, Oh, how do I actually jump into the conversation of sales?

    [00:18:05] Salina: Right, I would actually take a step back and think about more in terms of your content. And I think. Content on LinkedIn. It’s such a like opportunity that a lot of people is not using. In fact, there’s only 5. 5 percent of the entire user on LinkedIn is posting on LinkedIn consistently, which means it’s so easy for you to dominate the new newsfeed.

    [00:18:28] Salina: And the funny thing is like, if I’m thinking about my corporate. Like, uh, days, right. When I’m still working for LinkedIn during corporate days, I don’t actually engage a lot, like I would actually consume content. I don’t like people content. I don’t comment on people content, but I’m still interested to hear about what, like April, you have to say, what about sweet live entrepreneur?

    [00:18:51] Salina: What, uh, what about your offer, but not necessarily interacting in the comments section. Right. So I would actually go back and really dial into your, like. Conversion when it comes to content, did you really at the end of the sort of like content, is there ways to connect with your audience? That is really like relatable.

    [00:19:15] Salina: Is there like problems that you’re trying to help other people solve? And then at the end of it, the CTA needs to be extremely clean. And my preferred one is usually DM and then the word, which is the word. It could be your program name. It could be April, your name. It could be like. Things that you hope your clients to solve, right?

    [00:19:34] Salina: Like it could be LinkedIn. Then it will be DME, the word LinkedIn, and let’s have a chat. And in that way, it just helps. Instantly to create that really easy flow of conversation of more transactional because they, you know, the other person is interested to talk to you to know more about your offer. And then from there, the transactional conversation is much more easier.

    [00:19:58] Salina: And there is an ending point of it, right? Whether you want to take them on the sales page directly to buy a course or directly to book, um, sales consultation call with you VSL, whatever that is, it becomes much more natural. So I will start with that.

    [00:20:16] April: Great tip. So, so far we’ve talked about authentically connecting in the feed. We’ve talked about adding value. We’ve talked about connecting our connections to each other. And providing value just because we’re good people and we want to and we know two people that would know each other and they could be great and actually leading with that place of I want to serve, I want to give first and now your tip about this content is so well, Smart because there are a lot of people that want to create content, but there’s something about LinkedIn.

    [00:20:49] April: Maybe it’s because we’ve been in the Instagram, Facebook content space for so many years, and it’s just a totally different audience, different objective, a different culture, a different like all of it is different. And so there there seems to be this disconnect LinkedIn versus other social platforms that People may be on.

    [00:21:11] April: I know that our clients struggle with that, and those are things that they bring up, which is why I’m so grateful to have you on the show and talking about this. And it’s really how to create content that is conversional. And so with that being said, because I just know our listeners and I Anticipate the questions are asking, how often do you recommend creating or posting not just any content, but that content that asks for a call to action content.

    [00:21:38] Salina: Oh my goodness. Love that. I would say it’s a ratio. So for, for instance, it’s a easy ratio to follow. It’s let’s say you post every single day, which is what I recommend Monday to Friday. If it’s possible, then I would say you can have one post that is a ask post, which is you really like. Calling out your audience.

    [00:21:57] Salina: Hey, like attention. Mine is like entrepreneur and corporate escapee. If you want to like create a follower, the brand, this is my offer. If you’re interested, let’s have a chat. And automatically we, we mentioned about the conversion, right? Because this is a ask. You need to understand that those type of lead generation posts will not get you engagement, a lot of engagement, just like other posts.

    [00:22:19] Salina: Like if it’s a storytelling post about like. April, how you started your business, how you like created this amazing podcast show. Why do you create it? It’s obviously getting more eyeballs and more attention and engagement and people are more likely to engage, like commenting like, Oh, this is such a good show.

    [00:22:37] Salina: I’ve been support a huge supporter. Yeah, yeah, yeah. Continue the conversation. Whereas if you are direct asked, the conversation is less. But I can guarantee you, whoever that is listening to us right now, that ass is so important because without ass, no one knows exactly what you’re selling. And also it’s a direct ask that it’s just like, you know, I already at so much value throughout the entire week, like with educational polls, how you can basically achieve what you want with the goals.

    [00:23:06] Salina: Obviously the, the goals that you want, right? Little mini bite side tips. And then from there you just like, Oh, if you want to learn more, obviously with each day, just two to three minutes of digesting, my content would not get you to where you want it to be. If you want to like 10 X your income or like help to land, um, media feature using LinkedIn, this is the program for you and that ass is important.

    [00:23:30] Salina: So I will. Do that ratio if not if you’re posting twice or three times per week, then you can do two asks Um for the whole month and that could be ranging from you can do testimonial as well There’s so many ways of the big ass that you can do not just like hey This is my hand, take my hand. This is my program, but there’s also ways of like using soft styling, using your client testimonial to talk about those results, and then from there to, um, do the big ass of DM you about the work that we just talk about, or this is the sales page, go ahead and learn more.

    [00:24:05] April: Wow. That we could have done a whole episode just on that.

    [00:24:09] Salina: Know.

    [00:24:11] April: Oh my gosh. Um, definitely need to have you back on the show. Uh, this. information is really valuable. And I appreciate so much that you lead with this. You practice this, you, you know, function through this day in and day out on all your LinkedIn content.

    [00:24:27] April: I’ve learned so much already about being okay with posting five days a week. I’ve heard that, you know, you don’t need to do that, but I actually. Have enough content that I’ve wanted to share five days a week. And I felt like, honestly, it was this overkill. I was like, Oh my gosh, I’m going to bury all these, you know, followers on LinkedIn.

    [00:24:45] April: So I love that you said that. And that’s really encouraging. And then just about how you’re asking for the ask that is, uh, that. That is so, um, you know, people are overusing the word authentic. So I actually try to avoid using that word so much now, but it’s direct and it’s intentional and it is starting with sharing why somebody needs to be there in, in, in coaching.

    [00:25:12] April: I’ve coached entrepreneurs never. 27 years. But in coaching that I feel like the number one thing that we do is we serve, serve, serve. And we don’t come anywhere near asking for somebody to take the next step. I think we do that a lot. And so I love that you said that. Especially women. Right. Like, let me help you. Let me throw up more great information all over you or whatever that is, you know? Yeah.

    [00:25:37] Salina: There’s a stigma that we’re like, Oh, we just wait. No, no more waiting. Just do the asking. Cause when you do ask results just come so naturally.

    [00:25:47] April: Yeah. Yeah. And I would just end with this to our listeners. You know, how many of you guys are out there posting great content, but there are still a, you know, people.

    [00:25:58] April: Might not actually be sure how to buy you or what to buy you for or what that next step is and you’re so good at sharing and teaching and contributing and transforming your audiences and giving all this great content and yet you, you have a group of followers that actually might want to engage with you and you are not giving them opportunity to say, Hey, I’m so glad that you know, you’re here.

    [00:26:24] April: This is what happened with, you know, April when she worked with me and this is what it is, and these are the end results that, you know, we provide, you know, Are you ready for that? Do you want that? And so I just want to encourage our listeners and people tuning into this show that, you know, selling, um, Myron Golden, I don’t know if you listen to Myron, but I love Myron.

    [00:26:43] April: He’s a business leader. Myron Golden says selling is a gift, right? And when we have a solution that we know delivers people or companies measurable, predictable, transformational results, then therefore it’s our obligation to make that available to them. And I think that there is so much of a. Of a, of a practice of free content.

    [00:27:07] April: Free content, or even, you know, slightly paid content. And so I appreciate so much your ratio because we don’t wanna be over salesy. We don’t wanna be. Yes. And so I think we overcorrect so much. We actually don’t sell anything sometimes.

    [00:27:18] Salina: I know. Yeah. And I love what you mentioned. It’s like, to me it’s like a act of love. An act of service. We’re not a product pusher. We’re just like, if. You and I are a match to work together. That’s an act of love. That’s an act of service. I inviting you to work with me, right? Just like them, the process that you mentioned, we just like qualify your leads.

    [00:27:40] Salina: That’s an act of service. Knowing you and I are a good match to work together. If it’s not, then I’m sorry. Let’s, let’s say bye right here. And then later down the road, when you and I are ready, let’s, let’s go ahead and work together, right? So,

    [00:27:53] April: yeah. Yeah. And actually doing our potential prospects a favor and saying, you know what? I’m not the right one for you, but here’s somebody else who could be, or, you know, using that very clear language into what our brand is.

    [00:28:05] April: Like I, I’m not for everybody for sure. And so, I mean, when I speak on stages, I even speak on stages and flip flops. I mean, some people don’t want me, that’s just who I am. I’m not going to know who I am. Right.

    [00:28:16] Salina: So that’s me every day. Okay. Right.

    [00:28:20] April: So I was just. Speaking of podcast movement a couple of weeks ago, and you know, I showed up in my flip book, but that’s just who I just always who I’ve been.

    [00:28:26] April: Right. Yeah. I feel like. There. I feel like that’s I feel like exactly like you’re saying. I love what you said that that is also a gift to disqualify people with our content with our messaging. And when we go in for that, making that service available to them, just being like, yeah, you know, this is you’re not either ready for this or this isn’t a good fit.

    [00:28:46] April: Yeah, I think that’s it. I think that’s awesome. And if

    [00:28:52] Salina: I can add two actionable points in terms of what you just said. If someone just like, the big ask is to really leverage the link you have on LinkedIn. Which shouldn’t be just putting a company website, but instead it could be the most important CTA you want.

    [00:29:08] Salina: That is related to your sales goal. Let’s say you’re now launching a masterclass, a free workshop, put it right there. Like don’t waste your real estate. The second really good place to put is your feature section is completely for free. It’s the most clickable area on LinkedIn. And my question is why not utilizing it?

    [00:29:28] Salina: It’s free traffic, free place to basically go through your funnel. So make use, make good use of those two plays.

    [00:29:36] Salina: And I’m going to go change my general website link on my LinkedIn profile right now. I feel so bad, I’m sorry.

    [00:29:44] April: What do you mean? That was gold for

    [00:29:47] April: me. Don’t what. Well, I’m so grateful that you said that because, yeah. So basically we use our lead magnet or whatever that event we’re hosting in that first action step into our ecosystem of services.

    [00:29:58] April: Yes. Golden. I’m going to add it to the list. I’m totally going to do that. Absolutely. Right now. Thank you so much.

    [00:30:06] Salina: Perfect. I love actionable steps that you can take and implement, you know. Yeah, we do too. We eat them up. So how can people really connect with you? And just your content is so good. I want to make sure people know how to find

    [00:30:20] Salina: you.

    [00:30:21] Salina: Yeah, on LinkedIn. Really? I’m most active there. If you DM me like most. Most of the time I’ll be the one that responding. If not, my VA would definitely reroute you to me. Uh, but LinkedIn is the pace, uh, place to go. I do, however, started, um, YouTube channels. If you want to learn something more longer form of training, I have few trainings to get started on LinkedIn, how to basically use LinkedIn, uh, for your business.

    [00:30:48] Salina: We also talk about LinkedIn premiums, which is a big topic that everybody asks all the time. Um, me and. April talk about the LinkedIn adequate. I actually have a specific dedicated show that is talk about a tan deadly scene. So if you want to like go through that, that will be really helpful, but it’s really expanding on some of the really great nugget that we just talk about today.

    [00:31:10] April: Oh, my gosh. Okay. So that’s all on your YouTube is over there. And awesome. Okay. And we’ll make sure that the links to find you are in the show notes for this episode for sure. And so people can connect with you further. And I appreciate so much your time and being here and contributing and being such a leader in this space.

    [00:31:29] Salina: Thank you you so much for having me on the show. I have such a fun time like geeking out talking all things LinkedIn with you.

    [00:31:36] April: I really appreciate your wisdom. Thank you so much.


    How to Use LinkedIn Events For Maximum Leads with April Beach and Jen Corcoran (Episode 306)

    How to Use LinkedIn Events For Maximum Leads



    LinkedIn Events are a great way to generate leads, as long as you know the strategy and have the steps to execute. In this episode, we’re diving in with LinkedIn Expert Jen Corcoran to learn the ins, outs, dos, don’ts of LinkedIn Events. 
    There are three phases to using LinkedIn Events and actions to take in each phase including, how to create the event, how to promote the event and what to do after the event. Jen covers important steps to follow. Additionally we also cover strategies for creating an event on your business vs personal profile, how to grow your email email, how to promote paid vs free events, and skills for direct messaging with people who’ve been interested in your event but haven’t actually taken the steps to register. If you’ve been using LinkedIn Events and not getting great traction, this episode is definitely for you. 
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know how and where to create LinkedIn events
    2. Understand the pre-event promo strategy and how to expand your reach
    3. Have a process for followups that will increase conversions
    4. Understand how paid events are currently working and when you post a paid opportunity 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] April: Hi there. Welcome back to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast. Especially those of you guys who’ve been with us for six years. I appreciate your listenership so much. In this particular show, we are continuing our series all about LinkedIn, how to generate leads on LinkedIn, how to use LinkedIn really the best way for your business.

    [00:01:05] April: And this one is all about how to use LinkedIn events to generate a maximum number of leads. So, If you’re in this place where you are a subject matter expert, a coach, or a consultant, you, by the way, are the exact people that this show and our company is built for. And everything that we’re doing here is to tap in and help you uncover strategies that you can take away.

    [00:01:26] April: As a matter of fact, this podcast has been known for delivering proven business trainings and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. So you’re certainly in the right place. Now, if you have been trying to use LinkedIn events, like me, frankly, I’ve been doing LinkedIn events, but now that I have been through this episode that you’re about to hear, I realized that I was missing a lot of details in the steps.

    [00:01:48] April: And so Jen Corcoran, who is our expert here on the show today, is a queen when it comes to LinkedIn lead generation. And so she’s going to actually unpack the steps of how to correctly set up a LinkedIn event. Did you know that you can actually create an, a LinkedIn event from your company page and connect and collect email addresses? I had no idea.

    [00:02:11] April: But there are certainly pros and cons to that because you usually have less followers on your company page than you do a personal page. So in this show, we’re going to pack all, unpack all things LinkedIn events, and we are going to take you through how to set it up, where to put it, how to communicate before the event.

    [00:02:27] April: And then I asked Jen a couple of really specific questions about paid events. And those of you guys who have like paid lead magnets or Paid live virtual events, even if they’re low ticket items. How do those work with LinkedIn events? And what is the strategy behind that? So the end of this show, you are going to know the three steps to actually set up program and fill your LinkedIn events.

    [00:02:51] April: Jen even talks about how she gets thousands of invites out from her LinkedIn account to attend her events. And she breaks down her communication processes and how she actually doesn’t spend hours. That just seems like it would take forever to me. And she unpacked how it doesn’t actually take that long to connect further with people on LinkedIn through direct messaging in the most clear, non sleazy, genuine way possible.

    [00:03:18] April: And we’re going to unpack all that here on the show. So if you’d like to dive in, stay tuned with me here and you’re going to have all of the show notes by visiting SuiteLifeCo. com. This is episode number 306. So you can just click on the podcast, click on episode number 306 and everything that you have been told will be waiting there for you.

    [00:03:38] April: So glad you’re here. Let’s go ahead and dive in. Hi, everybody. Thank you for tuning in with us here. This is my friend Jennifer, and I met Jen because I actually convinced her to come in and teach a masterclass to our clients last spring. She was absolutely incredible, and everybody loved her, and she was teaching about newsletters at the time.

    [00:03:58] April: And so she has definitely become a go to LinkedIn person for myself. And my team and for our clients as well. And so I’m really glad that we are bringing her here on the Suite Life Entrepreneur podcast, because I need to learn a lot about what Jen is talking about here today. Jen, you want to take a second, just give a little bit of background and introduce yourself.

    [00:04:22] Jen: Sure. Thanks so much for having me. I’m really happy to be on this podcast with you. So I’m a LinkedIn consultant and I specialize with helping mainly introverted. sensitive and empathic female entrepreneurs. So my approach is a bit more sensitive than the main kind of hustle hype approach. So I’m more about feeding in integrity and feeding in flow.

    [00:04:45] Jen: And I love events in my past life. I was an event manager, so I genuinely love connecting people. And I think LinkedIn events is an amazing feature. It’s probably my. Favorite feature and bit of content in terms of ROI. So I’m really excited to be chatting about it today with you, because I don’t think enough people tap into the power of the, of the event feature or know how to like find it or leverage it. So yeah, I’m really excited to be chatting about it.

    [00:05:15] April: I am excited too because I was just sharing with you because, you know, before we recorded here that I just posted an event about a free event that we’re doing and so I just created it and exactly as you said, the process of going back and finding it and seeing where it was in, in the actual LinkedIn interface first of all, that was confusing to me.

    [00:05:35] April: And then the second thing is to be completely honest, I really don’t have a full blown event strategy. To promote events on LinkedIn. So I was, I was really excited that you agreed to come on and, and talk about that. So let’s, let’s start out by chatting about the LinkedIn interface and just really even, how do we even, how do people set up an event?

    [00:06:01] Jen: So you’re right. It’s not very intuitive. I personally wish there was like a tab at the very top menu that was for events, but there isn’t. So the easiest way to do it is on the desktop versus the mobile app. And just bring up your profile. Click on your home feed and if you scroll down on the left hand side you’ll see various shortcuts.

    [00:06:25] Jen: So you’ll see like recent shortcuts, so things you’ve been, content you’ve been looking at recently. You’ll see groups and then below you’ll see events and you’ll see a little plus. sign. And that’s how you start to create your event from your profile. It works pretty much the same on your company page.

    [00:06:43] Jen: You have to kind of scroll and find it down in the menu. It’s not obvious, but once you’re there, the good news is once you click through on the plus, they’re very easy to populate. It’s basically. Nice cover image. I always create them with camera, and then it’s literally the name of the event, the date, the time, the duration, a little description and the link.

    [00:07:06] Jen: So pretty easy to set up and you can tag in any relevant speakers. If you’re doing an event, you know, a webinar you can tag them in, which is great. The difference really from doing it on your profile and your page, they’re basically the same, but from a business page you get an additional option of getting people to sign to and register so you get their email.

    [00:07:30] Jen: You can’t do it from your personal profile, but on the company page you can set up an extra registration form, so they have to fill that out to be able to Join the live or watch the replay and then of course you can download their emails after so you can email them So that’s the beauty of doing it from your page over your profile and on the flip side People buy people more and you’re going to have a lot more connections on your personal profile So if you’re sending it from your company page and you’ve got a completely different name people mightn’t be as quick to accept Whereas if they know you They’re going to probably accept to your profile. So they’re both great. The page is especially great if you want to download emails.

    [00:08:17] April: Okay. So now I have a question about that. Would you recommend, because with our event and with all the events I’ve done, I set them up on my personal profile. Would you recommend creating two events or duplicating it and one from the company page or.

    [00:08:32] April: Maybe creating it because I love the idea of getting the emails because that’s what we’re going to talk about next the events We usually host or in zoom or you know someplace else and there’s an offline link and there’s another it’s like two or three Degrees away for people that actually register and get to the event. So First of all, do you recommend creating the event in two places or not?

    [00:08:55] Jen: One is enough. You know, if you really want to download the emails, do it from your company page, you’ll always have that option. I think if you duplicate it just gets a bit messy and it’s just a bit more time consuming for you. And yeah, I think in relation to the external link that when you set up a LinkedIn event page, you’ve got various dropdown options.

    [00:09:17] Jen: So you can either, Do an external link to something in person like an Eventbrite, or it could be a Zoom, a virtual event, or you’ve got the option of LinkedIn live or a LinkedIn audio. So when it’s an external link like a webinar or you kind of always have to nudge your attendees. So I think the first kind of nudges in the description part of the event, put the event like at the very top and go, Hey, have you like clicked all the way through?

    [00:09:48] Jen: This is the link and then not be shy to click on manage attendees and DM them all. And I know it sounds like quite labor intensive, but it’s really not. If you have a little short and sweet kind of message like, Hey Mary, thanks for signing up for my event. Just want to make sure that you’ve signed all the way through.

    [00:10:07] Jen: Here’s the link. Excited to see you there. And you just literally bang that out to the attendees. It doesn’t take that long. And it’s a great way to. Make sure that they have gone all the way true because 50 percent of the people won’t and they’ll be like, Hey, Oh God, I didn’t realize, thanks for that. Or, you know, you’ll start a conversation with all your attendees.

    [00:10:27] Jen: So it just gets everybody excited because with the event feature, it’s not super intuitive. People can accept an event and then they can forget because they can’t really find out where, where are those events. So I think it’s, it’s a great thing to do is to definitely personally. DM people before and I always DM them after as well.

    [00:10:49] April: Such great tips. Okay, so let’s go back to kind of unpacking this step by step. So it is… Okay, to have offline events on LinkedIn. And, and so I, I, I think most events that unless it’s a LinkedIn audio or something, or even a LinkedIn live. Yeah. So they’re going to have the external link there. Um, great tip to add the external link to the event description, not just leaving it in there that says link to the event.

    [00:11:14] April: I’m going to go back right away and make sure our event is updated to include that. So yeah. So that next step really is DMing people that said they’re going to attend. Yeah. And I love your quick little script that you said, Hey, I can’t wait to see you. Just wanted to make sure you, you went all the way through and registered.

    [00:11:34] April: Um, do you find that people are open to that? I like, I don’t like direct messages on LinkedIn, so I’m always super careful before I DM somebody and I probably am an over creation of anti DMing. Um, so I think I’m on the total opposite side of that. But I do see the value in that in it. Is that one of your secret recipes to get so many people to actually follow through and come to your event.

    [00:11:58] Jen: Definitely. And I think most people will remember that they signed up. It was something they want, but they are grateful and they’ll come back and say, well, thank you. Sorry. I missed that, you know, and then it just gets you into a nice. Genuine conversation of I’m really looking forward to it. Or, you know, people will say, Oh, I’ve shared it with my friend or I’ve shared it in a group.

    [00:12:15] Jen: And you’re like, wow. So you start to get into a nice conversation. And I think of it as like warm outreach, you know, they’ve signed up, whether they remember or not. And even if they, you know, a lot of people will come back and say, do you know what, I can’t make it now. So if it’s come up and I’ll say, don’t worry, I’ll DM you the replay after.

    [00:12:32] Jen: So again, it’s another nice conversation and you have another opportunity to touch base after. Only rarely do I get people go, Oh, I never signed up for that and I’ll be like, Oh, you did? It’s the event page. I can send you the replay and you know, don’t worry about it, you know. So, it never goes awkward. I don’t think anybody like, feels like they’re being sold to or anything because it’s generally some kind of a training event and even if they don’t remember, I position it in a good way that they go, Do you know what, actually, I think I will go.

    [00:13:04] Jen: Or I will check out. Okay, so yeah, I think it’s always like warm outreach. It doesn’t feel spammy the people they’ve signed up for whatever reason They like you they like their company, you know, do your company they like the topic So for some good reasons split decision they accepted the invite or they’ve actually seen you posting about it and actively Start to join the at the event page.

    [00:13:26] Jen: So um Yeah, with an event. I do promote them in various ways. Of course, we’ve got the LinkedIn event page, but I’ll always like email my list. I’ll always share on LinkedIn anyway, on my personal home feed, on my company page in my LinkedIn group. So I, I try to really share about the event so that people are, You know, familiar with it. They’re not like, what is this?

    [00:13:52] April: Yeah. And I think that’s a really good point is making sure that we’re feeding it. We’re not just totally relying on LinkedIn that we’re using all of our marketing channels, especially when we’re doing events that are really an important part of our marketing and campaign and launches.

    [00:14:05] April: So what

    [00:14:07] April: about, so we, we have the event, do you share the event multiple times between when you created it to your personal feed? So if somebody is having an event in. You know, let’s say 10 days from now about how many times would you reshare that event back to your feed saying, Hey, don’t forget, I’m hosting this cool event.

    [00:14:28] Jen:

    [00:14:28] Jen: Well linkedIn themselves, they kind of advocate that you should be create the event page about two to four weeks in advance. So it’s much kind of. You know notice that you can for me I would probably just share the event once or twice I create separate graphics that would probably have more impact than the actual event page So i’d share it in different ways, but it’s the same content, but it will look visually different And the main thing for me is I will invite my first degree connections to the event page manually.

    [00:14:59] Jen: So You can invite a thousand first degree connections every five days, which sounds like a lot, but there are, there is a hacky way of really inviting people quick onto your event page where you can invite them at like 50 at a go. So when you kind of click into the filters, My favorites, one is school, one is company, these don’t really work for me when I’m targeting like coaches or consultants, I target by location, if it was like a local event you can do that, or I mainly target by industry, so I select, you know, the right one for me, it’s usually professional training and coaching, and then At the very top, LinkedIn will populate, it will start to bring up all the, the coaches and trainers and everything.

    [00:15:47] Jen: And you can manually do one by one, which is very like time consuming, boring, but at the very top left, there is a little box. And if you click that, it selects 50 at a time. So if you’re 50, 50, 50, 50, you really can invite a thousand people really quickly. At the moment, I’m I’m running a, a virtual summit for sensitive people in October.

    [00:16:14] Jen: So I’ve got an event page for that and I’ve set it up a few weeks in advance. So I’ve already invited, I think 3000 people every week. I’m like, Oh, I’ve got my credit back. Let me invite another thousand more because that’s the way I get maximum people. And I think if you’re lucky, you get about 10 percent accept, which is really good.

    [00:16:34] Jen: If you think of like, you know, the rate of kind of exchange of an email list, it’s, it’s, you know, it’s. Pretty good. So yeah, I wouldn’t just rely on just creating the page and posting it and that’s it Because you’re only gonna get a handful of people whereas the way I do it manually inviting them I always get a hundreds of people on every event and it’s hundreds of leads So it’s worth it.

    [00:16:58] Jen: And then if I’ve got a speaker I say to them, can you invite? A thousand people from their network and I make them a tiny little training showing them how to do it And then it just gets maximum bums on seats.

    [00:17:10] April: Wow Okay I was going through with our event and like looking at everybody’s title sorting them out title like click click click I think I sat there for a good 45 minutes and only invited what I felt like was a ton of people which was 88 that I felt, and I was skipping people.

    [00:17:26] April: I’m like, no, they’re not the perfect person. Um, so this makes me feel much better that there’s a much more efficient way and another reason why I was so excited to have this conversation because I was thinking, this is not sustainable. . Yeah. How, how do I do this? I, I have very little time to be doing be this.

    [00:17:43] April: Okay. Very cool. Now, so after. Wait, I have one question here. What about events that are not free? What about paid events? What about events that are, uh, yeah, paid? Um,

    [00:17:58] Jen: if I’m honest, it’s the same kind of process. I still would invite a thousand of my first week connections and Still have to nudge people to sign up manually to the link.

    [00:18:10] Jen: You, most people, well, 50 percent of the people will not click true. They’ll think they’re signed up and you’re like, no, you have to click through this particular link. So, and the same, I would have different visuals. So I don’t think I would do. Anything different? Um, I, if it was a paid event, I would definitely want access to everybody’s email.

    [00:18:31] Jen: So I would definitely do on my company page more so than my profile. But I think other than that, it would just be. The exact same way of marketing it and just giving yourself as much lead up time like I definitely did two to four weeks. There have been some free lives that I’ve done, you know, a week out, um, but with a paid, I would definitely do two to four just to drive that kind of visibility and reach and not just rely on, you know, a few days, whereas, you know, for a free event, you can get a lot of people jumping on at the last minute. So it’s a bit different.

    [00:19:05] April: And with paid events. You know, because they think that almost all of them are going to be free because that’s just the way it works, really. So with paid events, I’m guessing it’s probably important in the description to say the cost of this ticket is, you know, 50 bucks or 500 or whatever it is. Do you feel like LinkedIn is a good place to also market paid trainings in the events page or really just lead gen?

    [00:19:31] Jen: I’ve done both, you know, I think I primarily lead with free and I think like you said people are used to free and then, you know, they come along to a live or a webinar and then you kind of plug your paid services there. I think in general, I do see a lot more people free events on LinkedIn, whether it’s, you know, a LinkedIn live or an audio, you kind of give that free value first and then they buy into you.

    [00:19:56] Jen: I think you could do paid one, but you wouldn’t want to be doing it all the time because people will just feel like you’re advertising. But if it’s like a one off, if it’s like, maybe it’s something you’re doing once or twice a year, I see no harm in it. But I think if you were to do it all the time, People will just get in their head that you’re someone that’s constantly selling.

    [00:20:20] Jen: So you want to really stand out as somebody who’s, you know, giving value. Of course, you can plug sales calls and things at the end of your free stuff. And of course, you’re not going to get as many people onto a page when it’s just, it’s just sadly, just the way it is. There’s so much stuff online that they like to come in and test out the free first, but I don’t see any reason why you can’t, you know, I’m thinking of one paid event that I know is being promoted at the moment on LinkedIn, but I don’t know if it has an event page.

    [00:20:52] Jen: So I’m going to go away and have a look. I’ve seen people, it’s, it’s a conference and people are posting about it and they’re definitely, you know, they’re definitely saying the price is whatever, 250 pound and then there’s attendees are sharing. But I don’t know if they’ve got an event page. If they do, I’ll let you know.

    [00:21:08] April: That’s fascinating. Yeah. Yeah. Send me a message and let me know. Cause I was thinking about we, you know, we have clients in ourselves where we do, sometimes we do paid workshops, paid live events, and sometimes they aren’t that much. They’re usually 47 to 97 because it prequalifies and, you know, buying into like.

    [00:21:27] April: Even though less people, we already know a register for it, but when people pay, they pay attention and they usually convert into, you know, better clients. And so I was just curious about that. And then before I have a few clients actually that have promoted, you know, a thousand dollar workshops and have done really, really well with that.

    [00:21:46] April: And that kind of goes into my next question for you be in there. Very niche specific, right? These are super specific for a super. Targeted industry to learn a super specific skill. They aren’t just informational. They’re actually training skills, workshops, and they’ve done really well with that. Um, and part of what they do, which I want to hear you unpack this too, is it’s in the follow up, right?

    [00:22:12] April: So it’s the follow up 24 hours before for people that clicked that they did want to attend but haven’t paid the money. And they have like this 24 hour almost like Post cart closing type of a DM that they do. And they say that that does really, really well. So whether it’s following up before the event happens or following up afterwards, sharing the replay, you know, I would love to know, first of all, how much time that usually takes you opposite, especially if you’re, especially if you have 500 people attend your event.

    [00:22:44] April: And do you have any sort of tips on following up to get people, whether it’s to register or to schedule a sales call or just to watch the thing?

    [00:22:54] Jen: Yeah, I would definitely follow up with all of them and I promise it doesn’t take that long. If it’s just a short and snappy message and you just bang it out to all the attendees. So I would always, you know, follow up first with the replay because you know, not everybody has got on. So I would just be like, hi. Um, John, um, hope you enjoyed the event earlier on if you didn’t manage to see it, you know, I couldn’t see everyone that was live Here’s the replay and that’s the you know The first message and then you just start conversations people come back to you and say oh I couldn’t because I was with my mom or I was walking the dog You hear everything you start to get into a natural conversation Or people will say loved it and if they loved it i’ll say oh, what was your biggest takeaway and then?

    [00:23:39] Jen: That usually prequalifies people because they usually say, Oh, they, because you said this and I really need help with that. And then straight away I’m like, Oh, did you book one of the sales calls? Or here’s the link to book. So for me, it’s always good to prequalify rather than just firing my sales call and get everyone and you know, they’re not the right fit or it’s never going to happen.

    [00:24:01] Jen: So yeah, the replay is always. The good conversation starter because even if they were there, some people maybe have to hop off 10 minutes early and they’ve like, oh, brilliant. I missed the end. Um, so yeah, just share the reply, get into conversations. It’s very rare that people ignore you. I think after they, you know, you send them something.

    [00:24:22] Jen: Like that, you know, they’re, they’re like, Oh, I’m going to watch it. And then you can touch base a few days later with them all again. And just say, Hey, good to know. Did you watch it? What were your takeaways? So it’s that kind of nudging and nurturing and then, you know, pre qualifying the right people. And if people, if that’s.

    [00:24:40] Jen: kind of where they want to stop the journey for now. That’s fine. You’ve kind of built a little bit of a relationship and maybe they’re completely new to you and there’s somebody that you can invite to your next event. Others will be, you know, further down the line. They already know they need LinkedIn help and you’re just getting them on a call.

    [00:24:58] Jen: But it all happens with the DMs for me. That nurturing before, during, after, you’ll get people, even while you’re doing the event saying, where’s the link? And you’re like, well, you don’t see that obviously till after, cause you’re doing the bloody event. So you’re like, well, I can’t DM you now. So yeah, it’s always the DMs.

    [00:25:17] Jen: If you don’t do the DMs, it’s a missed opportunity because you’re only gonna like add a handful of people come back to you. Whereas if you DM them all, you’re going to get such a good response rate. So yeah, the magic for me is always in the DMs and it doesn’t have to take long. I promise you just click on manage attendees.

    [00:25:37] Jen: It brings them all up, whether they’re first degree connection, second, third. Don’t need to be connected to them. You can just message them so they don’t need to be a connection and you just bang out the little message. So I do it always in batches. The way you’re doing this podcast, I will just go in and say, well, message to them all in a batch, step back, and maybe it’s the end of the day.

    [00:25:58] Jen: Then I’ll go in, there’s conversations again, do it in batch. So yeah, not spending all day on it because you’d be driven mad.

    [00:26:07] April: For sure. And, uh, and. And I, that’s a good like business basics reminder for me, because now that I’m becoming more active on LinkedIn, I realized I need to like block calendar schedule my LinkedIn time because I’m like, you know, leaving the office, going to the kitchen. I feel like all of a sudden I’ve been the last five days. I’ve been.

    [00:26:29] April: So I definitely need to schedule out my schedule time and when I will be doing my LinkedIn work. And, you know, as we wrap up, I have to say that one of the reasons why I really appreciate you so much besides the tactics and the strategy and the wisdom that you get is that you’re so. Real about how you connect with people.

    [00:26:48] April: And when you talk about how you do messages in the DMS, it feels so good to me. And I think that’s why you and I connected. And it frankly doesn’t feel like the way that a lot of people do messages and a lot of messages I have received on LinkedIn. And I really appreciate that about you. And it’s something that I would feel good about doing because it’s just a conversation.

    [00:27:10] April: It’s just an actual natural conversation. There isn’t anything, you know, pushy about that. So I just, I wanted to share that with, with our listeners and just tell you personally, just thank you so much for leading in that way. Cause it’s. really, really helpful. Um, so now one of the things that we wanted to give our listeners today, which doesn’t directly relate to LinkedIn events, but is a profile optimization tool.

    [00:27:38] April: And I really recommend all of you guys go connect with Jen on LinkedIn. And we’ll have all of her links and everything in the show notes. And we’re also going to connect to this free profile optimization tool so we can level up your LinkedIn personal brand. Can you talk a little bit about that tool and why that’s important?

    [00:27:58] Jen: Yeah, sure. So it’s basically, it’s a chat list. It’s about seven, eight pages long and it just walks you to your profile and areas to optimize so that you’re showing up more in search and you’re just looking more at the part because if you do go to an event, your profile really is the gateway to everything.

    [00:28:16] Jen: So if you create an event, you’re attending an event or you’re You know, you’re chatting to people who are also attending. People are going to check you out and they’re always going to go, who is this person? So it’s always, it’s like going into any physical event or virtual event. People are always going to check you out.

    [00:28:31] Jen: So we want you to be looking good first and that will give you confidence. And that’s really where I started. My LinkedIn journey was optimizing my profile and when I felt like it really sold me and it felt more me and I looked to the part it made me more confident to send ems to connect and for me I love events on LinkedIn whether I’m hosting like a LinkedIn live or an audio or even a zoom I always encourage attendees to connect with each other you know I will say to all of my like if you’re going to any of my events have a look at the other people because It’s a safe container for you to reach out and send those DMS because they don’t always come natural for us.

    [00:29:12] Jen: And I think the more you exercise that muscle, then you’re kind of like, it is just a chart and maybe it’s because I’m Irish, but I’ve always just thought, why is the big deal? Wellington is literally having a conversation and I’ve never thought of networking as networking. I reframed it as my hair in my head.

    [00:29:29] Jen: It’s having chats with people and I think so many people build it up like networking is so, you know, serious, so professional. And I think on LinkedIn, especially for business owners, we have the joy of showing up whatever way we want. We’re not constrained by our old corporate roles where we had to be a bit more, you know, buttoned up and professional.

    [00:29:49] Jen: Whereas now, you know, for me, if anybody DMs me, I love a good gif like, yeah, I wouldn’t think that sending them in my corporate days, it would have been like, you know, best regards it’s, you know, like super formal and I just think LinkedIn is what you make of it, you know, it’s just, you know, it’s, it’s like a massive online network where you can have like, you know. Networking conversations, little mini events the whole time.

    [00:30:17] April: So valuable. So valuable. And so are you. Uh, what is the link? If it’s a pretty link, we’ll put it in the show notes anyway. But, um, you, well first of all, tell people exactly how to find your profile on LinkedIn. Let’s start with that.

    [00:30:30] Jen: Okay, so thanks again, I feel, for all your lovely words. So yeah, I’m Jen Corcoran, so it’s C O R C O R A N. Find me on LinkedIn. My company page on there is called My Super Connector. So yeah, just find me either my personal profile or my company page. You can check out my previous events, stalk them, see if you learn any tips from them. She’s so good. You guys, you totally have to stalk her.

    [00:30:57] Jen: And then we’ll share the link to the profile upgrade also in the show notes. But do you want to share the link as well? If you know that off the top of your head too, we can

    [00:31:06] Jen: click funnels.

    [00:31:08] April: Okay. Yeah. I knew it was like an ugly link. I didn’t know. We had a pretty link for it. Uh, we’ll put it in the show notes for you guys, everything here, how to connect with Jen.

    [00:31:16] April: Uh, you guys can go over to suite life co. com. Click on the podcast and, uh, Jen’s episode will be right there on the top. You can also search our podcast website. Anytime, just search the word LinkedIn and this podcast and other podcasts that we have done will populate for you. So there’s a ton of resources there for you, Jen.

    [00:31:37] April: Thank you so much. Just appreciate how you’ve poured into our clients. What you’ve taught me and being here on the show. So I really value you and I appreciate you. Thank you. Thanks for having me.


    How to Use LinkedIn Polls to Generate Leads with April Beach (Episode 305)

    How to Use LinkedIn Polls to Generate Leads



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 1-5 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want 
    This episode is perfect for both new and already-running business owners who are eager to get to know their audience better on LinkedIn. Think of LinkedIn polls as a super tool that lets you ask questions and find out what people really think! Maybe you are planning to start something new and want to know what others like, or perhaps you are curious to see if you’re sharing the stuff that really matters to them. By using LinkedIn polls, you can discover exactly what your audience is interested in, helping you make smarter choices for your business. 
    We are diving deep into the world of LinkedIn polls with the help of expert Tanya Bhattacharya! We’ll explore step-by-step how to create polls that are just right – not too boring, not too tricky, but interesting and fun for people to answer. It’s like creating a little quiz that helps you understand what people like and what they are interested in. April and Tanya will also share how you can use these polls when you’re launching a new program or trying to reengage your LinkedIn audience.
    We reveal the best kind of questions to ask in your polls to get the most helpful answers. It’s like having a magic question box that helps you find out what your friends are thinking! 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Know how to use polls to generate leads
    • Understand the strategy of polls
    • Have sample poll questions you can use in your polls
    • Be able to create a poll and execute this strategy right away
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April: Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 305 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast. This episode is for those of you that really want to know how to use it LinkedIn. You have been working to generate leads on LinkedIn, establish thought leadership and connect with the right people on LinkedIn. And so in this show, we’re diving into all things, how to use LinkedIn polls in order to help you do that.

    [00:01:09] April: But let’s talk about who this episode is for. This episode is for those of you guys who are established business owners. And even those of you who are just researching who your ideal. We have talked about polls. We’ve talked about quizzes a lot here on the podcast. As a matter of fact, I just shared a whole entire training on how to create quizzes as lead magnets for your business.

    [00:01:31] April: This goes hand in hand with that. This is a great opportunity for you to do something that actually takes very little effort. but helps you identify the right audience, the right people to connect with. And it’s going to give you a gauge of whether or not you’re already connected to the right people on LinkedIn.

    [00:01:51] April: So if you are in phase two or three or four of my lifestyle business roadmap, this is a great episode for you to listen to. If you already are rolling with LinkedIn, you probably don’t need this episode. No worries. You can go onto another strategy, and dive into LinkedIn ads with my friend, AJ, or LinkedIn company pages with my friend, Michelle. Those are all episodes that we’re dropping right around now.

    [00:02:14] April: If you are not sure where you are in your phase of business growth, just cruise over to And you can take a really short little quiz and you can know exactly where you are in business and exactly what you should be working on right now.

    [00:02:29] April: So let’s talk about what you can expect from this show. We have Tania Bhattacharyya here on the show and she was introduced to me from somebody else on LinkedIn that says, this girl is great at LinkedIn marketing. You need to bring her in. We actually brought her in to host a little mini masterclass for our clients and our client intensive last week and every single one of our clients were able to implement the strategy that she’s talking about here.

    [00:02:56] April: On today’s show, we are going to dive into how to use polls and she even goes through the step by step of what content you should put in your polls and exactly what to do after you post a poll. And we talk about how you can use polls as part of your launch strategy. If you were launching a new program or an offer or a reopening of something, this could be a really great strategy for you.

    [00:03:19] April: So all of the show notes, including how to connect with Tania, please go connect with her on LinkedIn and the resources she has here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo.Com. Just click on the podcast button. And this is episode 305. Let’s go ahead and dive in together.

    [00:03:37] April: All right, you guys, we are here with a new friend. This is my friend Tania, and she was actually in our community working with our clients last week. And when I first met her actually I was referred to her by somebody else through LinkedIn for the purpose of LinkedIn growth LinkedIn lead gen And when I first met her there’s literally a million things that she could have come on this podcast and in our community and actually taught on but we honed it down on one particular activity one strategy and we’re gonna unpack this strategy for you here today on the show and it’s all about LinkedIn polls in.

    [00:04:18] April: So anyway, we’re going to dive into all that and the step by steps of how to do it today on the show. But welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast, Tania. I’m so glad you’re here. Do you want to share with everybody a little bit of background about you and how you got started doing what you’re doing?

    [00:04:31] Tania: Yeah, absolutely. Well, thank you first of all, so much for that warm welcome. It’s so good to be here. I love chatting about, you know, all things. LinkedIn and entrepreneurship. So I got here, you know, as we all do through a kind of roundabout way, I didn’t think I was going to be an entrepreneur growing up. I went right into the nonprofit field. So I was always a, you know, do gooder. And I ended up working for a women’s addiction treatment program, for 12 years, doing all things, fundraising, marketing, alumni, you know, all that kind of good stuff.

    [00:05:03] Tania: And, you know, eventually I became the executive director and, you know, we were a small scrappy sort of startup nonprofit. Well, I wouldn’t say startup, but we were a scrappy nonprofit for sure. And so, you know, we were, I was trying to figure out ways to really get our name out there to really build relationships, to really like. Grow influence and trust in our community without a huge budget and without like hiring a giant marketing team and a PR firm and all that kind of stuff.

    [00:05:30] Tania: So I challenged myself to use LinkedIn to share, you know, one interesting story per week to connect with a couple of local, you know, business influencers, you know, corporate giving folks, you know, people who work for local foundations and just sort of like start to build my voice as a local nonprofit ed.

    [00:05:49] Tania: And slowly but surely, You know, magical things started to happen. And I really want to say like slowly, but surely it didn’t happen right away, but it was a slow build and a slow burn. And after about, you know, a quarter or so, you know, we started getting inbound, like inquiries for, you know, major gifts. We started getting Organic PR opportunities.

    [00:06:12] Tania: We started getting organic referrals and all these things that I used to have to really pound the pavement for, or just sort of happening all throughout, all just through LinkedIn. And so I’m a huge, just like advocate and evangelist for LinkedIn. I think it is such an underused platform still. I think it is still unsaturated and there’s so much we can do to really connect with the movers and the shakers that can really like supercharge our business, our mission driven business.

    [00:06:37] April: Yeah. And I love your story and thanks for your honesty about the fact that, I mean, it was slowly but surely and, and I think there’s a lot of people that just really expect fast, you know, fast results and a lot of things and, and Hey, you know what? Maybe some people have passed fast results, but I’m like you, my results have not always been overnight and, and to be honest and why I really appreciate you coming into our community and coaching our clients and, and having this conversation here with me and is because I still, I’ve been on LinkedIn since 2008 or something like that.

    [00:07:10] April: I still don’t feel like I know how to use LinkedIn. I still feel like I go there, like I love hanging out on Instagram. I can post pictures of my kids and my hiking and all this other stuff and kind of behind the scenes podcast stuff. But on LinkedIn, I just don’t really feel like I have still found my groove.

    [00:07:28] April: And I feel very, this is like really, to be honest, I feel very different than a lot of businesses on linkedin because I don’t work for a corporation. I never have a day in my life you know, there’s there’s all of these different really big companies on there and I kind of just really feel like I haven’t found my people yet to be honest and so doing things like what you are going to share here on today’s show.

    [00:07:55] April: I think a lot of our listeners might feel like I do and you know, they are subject matter experts. They are consultants. They are coaches They are, you know service providers, but they don’t really you know They don’t work for a big tech company and and they aren’t an employee. They are the coo and so how do we?

    [00:08:14] April: As individual, very small micro businesses utilize LinkedIn to build relationships with not all the people, but the right people. And that’s what I love about LinkedIn polls. And what I learned a little bit last week when you were working with our clients. And I know what we’re going to talk about today too. Cause I really feel like it’s. For people like me.

    [00:08:37] Tania: Yeah. I’m so glad that you said that. I think a lot of people feel that way and I think one of the biggest reasons why people feel that way on LinkedIn is there’s a lot of lurkers on LinkedIn. Like, I feel like on Instagram people are like, yeah, like there’s, people are just going to like comment and like and message and it’s just not as serious, you know, people just like are all in.

    [00:08:54] Tania: Whereas on LinkedIn there’s like a little bit of like a reservedness. You know, it is a business platform. I mean, at least that’s what I’ve been noticing. I think of LinkedIn as sort of a 24 7 365 like, you know, networking event that you can always kind of pop into. And at a networking event, I mean, think about your behavior.

    [00:09:12] Tania: You’re not just going to like be wild and crazy and be talking to everyone. You’re going to be kind of like. Checking it out, lurking a little bit, getting comfortable. And I think people are that way on LinkedIn too. But that doesn’t mean they’re not watching. That doesn’t mean they’re not like just waiting for something to, you know, sink their teeth into once that becomes available. And I think polls are a great way to find that signal and get people to raise their hand instead of lurking on the sidelines like we do on LinkedIn.

    [00:09:37] April: Awesome. Okay. So let’s dive into LinkedIn polls. I’m so excited to talk about this today. First of all, let’s go back to like some basics. Why use polls? What, like, what kind of a poll? Why are we going to use a poll? What’s the purpose of a poll?

    [00:09:50] Tania: Yeah. The purpose of a poll is like, it’s a, it’s a native, like integrated way. In LinkedIn, where you can ask your audience any kind of question, it can be a fun, silly question, like, what is your, you know, Hogwarts house?

    [00:10:04] Tania: It can be a question that has everything to do with a offer that you’re putting out there. Like for example, one of my primary offers is a LinkedIn content. Sprint where we, I help people batch content, like in a very concentrated period of time. And so one of the things that I might ask in a poll is like, what stops you from batching your content?

    [00:10:22] Tania: Right. And I can have up to four answers or instead of the, if, you know, like if I don’t want to live in the barriers, I could ask about the dreams and the goals and aspirations, like what could be possible for you or what would be an ideal scenario for you if you didn’t have to worry about content for six months, you know, what would you spend your time doing?

    [00:10:39] Tania: And I could just have four, like. Fun things, you know, like hang out with my family or launch this new thing, you know, whatever. So it’s a way to get your audience sort of, , in the arena in a way, get them participating. It’s a way for them to get them to raise their hand and get really good information about your audience. Kind of like a market research thing, that you can then use to follow up with people.

    [00:11:04] April: So cool. So cool. Okay. So how do we go about actually creating a pool poll? Like what are, what are the steps to go about doing this? I love your example of your offer, your program, and then asking people what’s stopping them.

    [00:11:18] Tania: Yeah.

    [00:11:19] April: Because anybody who answers just based on that is already prequalify themselves to say, Hey, listen, I’m already your ideal client because I’m struggling with this and it’s one of these different ways, but these are one of the things I’m struggling with. So I really love how you did that. My wheels are already spinning based on what you said, but how do we go about getting started to do?

    [00:11:38] Tania: Yeah. Yeah. Well, just from a very tactical level, if, if folks are not as used to using LinkedIn, if they’re kind of like, they haven’t been on there in a while, it’s as easy as going to like start a post and it will see start, , create a poll as one of the options you see there. Like it. You know, the options just right off the top of my head or something like, you know, post a picture, post a video.

    [00:12:00] Tania: Yeah. Create a poll is one of the options on there. And so you could, you know, there’s a place to very easily put the question. And then the default option is to have two answers, but you can have up to four answers. And I always like to have the fourth answer be something like other, tell me more in the comments.

    [00:12:17] Tania: So that way you get people really, you know, if something doesn’t. If they have another idea, you know, you always want to give them a space to be able to do that. And then you can have the poll go for, you know, something like a day, three days, a week, or two weeks. And I found the kind of the special sweet spot is about one week.

    [00:12:33] Tania: It gives it enough time to really like, it gives it that, that long shelf life that LinkedIn posts have. And it’s not so long that people have completely forgotten that they voted in the poll. So I like to do, you know, one week. Yeah.

    [00:12:48] April: Okay, cool. And one of the things that you were saying, which I didn’t know is that when you, if I were to see your poll and vote in it, my response is actually confidential.

    [00:12:58] Tania: Yes. This is one of my favorite parts about the LinkedIn poll, you know, because I think a lot of people get nervous, like nobody’s going to vote in my poll and then I’m going to look like a, like a loser, you know? And, and that’s a whole nother thing that, you know, I could talk on and on and on about. But the reality is, you know, people are not, you know, think about your behavior.

    [00:13:16] Tania: Like if you’re scrolling LinkedIn and you see somebody with, you know, just a poll that Has a couple of responses. You don’t think negatively of them. So don’t be nervous about putting out a poll and not getting as many responses as you want. You know, this is all about practice. This is all about just like putting yourself out there and building the muscle, right?

    [00:13:34] Tania: But, you know, I kind of went on a tangent there. So we were talking about the confidentiality piece. Yeah. Like I remember once I put out kind of a vulnerable poll. I was like, what’s, what stops you from showing up and, you know, playing bigger, right? Building a brand, you know, showing up with your authentic voice, something like that.

    [00:13:54] Tania: And I was like, nobody’s really gonna like put them, LinkedIn, but people did. And the reality is, like you said, People can see what the results are of your poll in terms of percentages. They can see like a, like a bar graph of how the answers came out in terms of percentages, but they can’t see who voted how, which is really great.

    [00:14:13] Tania: But as the poll creator, you can see how. Everybody voted. And my favorite, probably my favorite part of the poll is LinkedIn makes it really, really easy for you to just like with one click of a button next to each person’s, you know, kind of picture in your poll, there’s a little button that you can click to send them a message right away.

    [00:14:34] Tania: And in that message, it will include an attachment of the poll. So even if it’s been, you know, a week since they voted, even if it takes you a little while to get. to get to your follow up after a poll. It’s totally fine because that poll will show up in your message and you can just say something like, Hey, April, like I, thanks so much for voting in this poll.

    [00:14:53] Tania: I see you voted for, you know, answer B, whatever that is. And then you can actually start a dialogue. You can share a helpful resource. You can ask if they would like for you to send them. You know, a very specific resource that you have created just for them based on how they voted in that poll, right?

    [00:15:12] Tania: Which of course they’re going to want because they already told you this is something they’re struggling with, right? Or something that they desire.

    [00:15:19] April: Yeah, it’s so smart. So the strategy is creating the poll. And I mean, as users, I think it’s important for us to know that it’s confidential, which is really good. And I love as the poll owner that we get to see all the responses, but then the strategy you’re saying is then sharing and there’s a follow up strategy. After it’s not just the poll. It’s not for information But then you can message and share the actual results of the poll at the end of the poll with everybody who took it which I love that because that is such a natural next step conversation to have what besides like sharing the poll results and you’re saying so asking if they would like you to share a resource based on their outcome instead of just being like, here you go.

    [00:16:05] Tania: Yes, yes, yes. Something that I hear a lot from people and that I struggle with myself is like really, really not wanting to be spammy, salesy, icky. Because we all get those messages from people that we don’t know trying to sell us something and it gives us that ick factor. Nobody wants that. that. Like I can’t imagine that that’s really working for anybody, really.

    [00:16:26] Tania: And so something that makes me feel a lot better about this process and, and, you know, and I think on the other side, it feels, it feels good too, is, you know, let’s say somebody voted in my poll that they don’t. Batch content because they have writer’s block. I don’t know, I’m just coming up with something.

    [00:16:44] April: Right?

    [00:16:44] Tania: I could say, Hey, like thanks for voting my poll. I see you, you know, voted for writer’s block. I totally get that. A lot of people said that as well. I actually put together this whole like mini podcast episode about what to do when you have writer’s block. Um, would you like me to send you that link?

    [00:16:59] Tania: You know, and that way I’m not just like going forward and just like sending them something that, you know, maybe they’re too busy right now. Maybe they are taking a vacation right now. Maybe they just don’t want it for whatever reason. I don’t know. But the act of them saying, Oh, actually, yeah. Like that’s so nice.

    [00:17:16] Tania: Like. Yes, I would like that. It creates that permission based conversation and it, it makes it feel good on both sides that you’re moving forward in a conversation that both parties want to have, you know? And then, so what I would recommend is having some kind of mini resource for each of the answers that are in your poll and it doesn’t have to be complicated.

    [00:17:37] Tania: It doesn’t have to be a whole pod. It could be a short blog. It could be a short loom video. It could be, you know, like a one page PDF. It does not have to be complicated, but something that’s targeted to how they voted in that poll. So you have something immediately for them. Right. And just as a, you know, example.

    [00:17:56] Tania: When I did this during my last launch, I had 60 people vote in my poll, and about, like, a little bit more than half of them said yes to my inquiry. And so that’s about, like, uh, you know, like a baseline. It’s like a second version. Yeah, that’s, that’s, that’s just like an example number that you can go with.

    [00:18:13] Tania: Not everybody’s gonna say yes, and that’s okay, because you’re just whittling it down to the people who really are interested, and really the people who you’re gonna have the most, kind of, productive, fun. Valuable sort of like conversation with in the DMs.

    [00:18:29] April: Okay. And, okay. So let me ask you some questions that are in my head and I’m trying to imagine what our listeners or what their questions are right now as well. And if you guys have questions about this, if you have questions for Tania, please connect with her on LinkedIn and, you know, if we’re going to make sure her resources is in there too and just, and ask her directly too, if we miss some of your questions, some, some basics, how frequently could somebody post a poll?

    [00:18:56] Tania: Yeah. Honestly, you could do one like pretty frequently. I personally would probably limit it to about, you know, maybe two per month. You know, and it kind of depends on your posting cadence. Like if you post every day, then yeah, you know, absolutely. Two per month is, is no, no biggie. I tend to teach this kind of strategy to folks who are, they tend to be like in the trenches.

    [00:19:21] Tania: They are oftentimes like, like nonprofit. Eds or they’re just, they’re very busy. They’re not trying to spend all their time on LinkedIn. So I kind of teach a strategy of posting once per week. And because of how LinkedIn is set up that, that can be enough, right? Not so much for other social media platforms, but again, on LinkedIn, for a variety of reasons, like that can be enough.

    [00:19:41] Tania: And so if you’re posting once per week, you know, maybe once a quarter. You know, do this poll strategy because again, like you said, very astutely, like it’s not just about posting the poll. There is some followup involved and the, the, you know, the real riches, right, are always in the followup. Like the good, like the good energy is always in the follow up. That’s really where you get that conversation going. So don’t, you know, if this is going to be like, I recommend really making sure you have time to do that follow up. That’s really important.

    [00:20:13] April: I was, that’s what I was thinking. And I was saying this and you know, I I’m working right now on trade tab. Break out my, my LinkedIn time. And as you’re going through this, I’m thinking, wow, okay. I would want to make sure that I didn’t post a poll unless I knew that I had that built in time to actually finish it up and follow it up. And yeah, the fortune is always in the followup. So that’s a really, really good point.

    [00:20:34] April: And then the other thing, , as you’re saying this. Is there’s a couple for our listeners you guys this Strategy would pair well with a strategy that we did I think it was episode 303 where I was teaching you guys how to create a quiz as a lead magnet Go back and look at that and take some of the questions from that and put it into this poll here that that Tania is telling you about Yeah, but this working so well hand in hand with launch.

    [00:21:01] Tania: Yes.

    [00:21:02] April: And it’s like a sweat equity funnel. You have to put in the time. You have to be willing to build the relationships. You have to want to have conversations with people, but this in conjunction with a launch just seems. So organic to me, it just seems like a no brainer why all of us frankly wouldn’t be doing this

    [00:21:24] Tania: Yeah, it’s it’s a tool that kind of lets the warmest people emerge, you know Cuz sometimes like we’re just we don’t know who like we’re just looking for signs and signals and this is like a very strong signal right that That somebody would be interested.

    [00:21:37] Tania: And if you can create a poll that is very much rooted in the transformation of the program that you’re launching, it’s like a, it’s like a win. It’s like a no brainer. It’s like a win win. It just works.

    [00:21:50] April: Right. That’s gold. That’s gold. Okay. So as we wrap it up, let’s kind of recap what we talked about and give our listeners three action steps or four action steps or whatever you want to do to leave here right now, not, you know, to not just think about this, to actually go and take action on what you have taught them here today.

    [00:22:08] Tania: Yeah. So like three, three action items. Okay. Yeah. So the first thing I would do is think about, you know, a program that you’re launching right now, an offer that you’re really wanting to sell right now, whether it’s. You know, whether you’re a coach, consultant, service provider, other type of business owner, think about that program promise. Like think about the transformation that you create for your clients and the problem that you solve. And then think about a question that you would want to ask folks that gets at the root of that, the heart of that.

    [00:22:34] Tania: And probably the easiest thing would be like, what’s a barrier that stops you from doing this on your own kind of thing. Again, another option is to ask them like, what would be the dream if you could accomplish this? But sometimes the barriers are just a little bit more. Concrete, they’re a little bit more easy, you know, to figure out.

    [00:22:51] Tania: So I would first of all, figure that out, like figure out that question. And then, you know, three, like two to four answers that fall under that. So again, in my example, cause I always think examples are helpful. My program promises around like batching six months of LinkedIn content. So the barriers I would include are like. Writer’s blog, not having time, my creative process doesn’t allow for it, and you know, I’m afraid my content won’t stay relevant if I batch for that blog, you know, those are just examples.

    [00:23:21] Tania: So think about what those would be in your example, in your program. The second thing that I would do, I mean, literally I would just find like a week in your calendar where you have, where you can, where you know you’ll have the time to kind of like have these DM conversations, right?

    [00:23:38] Tania: Um, and really that you’re going to want to We are going to want to have that time the week after you post the poll. So just like, think about that. , and I would just. do it, right? I would just put that poll up. I would just start it. And this is a test. Like, if you only get three people voting, like, that’s okay.

    [00:23:54] Tania: That’s, that’s still great. You have three people that you know, you know, are struggling with a problem that you, um, you know, solve. So that’s a great thing. And the third thing that I would do or kind of action item that I would take is, you know, LinkedIn is organically going to show your poll to people, you know, people that you know already, then you’re connected with people that, uh, you don’t know, but are connected to the people who are voting.

    [00:24:21] Tania: Like it’ll have that sort of just like networky effect, but. Don’t be afraid to share the poll in other places other than just LinkedIn, right? So in your post, there’s a little, it’s going to look like three little dots on the top right of your post. You can click on those three dots. And a dropdown is going to come up and you’re going to select copy link to post.

    [00:24:46] Tania: And then in your clipboard, you’ve got a direct link to that poll. So if you send out a weekly newsletter, you know, like promo the poll in that, in that newsletter, right? If you’re a member of any Slack channels, you know, Facebook communities. If you have a group of business besties that just, you all support each other, a pure mastermind.

    [00:25:06] Tania: Like there’s so many networks that you’re in that just aren’t LinkedIn. And this is a way to bring. Fresh people who maybe don’t check LinkedIn all the time, who maybe just missed it, um, to bring them to your poll and kind of, you know, manufacture a little bit of additional engagement, which is just going to increase the overall engagement of your poll.

    [00:25:25] Tania: Right? So that would be the third thing I’d say is like, don’t be afraid to kind of go off LinkedIn to. Increase the engagement on LinkedIn for your poll, right? Oh, and then obviously the fourth one, which I know you just said three, but the fourth one is don’t forget to follow up. Like if you’re not having these DM conversations, like, you know, it’s still a good thing to do the poll. It’s not like a waste of time. But again, like we said before, the riches is in the follow up. So. Yeah. Don’t be afraid.

    [00:25:51] April: Yeah. These are all, this is a great training. Thank you so much. And in every, every time I hear this and every time I hear this, say this, and, and again, like when you taught this in our business mastermind a week or so ago, immediately I had.

    [00:26:06] April: All of these things and I was ready to take action, but I knew this week I wouldn’t have time to write. And so for me, for me, like I’m hanging onto that. That’s my, you know, I, I believe time’s more valuable than money. So I’m like, okay, when am I going to actually build in my time? But I think that people will get stuck on the, what question do I ask?

    [00:26:24] April: And just to remind you guys, go back to all of your offer engineer training. What exactly, like Tonya said, like what transformation do you deliver? What is the end result of that? And what are the pains and the problems that you’re, you are helping people solve it and what are their struggles? Why aren’t they there already?

    [00:26:40] April: Why do they need you? , so just, just some good reminders and you can sort the podcast website for all the trainings on offer engineering. If you guys are stuck there too. So. Tanya, you have this batch, this LinkedIn batching thing coming up, and I know you want to share a resource with our listeners as well, and you guys please move forward and connect with Tania too for her time and just blessing her for being here and pouring into us. Tell us about that resource where people can interact with you more.

    [00:27:09] Tania: Yeah, definitely. Definitely. Well, like, like you said, April, like definitely a great place to find me is LinkedIn, but I know in the show notes, we’re going to include a link to this kind of thing. Freebie I have, which is 14 free prompts that you can use to inspire your ongoing LinkedIn posts, right?

    [00:27:26] Tania: And I think, I think polls might be one of the 14. I mean, that would make sense, right? But there’s all kinds of things that you can kind of like ask yourself to really let the, the most impactful LinkedIn content emerge. So definitely check that out. And, yeah, I’d say those are two really great ways to, to connect.

    [00:27:46] Tania: Yeah, I appreciate your time so much. We’ll make sure all of the details are in the show notes, and then, we’ll of course be posting this on LinkedIn as well. Thank you so much for coming in here, and you guys, Tanya teaches much more than polls. That was just like one little thing that she, that she talks about that we wanted to bring to you today, so it’s an actionable strategy that you can implement right away. But, , she’s a great, great resource if you are looking for, other support. I appreciate you so good to be here.


    How To Grow Your LinkedIn Company Page with April Beach (Episode 304)

    How To Grow Your LinkedIn Company Page




    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-5 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) 
    Wondering what to do with your LinkedIn Company page? Join the club. LinkedIn Company pages have been generally inactive and ineffective for growing brands and capturing leads. Over the years you may have created a company page and it’s just sitting there… or maybe you’re posting to your company page and hoping the spaghetti will stick and measurable growth will miraculously happen. If so, this SweetLife Entrepreneur™ episode is for you…
    On a hunt for tangible LinkedIn Company page strategies, I came across Michelle J Raymond, who is an international LinkedIn Company Pages expert and LinkedIn B2B Growth Strategist. Michelle also wrote the first book on LinkedIn Company pages! Perfecto… we found exactly who were looking for. 
    In this episode Michelle breaks down the potential of LinkedIn Company pages and how you can use a simple strategy, which she unpacks on this episode,  to leverage LinkedIn Company Pages for your business: 
    • Why businesses of all sizes need a company page
    • How much time to allocate to your company page
    • What content works best on company pages
    • How do you grow your page followers fast
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Change your mind and hurry over to build your company page
    • Have simple steps you can implement right now to grow your Company Page audience
    • Understand what goes on your Company Page vs. Personal Feed

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April Beach: Hi, you guys. And welcome back to the show. This is episode number 304. So if you’ve been a long time listener, you know that all the show notes and everything we’re going to share with you can be found by visiting SweetLife.

    [00:00:57] April Beach: Simply click on the podcast and you can search episode number 304. I’m April Beach, host here on the show, and I’m really glad that you’ve tuned into this episode. I can tell you that I really needed to hear and learn what today’s guest brought to the table for us. If you have been trying to grow your business on LinkedIn and maybe you’re like me, I’ve had no idea, honestly.

    [00:01:19] April Beach: Raise your hand. How to use LinkedIn company pages. Yes, we use them, but there really wasn’t a big strategy behind it. And LinkedIn didn’t have a huge reach. Well, if you’re like me and you actually want to know how to utilize your company page to build your brand, increase your sales, gain followers, and build relationships with important people.

    [00:01:41] April Beach: That are going to grow and scale your business. Then this episode is for you. Today’s guest literally wrote the book, the first ever book on LinkedIn company pages. And in today’s episode, she’s going to share with you and me how much we are leaving on the table. Literally how many things that we could be doing that are simple tweaks to your business page that we’re just walking away from.

    [00:02:04] April Beach: It’s like burning cash. You’re going to be blown away by the strategies you hear on today’s show. And what you’re going to walk away with is a simple process to know how to use your LinkedIn company page to build your brand, increase sales, gain recognition for your company and become more known. In addition to that, we even talk about the connection between your company page and your LinkedIn personal page and why that’s important.

    [00:02:27] April Beach: So if you’re looking to grow your business on LinkedIn to gain recognition and to have a strategy that’s actually so simple, you can actually. Hand of the strategy that you get here on the show today to a team member to implement for you. It’s amazing. Or if you’re flying solo, this is a very simple strategy that you should be able to easily implement on your own for your LinkedIn company page following the steps that our guest is diving into today here.

    [00:02:56] April Beach: So we have Michelle J. Raymond on the show. She’s amazing. I was introduced to Michelle by a mutual friend, and if you aren’t yet, Please cruise over and follow Michelle on LinkedIn. Again, it’s Michelle J. Raymond. Let her know that you heard this episode. You’re going to want to connect with her for sure after this.

    [00:03:13] April Beach: It’s just an amazing amount of information that is truly going to be able to be implemented in your business and make a significant difference today. So if that’s what you’re looking for, you’re in the right place. Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.

    [00:03:27] April Beach: Hi everybody and welcome back to the show. I’m here with my new friend, Michelle, and Michelle was introduced to me by another new friend, which is not always the way we meet, like the coolest people is introductions from other people. And. Michelle and I are going to dive into all things LinkedIn company pages. And one of the, one of the most amazing things that has happened since I’ve been connecting with Michelle is that I realized that our company page is really lacking.

    [00:03:56] April Beach: One of the biggest reality check is basically, I really didn’t know what I was doing with LinkedIn company pages. Like I knew I didn’t know. And then I just talked to Michelle and tapped into all of her genius and realize how much I’m really leaving on the table because of my lack of understanding. So I’m really excited that, that you are here to help me and all of our listeners really understand how to dive in and utilize LinkedIn company pages more. So welcome to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast and thank you for being here and sharing your wisdom.

    [00:04:25] Michelle J Raymond: It is my absolute pleasure and if it makes you feel any better, don’t worry, you’re in the majority, not the minority. They are vastly understood and put it this way, I wrote the world’s first book on it just three years ago.

    [00:04:39] Michelle J Raymond: Now think about that. LinkedIn has been around for 20 years. There’s been no resources. It’s at all up until three years ago, which is just ludicrous. So hopefully we can help your listeners here today with some actionable tips that they can take away and move a little bit more into the, you do know some things about company pages that you can implement and help grow your business.

    [00:04:58] April Beach: Absolutely. I’m so excited. So tell everybody a little bit how you said you wrote the first book on LinkedIn company pages. I mean, that is pretty crazy that nobody had actually figured it out yet until you did that. So how did you fall into that?

    [00:05:14] Michelle J Raymond: Fall into it is the right words. So three years ago I set up my own business and not even that was intentional, it was accidental. So I’m an accidental entrepreneur, which I hope some other people can relate to. But picture this, one day I win a 2 million deal from a LinkedIn post for the company that I was working at. about a week later, I had to quit on the spot because the boss reneged on that deal. So imagine going from the highs of a 2 million win to I quit on the spot, never planned on quitting.

    [00:05:46] Michelle J Raymond: And that whole mess that that was, but I just decided I wasn’t going to work for anybody else ever again. I’d had a run of bad bosses and I just figured I might as well work hard for myself. And so I did that. And after, you know, six months of trying to figure that out, I end up. On LinkedIn training, because I’d been using LinkedIn to sell for the last six years at that point.

    [00:06:07] Michelle J Raymond: And so I thought I could help other people because it was March, 2020, you know, that little thing called COVID that sent the world into lockdown. That’s when I set my business up which turns out it was a good thing, but essentially I help people. And I went to the first person, offered them training and they said, can’t you just do it for us?

    [00:06:23] Michelle J Raymond: And I said, is that even a job? Like I didn’t even know April, I’m not going to lie. I didn’t even realize that people would pay other people to do social media. That’s the craziness in hindsight, but I’m not even making that up. And the thing was company pages are a way that you can get a third party to do your LinkedIn for you without breaking any of the terms and conditions.

    [00:06:43] Michelle J Raymond: So I started to do that for one client. Then I looked around and went, no one else is talking about this. So I’m just going to own that spot. And three years ago, people thought I was crackers. There’s no other words for it. They just thought, where’d I come from? And why was I talking about this thing that absolutely everybody else was just.

    [00:07:03] Michelle J Raymond: Slamming and that’s where it started. It got me noticed for being known for that one thing. And it’s just got me so many opportunities since. But that’s how it all started. It was crazy. But here we are now.

    [00:07:16] April Beach: It, you know, there’s the guy, there’s so many gems from what you just shared in your story. But just for our listeners also, this is totally a sidebar, but it shows the importance of being known for something and being known for one specific thing, even though Michelle and I, and you that are listening, you all, we have a million different things we could do.

    [00:07:36] April Beach: But the becoming known for one thing and leaning into that and the power of that. And so that’s just a, that’s a, we could just end the podcast right there on that, but we’re not going to, I mean, that, that’s a, that’s a gem lesson right there. Right. It really, really shows that importance and then we can be known for something else next and something else next. And we just keep reinventing ourselves. Don’t we, you guys.

    [00:07:56] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah. And that’s where I’m up to right now. Reinventing because, you know, I was known for that one thing and it’s opened so many doors. But now I’m going through this next evolution phase, which is exciting because being known for that one thing got me onto a podcast, which was picked up because someone saw me write a comment on LinkedIn and then someone in New Zealand listened to the podcast and then they reached out and they’re like, do you want to write a book together?

    [00:08:20] Michelle J Raymond: And like the whole thing, it went from Vienna to Dubai, to New Zealand, to me in Sydney. How crazy is that? That’s the power of LinkedIn. And that’s why I fell in love with it so long ago.

    [00:08:31] April Beach: Oh my gosh. I love your story and I’m so grateful that you’re here. Thank you so much for being here to share with us. All right. So pages, company pages. I mean, I, I think that I have had company pages since I don’t even know, before 2010 probably. And they have just sat there. We’ve been trying to use our company page in the past couple of years, but I have no idea what to do with it. So why is it important to have a company page?

    [00:08:58] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah, look, and this is the thing. Company pages realistically have been around for a long time, but it’s only been over the last few years that I think that they’ve got the attention they deserve from LinkedIn themselves. Now, why is that? Thanks to COVID, everybody brought their advertised Spend off other platforms and brought it to LinkedIn, you need a company page to run ads.

    [00:09:19] Michelle J Raymond: And so they are cashed up and this is one area of growth for them. Now that works out for all of us who only do organic strategies, i. e. not paid because we get the benefits of all of these additional features. And so LinkedIn have put more resources, they’ve made them more actionable, but why should you use it?

    [00:09:38] Michelle J Raymond: Go and Google your business name. That’s my simple answer. We piggyback and leverage off LinkedIn’s credibility and Google loves LinkedIn. And so your company page will show up in the first, probably five results maximum, sometimes one or two, depending how much content you’ve got out on the internet.

    [00:09:56] Michelle J Raymond: Picture that first page results, top five, your LinkedIn company page is going to land there. Now you’ve got two choices. You can ignore it. Or you can basically roll out the red carpet if someone clicks on it and give them something that really welcomes them and shows them who you are and what you do as a business. That’s what I help people with. I want them to roll out the red carpet.

    [00:10:19] April Beach: Wow. I had no idea. I just never even thought about that. But now that you explained that, it makes complete sense. And so in the past, I know that besides the SEO part of it that you just mentioned in the past, it was really hard to get followers to company pages and they don’t have a lot of exposure.

    [00:10:38] April Beach: And the SEO within LinkedIn itself just didn’t seem that it was being shared with a lot of people. Can you speak a little bit to, you know, if there are so few people that actually see this. Other than some other benefits. I know we’re going to learn from you. Like why take the time? Why, why spend the time to curate the content for this page?

    [00:10:56] Michelle J Raymond: They were super hard to grow. When I first started, they were like snails pace. I would have to tell people, you know, plan six to 12 months before you see anything, and I can assure you when someone’s paying you for a service. They don’t want to wait six to 12 months to see a result. The good part that LinkedIn’s done is one of the new features that they rolled out a while back is that we get invitation credits so we can invite our first degree connections.

    [00:11:20] Michelle J Raymond: That’s people that we’re connected to. We can invite them to come and follow the page. Now we went from 100 to 250, so it’s a really easy way. That you can build a niche community. Now, this isn’t a place where you’re gathering friends and family and former colleagues or aunties and uncles, or, you know, relatives that aren’t interested in your business.

    [00:11:40] Michelle J Raymond: We’re building a niche community, much smaller, a higher concentrate of people that are interested in what you do and what you offer. And that’s the main difference between our personal profiles. So one’s highly concentrated and one’s a bit more of a numbers game of lots of people that we’ve connected along the way.

    [00:11:58] Michelle J Raymond: And they just work differently. And I think that’s an important piece for people to understand they work differently. So you can grow really quickly. You can do a lot with a page that’s got a couple of thousand. And if anyone’s ever used a review website, like TripAdvisor, Yelp, any restaurant review website.

    [00:12:18] Michelle J Raymond: That’s what we do before we make purchases. It’s completely normal for us to go and research companies. So they might like me or they might like you, April, personally, and have followed our content. When it comes to handing over that money, we just want to make sure that the business is credible as well. And so this is where your company page supports what you do with your personal brand.

    [00:12:39] April Beach: Oh, it all makes so much sense now that you explain that. Can I ask you specifically about those invite credits? Can you share just a little bit more about how those work? Because I know that people have heard about them and, and just a little bit more clarity on that.

    [00:12:52] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah. The thing is, I don’t think most company pages are taking full advantage of this and it is the fastest and easiest way to grow your page. And so what happens every month you get 250 invite credits that can be used across of all of your page admins. So you might have multiple people helping to manage your company page and spread that work around.

    [00:13:12] Michelle J Raymond: So what happens is you invite people and here’s the kicker. For every person that accepts, you get an invite credit back again, which is awesome. So be targeted higher chance of acceptance. You get another turn brilliant, but here’s the other side. They expire at the end of every month. So if you don’t use them, you lose them.

    [00:13:31] Michelle J Raymond: So keep an eye out. It’s really simple. Just go to the page admin view. And in the top right hand corner, you’ll see invite connections. And what makes this even more brilliant? Is LinkedIn introduced some filters for us. So whether you target people by a geography, by an industry, or maybe you went a particular school, then you can do that within these filters.

    [00:13:52] Michelle J Raymond: So again, they help you be targeted. They help you form that niche. And that is where the brilliance starts to come into play.

    [00:13:59] Michelle J Raymond: Oh, that’s so cool.

    [00:14:00] April Beach: I did notice the filtering on there and was playing with some invite credits in the past, and I think it’s really cool how they give you the credit back when somebody accepts it.

    [00:14:08] April Beach: It’s just saying, yes, somebody actually really does want to know about your brand and follow you and be part of this community. So that is super exciting. So let’s kind of go into how do you even have Post on this company page. What do you put out there? What kind of content should we share on a company page versus in our on our personal linkedin profile?

    [00:14:29] April Beach: I really I don’t think that people understand and know and what I’ve seen in the past. And I feel like we’ve done the same thing, too, because we didn’t know any better was just kind of sharing some of the same stuff And, and I understand now already just in what you’ve shared with us, that that is definitely not the right approach.

    [00:14:47] April Beach: Look,

    [00:14:47] Michelle J Raymond: it’s not the worst. I’d rather that than nothing because again, if someone finds you or discovers you on Google or the LinkedIn search bar, then at least they find something and not just the ghost town. So not the worst thing, but here’s my three, two, one strategy, April, which I’ll share, which makes it super easy for anyone running a company page to know what to post.

    [00:15:08] Michelle J Raymond: And the last thing we want. We do not want them to be broadcast channels all about the company. No one wants to read that. It reads like ads and everybody just scrolls as fast as possible past ads. So don’t do it listeners. But here’s the three, two, one strategy. So three plus two. Plus one equals six.

    [00:15:26] Michelle J Raymond: Okay. So we’re talking about six posts in total, and I’m going to show you how we break down those six posts. Now, for some of you, you might only be able to do one post a week. Totally fine. You might be able to do two in an ideal world. I’d recommend three, if you can get those done. So how are we going to do it?

    [00:15:44] Michelle J Raymond: We have what’s called good to know posts. So three out of those six are good to know. And what do I mean by good to know? These are the posts where you highlight what you know is going on in your industry that would really help other people. If you’re a subject matter expert, doesn’t matter the topic you have access and to, or probably have done a lot of research in your particular area.

    [00:16:07] Michelle J Raymond: Instead of other people having to do that same research, you become the place that they come to learn. And so this is what I call good to know. So trends that are going on. Maybe there’s been legislation changes for some people. Maybe there are things that are impacting that particular business, like changes to technology.

    [00:16:24] Michelle J Raymond: You know, chat GPT is probably a big one that’s. That’s, you know, just being all over the place, but how is that impacting your particular area? And so you start to build up your credibility and to be known for that thing. And then, but if we just talk about that all the time, April, not going to lie, that gets a little dry, a little boring.

    [00:16:42] Michelle J Raymond: And that’s when people are like, okay, you know, but what kind of a business are you? And this is where we start to come into the, what I call good to feel. So this is. What is your business? What do they stand for? We know that buyers are drawn to people who share values, purpose driven companies are getting, you know, a lot more say these days.

    [00:17:04] Michelle J Raymond: So start to show us some of the things that makes your business different to others. What do I mean by this? If you’re doing work out in the community, show that. Show us some photos of what goes on behind the scenes. You know, it can be as simple as grabbing your phone, taking a selfie or a video when you’re out and about, and just explaining to people that this is part of your process.

    [00:17:26] Michelle J Raymond: We want to see behind the curtains, like the wizard of Oz, you know, who’s behind that curtain. And this is what the good to know, sorry, good to feel posts will show people. So then we get that affinity for the business and we get to start to filter out who we want to work with and who we may not want to, but that leaves the lucky last post out of those six, which is the most important one, even though it’s the least that most people skip over.

    [00:17:51] Michelle J Raymond: And you know what it is. The good to buy post for the love of God, please tell people what your business does and make it really clear so that people don’t have to guess what you do. I have so many people that I’m connected to on LinkedIn that post regularly that I learn a lot from. I even like them a lot, but I have no clue what they actually sell to people to be able to refer business or to buy from them. And I’m sure you see that a lot as well.

    [00:18:22] April Beach: I think I do that a lot. Not only see that a lot.

    [00:18:26] Michelle J Raymond: Yeah.

    [00:18:27] April Beach: Wow. It is. It is so true.

    [00:18:30] Michelle J Raymond: We get stuck in adding value. There’s this thing don’t sell on LinkedIn. And the problem is we can absolutely sell on LinkedIn. That’s why I’m there. I help businesses grow using LinkedIn.

    [00:18:41] Michelle J Raymond: But the problem is when we do it all the time and get the ratio out of whack, say we were doing it six posts, we were just saying, bye, bye, bye. No one wants that. But the problem is we’re doing all this value, building up our credibility, people like us, and then they’re just confused. They’re just like, well, what would I actually spend my money with you?

    [00:19:00] Michelle J Raymond: Now, when we keep it in the three to one ratio, people don’t mind because they’ve seen, you know, your things, they have an affinity for your business. And then they’re like, shut up and take my money, but they don’t know where. And so this is what I’d like to help people. It’s no longer a broadcast at people.

    [00:19:16] Michelle J Raymond: The content style is very similar to what you do on your personal page, but. Don’t forget the good to buy posts. It is critical, even on your personal posts. It won’t reach as many people as part of the game, but it will reach the right people. And that’s the important piece. We don’t want to walk away and leave money on the table.

    [00:19:36] April Beach: Wow. Okay. So three good to knows, two good to feels and one good to buy.

    [00:19:43] Michelle J Raymond: Don’t forget that one.

    [00:19:44] April Beach: That was a game changer for me, an absolute game changer for me. So let’s talk about the frequency of this and, and how often you think that we should be company or posting to our company page.

    [00:19:56] April Beach: I don’t think

    [00:19:57] Michelle J Raymond: there’s any one answer because every business is different. So let’s say it comes down to resources. Now for a lot of businesses, if you’re a solopreneur or a micro business, you don’t have a team that’s doing all of this for you, so you’ve got to do it yourself. I would kind of do the 80 20 rule. Most of your content should go over on your personal profile with, you know, just the smaller share go over on your company page.

    [00:20:21] Michelle J Raymond: So we’re going to take it over in that particular case, ideal world. Even with my paying clients, we’re only doing three times a week. We’re putting our efforts into elsewhere on the platform, you know, forming relationships, nurturing relationships, and putting content out personally. So just keep it ticking over.

    [00:20:37] Michelle J Raymond: Don’t get stressed. It’s okay to repurpose to your point. I have no problems for that, but what we do is we just put a bit of a gap in between when you’re repurposing, unless it’s time critical for say an event, any other posts, just put some space between it. And then that way people will just kind of go, I haven’t seen that before.

    [00:20:56] Michelle J Raymond: And you’ve kind of got two different audiences. And on LinkedIn, we often see the same thing twice. And what do we do? We just scroll by and just go. What’s the silly algorithm. We don’t blame the person. And so I’ve got a concept that might help some people to keep going. Create your LinkedIn company page is going to be your greatest hits library.

    [00:21:16] Michelle J Raymond: And what I mean by that and I’m going to be showing my age here, but when I was younger, I used to buy CDs and you would buy a CD, which have say 25 songs on it and three were great. But you had to buy the whole thing just to get those three. Well, we’re not going to do that. We want all killer, no filler.

    [00:21:34] Michelle J Raymond: So we just want the three good tracks on the company page. And don’t worry about trying to keep up with the rest. When you take away the volume component and up the quality, it becomes so much easier to do. So yeah, create it as your greatest hits library and it’s so much easier.

    [00:21:50] April Beach: Ah, I’m going to, it used to be cassette tapes for me. I’m really going to age myself.

    [00:21:54] Michelle J Raymond: I’ve got those too, the mixtapes.

    [00:21:57] April Beach: The mixtapes. We used to hit record when the radio was playing live to try to catch the song in the beginning. Oh my gosh. Yeah. This is, that is really, really interesting. Okay. So the greatest hits I honestly, I always like try to throw myself under the, well not try to, I always end up throwing myself under the bus here on the podcast, especially when I’m learning so many new things.

    [00:22:17] April Beach: I honestly think that we have just been saying, okay, we don’t know where else to put this content. We’re just going to put it out on the company page. It was, we have so much content because of the podcast. We’re like, sure, let’s just put it on the company page, put it on the company page. And so I think that we’ve been sharing a lot of content, but there was certainly been no strategy behind it other than sharing, you know, this weekly podcast.

    [00:22:37] April Beach: This is a game changer. And now I can see why you wrote the first book on LinkedIn company pages. And also why so many people are coming to you to help grow their business and their brand on LinkedIn. So I’m absolutely incredibly helpful, Michelle. I know that many of our listeners want to connect with you, want to know how to get your book because I mean that if this is what we’ve just picked up and you know, 20 minutes, then what is it going to be if they, if they actually dive into all your genius, how can they find you and connect with you?

    [00:23:10] April Beach: Well, the

    [00:23:11] Michelle J Raymond: easiest place to find me is always on LinkedIn and it’s Michelle J. Raymond. And that J is there deliberately not to make my name longer, but to make it easier for you to find me because there’s lots of other Michelle Raymonds. So Michelle J. Raymond and the book is called Business Gold and it’s on Amazon.

    [00:23:26] Michelle J Raymond: But if you go to my profile, there’s links there and always happy to point people in the direction, but ultimately it’s everything you need to get you started. Started with your company paid. So we’ve covered a little bit here today, but for those of you who want to be stepped through the book is great. It’s a two hour read. It will set you off at success for the future.

    [00:23:44] April Beach: Wow. Thank you so much for your wisdom and your experience and your excellence and everything you’ve taught us here today. We’ll definitely be applying this. I know in our business, and we’re really excited because you get to come in and teach our clients in an intensive coming up.

    [00:23:58] April Beach: And I know our clients are really excited to be able to work with you. So just. Thank you so much for all the change that you’re making in all of our businesses. And we really appreciate you.

    [00:24:07] Michelle J Raymond: It is my pleasure. I wish everyone all the growth this year. It’s a tough year, but I know they’re in good hands with you. So yeah, I’m excited to be working with you guys and just show people that this is just another tool that you can leverage to help your business grow. So yeah, excited to see what we can do.

    [00:24:24] Michelle J Raymond: Me

    [00:24:24] April Beach: too. Me too. It’s excellent. Thank you so much.


    3 Steps To Build Your Business From Podcasting Without Running Ads, Even With A Small Audience with April Beach (Episode 303)

    3 Steps To Build Your Business From Podcasting Without Running Ads, Even With A Small Audience



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want 
    You’re a podcaster or you’d like to be, but you’re wondering how to make money for your business from your show, especially in a market that feel saturated. In this show April records live from Podcast Movement 2023 and she is delivering to you the exact talk she delivered on stage at Podcast Movement! 
    If you have a small list, or you’re new to podcasting. If you don’t want advertisers or you don’t have enough downloads for them to pay attention to you. And, if you’re wondering how we’ve generated over a million dollars in sales directly attributed to this how, this episode unpacks it all. 
    This show also comes with: 
    • Slides from April’s talk at Podcast Movement 2023
    • 1 hour training and worksheets on how to create an intuitive quiz for your show
    • Powerful resources for building aligned offers 


    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    • Know how to create a show structure that make you the centerpiece, even with guests
    • Have a funnel you can apply to your show
    • Know how to create offers that your listeners can’t refuse
    3 Steps to a Profitable Podcast – Podcast Movement Friends –
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] Hi guys. And welcome to episode number 303. This is a special treat. I am literally recording this episode on location. If you’re watching the video version of this from Podcast Movement, 2023, and I’m going to give you a secret. I’m literally recording to you the exact workshop training that I’m going to be delivering here as a speaker. at podcast movement this week. And here’s really our little secret. I am using this recording to practice my talk at Podcast Movement.

    [00:01:18] So let’s see how well I do. You guys always get the behind-the-scenes here. When you tap into me at this podcast, if we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I am the founder of the SweetLife Company, and we help. Subject matter experts, coaches, and consultants scale their business with million-dollar programs and content licensing.

    [00:01:39] And this entire show is designed to give you guys free trainings and coaching that you would pay thousands of dollars worth somewhere else. So I’m super glad that you’re here. Couple of prerequisites here as we dive in this, like I said, is the workshop that I’m delivering here at Podcast Movement Live two days from now.

    [00:02:00] So our audio is not going to be pristine. I’m sitting here in the Riverside booth recording this, which is so cool Riverside is a software we use to record this show we have for years We love these guys and they were nice enough to give me a table here so I could record this show for you So I’m super stoked about this, but you know the sounds might be a little off.

    [00:02:23] You guys are used to that though, because you know, behind the scenes at the beach house where my home studio is, you’re usually going to hear loud noises and kids and dogs anyway. So here we go.

    [00:02:33] Today, I’m delivering you a workshop that is going to find the solution for three steps to build a profitable business from your podcast without running ads.

    [00:02:44] Even if you have a small audience, that’s the workshop I’m teaching here. And those are the solutions that I’m going to give to you today. Now, who is this podcast for this episode for this episode is for those of you guys who again are subject matter experts, coaches and consultants, and you may want to launch a podcast or you have a podcast and it feels really saturated in the industry and you’re wondering, you know, nobody’s going to pay to advertise on my podcast.

    [00:03:14] Maybe you have less than 10, downloads, right? So how do you make money from your podcast? The truth of the matter is, is I’m going to give you our exact framework on how we have made money and profited from this podcast directly into our business. So you’re in the right place. If you’re interested in podcasting, having your own show, not being a guest, if you’re interested in having your own show, or if you have your own show and maybe you’re not making money from it, maybe you don’t know how to turn listeners into buyers.

    [00:03:48] I’m pulling back of the curtains and giving you every single thing here. So at the end of this, you are going to have a proven funnel that you can apply to your show. You are going to understand our strategy and you’re going to be able to actually take implementation tools that I’m giving you and be able to apply it to your show.

    [00:04:09] So stay around and let’s dive in if that is what you want. Are you guys ready? All of the show notes can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. This is episode number 303. 303. Shout out to all the 303 Boulder, Colorado area code people, even though that’s totally irrelevant to the podcast. You know, I just had to give a shout out there to 303.

    [00:04:37] All right, let’s go ahead and dive into the show you guys. There’s gonna be no breaks, no crazy music in the middle. This is you and me on scene here at Podcast Movement going through these steps. So, Step number one to build a profitable business from your podcast is to have a predictable show structure.

    [00:04:56] One of the things that you might have realized, especially if you’ve been listening to this show for a long time, is I have a certain format that I go through. Well, I should say I try to go through at least on nine out of 10 episodes, and I’m going to give you our exact format. But before I do that, I need to tell you one very important thing.

    [00:05:17] Whether you have an interview type show or whether you have a solo show, it’s really important that you are the centerpiece of your show. And if you already have a show and you aren’t sure, I want you to ask yourself this question. Do your listeners know why they need to buy you? Do they know the problem you solve because sometimes if you have an interview show you’re so busy Which is fantastic interviewing all these other great people if you’re trying to build a profitable business on the backside of your show You need to become the centerpiece of trust and the framework that I’m going to give you is going to help you do that Now this is totally our framework.

    [00:05:57] We’ve been using it for six years. So I promise you that it works But I’m also telling you you need to like take it and tweak it and make it your own like don’t copy my exact Framework, right guys, but I want you to take this framework and make it yours. So with a Predictable show structure what happens is is that when your listeners show up their brain is not overworking trying to navigate What’s happening here?

    [00:06:22] What are they talking about? What can I get out of this? Because our brains, they’re kind of lazy. And when we ask your listeners brains to exert a lot of calories to figure out, Why do I need to listen to this show? And why do I need to hire this coach? Or buy their programs or services? We’re asking their brains to do a lot of work.

    [00:06:41] So by having a predictable show structure, we’re reducing the work. Because we know that podcast listeners are listening in their car from work while they’re at the gym, while they’re cooking dinner, they’re multitasking while they’re listening. So having a predictable show structure is really going to help you to make sure that your listeners are getting exactly what they need out of your show.

    [00:07:01] When you do this, you’re going to build trust, you are going to help your listeners understand that you value their time, and you’re going to have returning listeners come back again and again and again, and they’re going to actually purchase your services because they know that you respect them, you deliver high quality content.

    [00:07:19] And that your show is a place where they can go find solutions. So here is our predictable show structure. The first part of our show, in the beginning of every show, I have what’s called a prerequisite. And a prerequisite is where I will say, Hey listen, this is who this show is for. If you’re in this place, if you need this, want this, or trying to learn this, or trying to do this, this is a great episode for you.

    [00:07:43] But then at the beginning of the show, just like I said in the beginning of this, It is not for those of you guys who want to know about guest podcasting. I also will tell you who this is not for. You know why? Because I respect your time. You respect my time. Everybody’s happy because we respect each other.

    [00:08:00] So the first step in the framework of a predictable show structure that we use is pre qualifying and disqualifying listeners from our show. The second step in the framework is where we share the opt in. Just like I shared with you, go to the show notes. You also can have a lead magnet. For your opt-in, and I’m gonna tell you right now, I’m gonna follow this structure.

    [00:08:21] We have a very powerful tool that I gave away for free, a podcast movement that I’m also gonna give to you guys. So when you go to the show notes for this episode number 3 0 3, you are gonna find all of the implementation tools, all of the worksheets, and I’m also giving you the slides from this talk from podcast movement.

    [00:08:44] So we’re gonna give you a ton of things. So now let’s apply that to your show. You say your prerequisite and then you say your opt in. What does that opt in look like? And then you share the end results. So again, the end results of this show are you’re going to have a funnel that you can duplicate and make your own.

    [00:09:01] And you’re going to be able to understand how you can make money from your show as a coach, consultant, or subject matter expert without running ads. Or without having advertisers to your show, because frankly, your audience might not be big enough that an advertiser wants to pay to get on your show. So again, the first three steps of a framework are prerequisite, opt in, and end result.

    [00:09:22] And then you’re going to go into your show content. I’m actually in my show content now because I’m already speaking to you. I’m already teaching you, but you’re going to go into your show content, whether that’s an interview or whether that is you. Teaching a training or delivering a monologue or whatever that is, whatever you do on your show.

    [00:09:41] After the content of the show, which is the bulk of the show, the meat and potatoes. There are two other steps to this framework and you’re going to hear these at the end of this show. The next one is the implementation. It’s a recap of what you talked about. It’s a recap of what those end results were that you said in the beginning and how people can actually implement.

    [00:10:04] So it’s recap and implement. This is where you would share your call to action. This is where you would share your Link to purchase your consulting program or schedule a call with you. This is where you have literally a direct call to action to the monetization piece of your business because if we aren’t actually monetizing the podcast yet.

    [00:10:24] We have to monetize your programs and services on the back side of it That’s how we make money from your show. So that implementation that call to action is very very important Don’t forget it. And then the last part of it is asking for people to share your show, especially if you’re a newer show, you don’t have a ton of listeners yet.

    [00:10:43] It’s really important that you ask, you know, people want to share, but sometimes we have to remind them, Hey, listen, can you please share this show with your friends? Because we don’t have advertisers on this show, and we might not even run advertisements to the show. So sometimes that is the most important thing is to ask.

    [00:11:01] So, to recap the show framework, we have prerequisite, opt in, end result, content, implementation, and ask. So, take notes on this, if you aren’t, again, go to the show notes at SweetLifeCo. com, click on the podcast episode 303, and I’ll give you all these slides and a whole bunch of more things. All right, let’s keep going here.

    [00:11:27] Step number two is to build what we call an intuitive lead magnet. The thing is, is that not all lead magnets work in a way that we need them to work for your show. So if your lead magnet should, and listen very carefully, holy moly, I hope you guys can hear me. I cannot even hear my own voice, so I really hope this is a good mic here.

    [00:11:50] With your intuitive lead magnet, we want, it has a couple of very specific jobs. It is going to categorize, qualify, disqualify, or rate your listeners, okay? And I’m going to tell you how to do that here in a minute. It is going to give them more information about themselves, and it’s going to provide a roadmap to the progression that they can go through and grow through with your company.

    [00:12:16] In addition, it is going to serve as the guidepost for your prerequisites. So, will people actually get results? Who should listen to what episode? And when you do this right, your lead magnet is going to label, it’s going to tag your listeners. It’s going to give you a segment of listeners and it’s also going to tell you if you’re hitting your target audience.

    [00:12:38] And let me explain to you exactly how we do that because that might seem a little overwhelming. I’m going to unpack our exact strategy for you. I recommend that you create a lead magnet in the form of a quiz or an assessment that is based on your methodology. Process, roadmap, consulting framework, maybe it’s based on the topics that you teach in.

    [00:13:02] Your lead magnet should align with a proven process, method, or framework that is your intellectual property, that came out of your genius brain. All right. And so let me give you an example of how we do this here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast. You guys have been listening for six years. You guys know all this already.

    [00:13:21] Okay. You know our tricks. We create a quiz and that quiz tells our listeners what level of business growth they’re in. And when they understand the level of business growth and you go to our podcast website. Our shows, our episodes are tagged to a level of business growth. So you know, if you’re in phase three, that you’re going to listen to the episodes aligned with phase three.

    [00:13:46] And that’s the kind of lead magnet I want you to create with your own quiz or your own assessment based on your intellectual property from your show. Now, I can’t cover all this right here, but I’m literally giving you an hour long training on how to create an intuitive quiz. for your show based on your method.

    [00:14:07] That is one of the many bonuses that I’m giving with this talk here at podcast movement. And of course, I’m going to give it to all you guys too. So go to the show notes and grab that. So let’s say that you have your quiz in place. What I really want to hone in on right now is what do you actually do with that quiz?

    [00:14:25] So there are five steps to actually then use that quiz to make your business more profitable on the backside of your show. The first one is to do what I said, tag each show. with an outcome to the quiz. So whether somebody lands in level one or level six, your shows and the content you deliver, even if you’re interviewing somebody, should align with an outcome based on your quiz or your assessment.

    [00:14:50] It’s very important to tag each show to the outcome for your quiz. Number two, at the beginning of every single one of your episodes, you’re going to go on, you’re going to show in your show and you’re going to say, Hey, listen, if you’re in level five, if you’re in level four, if you scored an A or a B or a C or whatever on our intuitive quiz, this show’s for you and you’re already see how I’m disqualifying or prequalifying and you’re going to be able to do that at the beginning of every show.

    [00:15:16] And I’m going to give you the language that we use exactly. This show is. for people in blank of my, and then insert your quiz or your roadmap name. And then you say, if you don’t know where you are in our genius process, pause this show for a second here and go take my short quiz. And so automatically everybody’s like, wow, well I don’t want to waste my time and listen to a show that isn’t for me, and I would really like to know where I am.

    [00:15:46] You know, we’re all like suckers for quizzes. I would really like to know where I am in April’s process of business growth, right? So they’re going to go and they’re going to take your quiz. So, you do that at the beginning of almost every episode as it flows, as it pertains. And if they don’t know where the quiz is, you need to have a very clear verbal call to action.

    [00:16:07] For example, go to my show notes or text the word quiz to this number. You need to have very clear verbal calls to action because if you give them a long URL, they are never going there. So number one is tag each show. Number two is qualify each show and tell people who it’s for in the beginning of the episode.

    [00:16:27] And then number three is if they haven’t taken your quiz yet, tell them very easily how to go find and take your quiz. Number four, what we do is we then put the, the label of each one of the outcomes of our quiz at the top of every show notes. So when you go to our show notes, cause you’re totally going to go there, right?

    [00:16:46] To get all of our free stuff, you’re going to see on top that it says, who is this episode for? Question mark. It says this episode is for established entrepreneurs who are in phases. Two through four of my system. And then there’s a hyperlink to go take the quiz if they haven’t taken it yet. I want you to do that in your show notes because we’re making the actual assessment a part of the ecosystem of your show.

    [00:17:13] And then the last thing that we do for good measure is we’ve also built our podcast website that all of our shows can be sorted based on the outcome of our business quiz. So you can also take that extra step and that is step number two, even though I just gave you five step steps in two total steps.

    [00:17:35] So, so far I’ve told you that to create a predictably profitable business on the backside of your podcast without running ads to it or running ads on it, that you need to number one, have a predictable show structure where you are the centerpiece. People know why they need you, even if you have guests.

    [00:17:51] Number two, I recommend that you have an intuitive quiz that can integrate with every single one of your shows. And then the very third thing is that make an irresistible offer. This is really important for you guys to know. Again, if you can’t monetize the show because you’re not getting 50 or a hundred thousand downloads per episode, I don’t have that.

    [00:18:14] Let’s be real. I’ve been podcasting six years. I don’t have that. And we have had advertisers approach us for advertising, but it’s just, I don’t, I just don’t want them on our show here. Right? It’s frankly, an advertiser is not going to pay me. I’m being really honest with you guys, as much money as I make off of clients having a relationship with me and hiring us on the backside of this show.

    [00:18:39] I have made more money doing that than an advertiser would ever pay me to advertise on my show. Okay. I’m being really real with you guys. All right. So here’s a couple of stats for you. 28% of podcasters have made a purchase from hearing about an offer on the show. So I recommend that you actually make direct offers for your own coaching programs and products on your show.

    [00:19:03] Number one, advertise your own stuff. on the show. That statistic comes from HubSpot. And then here’s another stat for you. 60% of podcast listeners say they’ve actually looked up products or taken action on a service after hearing an advertisement. So again, whether it’s your free lead magnet that we talked about, Or it’s an actual paid product.

    [00:19:27] We know that 28% have actually bought in 60% are going to go look at that product and check it out. Imagine if that’s your product. I don’t believe you should be shy about sharing your solutions on your show, especially with people that already know, love and trust you in this third step. When we’re talking about.

    [00:19:48] Building an irresistible offer, it’s very important that you understand that your offer, your program, your solution has to be aligned with your podcast, right? So for a profitable podcast, you have to have an aligned offer. So what am I mean by alignment? You should, if you’re using the intuitive quiz or assessment strategy that I shared with you here on the show.

    [00:20:13] Your solutions should provide a direct response to a certain outcome in your quiz. So for example, if somebody is in phase three of our business growth roadmap, I have programs and services exactly curated for them. If they’re in phase two, that’s business launch, just so you know. We have our suite life launch program that is specifically curated to them.

    [00:20:40] And so the offer has to be aligned with an outcome. You don’t have to have an offer for every outcome. You can have an offer only for one. We just happen to actually serve clients in two different phases of our outcome. You don’t have to do that. And here are examples of offers that do well for coaching and consulting businesses on the backside.

    [00:21:00] Of podcast episodes, you can have group coaching, you can have on demand trainings, you can license your content. If you are a course creator, if you are a trainer, you know, I’m a big advocate for showing you guys how to release and license your trainings and courses to other companies and organizations.

    [00:21:17] You can use your podcast to get the word out about that. You can of course have high ticket coaching programs, workshops, courses, retreats, mastermind services. These are examples of programs. That do well to sell on the backside of podcast. And here is why, because with this type of podcast, people want more access to you.

    [00:21:38] They want to be in your world. They want to hang out with you. They want to have your direct response on their life or their business. And so these type of programs that give them actually more access to you do really well, even if it’s an on demand training that you already pre recorded and it’s totally scaled.

    [00:21:55] They just want more of you, and it’s important to understand that not all offers are created equal. To build a profitable offer, you must deliver predictable, measurable, transformational results. Your program or your coaching program can’t suck, all right? It has to be great. We’ve already identified that it needs to align with your quiz.

    [00:22:21] It actually has to be incredible in and of itself. Right? Can’t just, well, maybe you can throw it together, but if you throw it together and make sure it’s predictable, transformational and measurable, however long it is in whatever business model it’s delivered in, it also should align with in some capacity or relate to your quiz or your assessment in some way.

    [00:22:44] And when you do this, you can sell more, you can scale more, you can license your content and you can stand out. And to make irresistible offers that build million dollar service based businesses, coaching and consulting businesses, these things are required. Okay. You can’t just have any offer. And so a profitable podcast hinges on having great offers.

    [00:23:11] When your programs are irresistible. To your listeners, they will buy them. And here’s the deal. When you follow this framework that we have talked about here, you have created literally the most mouthwatering, irresistible offers for your audience because they took your quiz because you already know exactly what they’re struggling with.

    [00:23:32] You already know exactly what they need. You already know exactly how to deliver them results, and they’re already. Pre qualified to work with you. They have the quiz result themselves. They can go back and take that quiz a million times. So when you’re on your show and you’re saying, Hey, listen, guys, I am launching a retreat.

    [00:23:50] We’re going to go to wherever you want to go in a month from now for all of you guys to solve the problems based on this one outcome. In my quiz if you haven’t taken my quiz go take it if you’ve already taken the quiz and you know This is your outcome. This is exactly what you’ve been looking for and i’m telling you what guys when you go Honestly, you did the work.

    [00:24:14] This is not like a scam you have done the work To develop an intuitive quiz based on your genius, your intellectual property, and based on the problems that your company solves in this is actually so ethical. This is like the most ethical way to do sales in my personal opinion, because. You are not making this offer to anybody except for those that already prequalified themselves based on an assessment that they took with their own information.

    [00:24:43] You are only making an offer to help them based on the people that already said, Hey, listen, this is exactly where I am. I need your help. And then you’re coming on the phone or email or however, and you’re saying, Hey, listen, you’re in phase three of my quiz. I have the solution you’ve been waiting for. Do you want it?

    [00:25:03] And this is how we build a profitable business on the backside of your podcast. This is how we’ve generated over a million dollars in direct sales from the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast. Because of the fact that this is the structure, this is super secret sauce. Please don’t go teach this somewhere else.

    [00:25:22] Just share my episode. I’m putting it out here to help you guys. Okay. Don’t take it. Don’t steal this unless you’re using your own business. You have permission to do that. It’s really important that you understand that by doing this, you are doing your listeners the best service that you can, even if you have an interview show.

    [00:25:41] Because they have a deep connection with you and they trust you and they know that you’re looking out for their best interest. And this is how we build a profitable business on the backside of podcasting, even if you’re new. Even if you, you know, only have 10, 000 downloads, it doesn’t matter because it’s so curated.

    [00:26:02] How many of you guys know that you don’t have to have a huge list or hundreds of thousands of downloads? To make money. I mean, look at me as an example, nobody knows me. That’s like, I’m going to go up here on stage at podcast movement and share all this. Nobody has, I’m a nobody, you guys, nobody has a clue who I am, but I have built a very profitable business on the backside of this exact structure I’m giving you.

    [00:26:26] And that’s why it’s so cool. That’s why I still use this structure. Generally, I will say for the first probably three years, I was really religious about it. But now I’ve kind of gotten a little more lax, today’s full about it. But in those first, you know, three years of the show, it was like religiously here, here, here, here, here.

    [00:26:43] And it created lifelong listeners and, and frankly, great friends that I have made that have become our clients from the show. And so I’m so excited to be able to share this with you guys, and I’m super excited to share it here on stage. Obviously, big difference recording here with you and then standing in front of hundreds of people.

    [00:27:01] I’ll share with you guys a video. Hopefully I do okay. Uh, but I, I wanted to unpack this for you and selfishly, I wanted to practice this on you before I go up there on stage. So another thing that I’m going to unpack here, and I want to share with you a little bit, but it’s not going to come across real well here on an audio podcast or even video.

    [00:27:21] But I’m also breaking down the numbers for the audience here at podcast move in. I’m breaking down like the number of downloads, the percentage of people we expect to take action based on the download, how to convert them, all of those things. I’m just, I wouldn’t do you a big service here if I tried to share it with you verbally on the show, but I want to let you know that you’re going to get the slides when you go to our show notes and you are also going to get.

    [00:27:47] More worksheets to implement these numbers. So you’re going to be able to see them all. So go grab them. It’s free It’s my gift to you. Take it. Okay, let’s recap what we talked about here on Episode number 303 we talked about in order to build a predictable business on the backside of podcasting without running ads or paying for ads You know having advertisers pay you on the show even if you have a small list and a small audience that you can build a profitable business to And I gave you this structure, which is ours.

    [00:28:20] The first one is having a predictable show structure so that people know how to interact with you and what they can expect from your show. Please make sure that you are the centerpiece and people know why they need you, even if you have an interview based show. Number two is having an intuitive lead magnet.

    [00:28:40] We recommend a quiz. I’m giving you a whole training on how to build an intuitive lead magnet for your show or your business or whatever you want to use it for. So go get the training on the quiz. And then number three is making sure your offers are irresistible. You guys know what we do at the SweetLife Company is we help you build offers that are so good, people feel stupid not buying your services.

    [00:29:04] And so, if you’re struggling and you don’t have a million dollar offer ecosystem, come work with us at the SweetLife Company. Go to SweetLifeCo. com and let’s book a call. Or, if you have great courses and offers and programs and you want to learn how to license those, We also help you. Here’s a little insight.

    [00:29:24] If you’re in phase three or phase four of our quiz, those are the solutions we provide to you guys. And I’m really excited to do that. And so that’s what we talked about today on the show. That’s what I’m going to be teaching here at Podcast Movement. You can find all of the show notes by going to SweetLifeCo. com click on the podcast button, and this is episode number. 303. There’s all these people behind me.

    [00:29:50] It’s so cool. I’m so happy to be here. It’s actually my first time at podcast movement. I really hope you guys can hear me. Riverside guys loaned me this mic shout out to Riverside. They really are awesome.

    [00:30:03] We’ve just had such great results. It’s recording our podcast here with them, both audio and video. And if you haven’t yet, please share this show with your friends. I would really appreciate it. Share it on social media, share it on LinkedIn and tag me at any point in time, April beach life or use the hashtag sweet life podcast.

    [00:30:23] Thank you guys so much. Super glad that you’re here and, and that I could practice on you. All right. I’ll see you guys soon.



    How To Build A Successful Coaching Program in 3 Simple Steps with April Beach (Episode 302)

    How To Build A Successful Coaching Program in 3 Simple Steps



    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-3 of my Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™”) 
    You’re great at what you do but delivering results may be taking longer than it should. You might find yourself spending extra (unpaid) time with clients to assure they’re receiving results, or feeling like you need to give more to create happy clients. If so, this episode is for you! 
    In this mini-masterclass episode, April Beach breaks down the structure of a highly profitable coaching program that guarantees your clients results in less time so you don’t feel the need to over-serve, or stay up at night worrying about how well your clients are doing. You’ll be able to rest assured knowing that your consulting program or training will deliver predictable results, your clients will be extra happy for efficiency in success and you’ll be able to take on more clients, scale for higher profit and live life without worrying about your clients in your subconscious. 
    There are 3 parts to a profitable, scalable coaching program. April Beach breaks down her unique recipe for building programs that have helped entrepreneurs become leaders in their niche. Whether you’re a sales, life, marketing, mindset, business or even sex coach… the components shared in this episode are vital to grow a profitable business and stand out in your market. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Learn April Beach’s Recipe for a Profitable Coaching Program
    2. Understand where you’re lacking with simple steps to make improvements
    3. Receive in-depth resources to level up your programs completely free
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:43] Hi guys. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 302 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneur in Business podcast and I’m super excited to dive into what we’re talking about today. Let’s give a very brief recap of what we talked about last week. Last week, if you joined [00:01:00] us, we broke down the five components of actually making an irresistible offer. And we talked about the difference between what is an offer and what is a product.

    [00:01:09] And we separated those two, especially for those of you guys who are in the service based industry. So you’re a subject matter expert, you’re a coach, you’re a consultant, you help other people get results based on your own genius. And so if you’re wondering how to actually craft an irresistible offer, pause go back to last week’s episode number 301 where we actually broke down those components.

    [00:01:34] So here today on this show, we’re talking about how to build a successful program. An offer is not the same thing as a program. Although I understand that those two terms are used interchange interchangeably. quite often here in our consulting industry. So we are talking about the actual product itself on this show.

    [00:01:54] So let’s make sure you are in the right place. First of all, if you are in phases [00:02:00] two, three or four of my lifestyle entrepreneur roadmap, this show is appropriate for you. That means you’re either launching your programs, you are scaling your programs, or you’re looking to increase the profitability of your programs.

    [00:02:13] If you aren’t sure where you are in our Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap, pause this episode for a second and cruise over to SweetLifeCo.Com/quiz. And you’ll find out in a heartbeat exactly what phase of business growth you’re in so that we know that the episode and the content we’re talking about is appropriate and you’re actually going to be able to apply it.

    [00:02:34] I never want our show to be a shiny object for anybody. I want you to be able to take the trainings that we give here on the show and actually implement them right away. We’re actually known for delivering business coaching and trainings other coaches will charge you thousands for. And so that’s what we’re doing here on today’s show.

    [00:02:50] Now, let’s really dig into the nitty gritty of who this episode is for. If you find yourself providing [00:03:00] extra time to clients, what do I mean by that? You are helping them. extra over and above what they paid you over and above maybe the time frame within your coaching or your program, even your course that you said that you would help them if you are wondering whether or not they’re getting results.

    [00:03:16] So you’re hanging out with your family and you are worried whether or not your clients are happy, whether or not they’re actually achieving measurable results within it’s a client of your business, then this episode is for you. So we are going to break down the structure of a highly profitable coaching program that guarantees your clients results.

    [00:03:36] And I’m going to give you my recipe that I’ve been teaching businesses for well over a decade and how you can actually put this into your business as well. At the end of this episode, this is what you can expect. You can expect to know. The recipe, my recipe for three parts to a profitable coaching, consulting, or service based program.

    [00:03:56] You’re going to be able to understand immediately, Hey, you know, this is [00:04:00] what I’m struggling with this one area. This one of the three is where I need to focus first. And I’m giving you a massive tool to actually implement some of what we’re talking about here on the show totally free. The tool that we are giving you with this show are the six components to a highly profitable, scalable coaching program.

    [00:04:21] And so the notes… It’s in the show notes. We’re going to drop the link to that. You can find everything that I told you here in the show notes by visiting SweetLifeCo. com. Click on the podcast and this is episode number 302. So if you feel like you’re in the right place, let’s go ahead and dive on in.

    [00:04:39] Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into the actual meat and potatoes of this podcast, mini masterclass training. So you want to be able to close your eyes and know that frankly, you’re really good at what you do. Everybody. We all just want to feel like we created change in somebody else’s business or their life or their profit margin, you know, as an [00:05:00] entrepreneur, as a coach, as a consultant.

    [00:05:02] We’re teachers, we’re trainers, we’re leaders, and we’re guides. And so, first of all, it’s totally normal to think about, Hey, are my clients happy? I want you thinking about, Hey, are my clients happy? We’re thinking all the time, Are our clients happy? Are they getting results? Are they getting what they paid for?

    [00:05:17] That’s a normal thing, but there’s a difference between being worried about that because you’re not sure if your programs are engineered correctly and actually just thinking about that from a customer service standpoint. And so to build a profitable, scalable coaching business, you have to have a very good product in what you do, what you teach, what you your service you provide.

    [00:05:39] That is your product. We’re not selling, you know, bottles like water bottles here, right? We are selling our knowledge together, get other people results and we’re giving them tools and strategies to do that. So there are three parts to actually create a profitable coaching program. And I want you to know one thing, and this is not to be like, Oh, a total [00:06:00] downer.

    [00:06:00] According to actioncoach. com. 80% of coaches fail in the first two years, and there’s a lot of reasons why that action coach, of course, wants to sell people to hire their coaches because they say that, you know, they, they perform better than that. Hopefully they do. That’s great on them. But this statistic still shows that there are a lot of consulting businesses that do not thrive, that aren’t successful.

    [00:06:23] But this episode isn’t necessarily. For those of you guys that are getting started because some of the concepts I’m going to talk about here are advanced. I’m going to be honest with you, but if you have been doing what you’ve been doing for a while and you’re still not really sure that you’re getting people great results and you’re not making as much money as you want to, then it’s really important that you tune into what I’m saying here on this episode.

    [00:06:43] So we aren’t going to let you be that 80%. That’s primarily our whole entire mission here, this week, life company, and on the podcast, all right? But it’s normal to struggle at in the beginning or as you’re learning to scale. So to start out with, there are [00:07:00] three words I want you to ask yourself about your coaching program. Your consulting program.

    [00:07:05] We’re gonna use the words interchangeably. I don’t care if you’re a consultant, a strategist, a leader, a trainer, a teacher, a coach, any of those things. I’m talking to all of you guys. And by the way, I don’t care if you’re a marketing coach, sales coach, sex coach, life coach, parent coach, whatever kind of coach you are, it doesn’t matter.

    [00:07:21] What I’m talking to you about applies to every single one of you. So, three words, and I say, I say these three words, I want you to think about your program, your offer. Just pick one in your head right now to workshop with me as we’re going through this. So, the first word is predictable. Are the results that your program delivers absolutely 100% predictable?

    [00:07:45] So predictable that can you say before anybody works with you that at the end of this. This is what you’re going to know, understand, be able to do. Like, are you able to put a laundry list of [00:08:00] what is predictable within your program? What can somebody bank on? Is your program predictable? And even though, I get it, every single client’s different, every single one of our clients is different too, right?

    [00:08:12] But we still need to deliver predictable results. It’s our job as leaders, consultants, teachers, trainers to do that. That’s why people pay us a big bucks, right? So number one, how predictable is your current program? Let’s just go with your signature offer or core program right now. That’s number one. So just do a check in with me.

    [00:08:35] Number two, how transformational is it? Okay. So every single program we deliver, I don’t care if it’s a one hour call or a one hour workshop or shoot, it can be a 10 minute workshop. We need to take people from one place into another place. So from not knowing to knowing or not understanding to understanding or not being able to do something to being able to do something or not having peace to be able to rest assured in [00:09:00] something or whatever.

    [00:09:00] You know, anything. We go from one place to the next place. It doesn’t have to be from A to Z. Those are huge programs, guys. And frankly, sometimes that’s way too much for people to learn in one program. It can be from A to C or A to M. It doesn’t matter. But, is your program transformational? Meaning, are you taking somebody from one place to another.

    [00:09:22] Are they different? Is their business different? Is their life different? Is their marriage different? Is their marketing different? Is their communication style different? Is their confidence or their mindset different in your program at the end? And frankly, is it different along the way, which is what I call benchmarks.

    [00:09:40] Then they were in the beginning. So the first one is predictable. Can you predict the end result? And can your clients bank on them? Number two, is it transformational? And then the third one, is it measurable? And by the way, these aren’t even the three parts. of building a program that I’m going to give you here in a [00:10:00] minute.

    [00:10:00] So hang in with me. This is just kind of our check in to have a temperature gauge together here as to how your current programs are doing. And then I’m going to give you the three parts to structure out the program. Is it predictable, transformational, or measurable? Can you actually measure a change in results?

    [00:10:19] And by the way, measurement isn’t always ROI. Is a matter of fact, I would say probably only 20% of our clients with their programs. We actually measure the change in making more money or ROI. Your program could create more time. It could reduce stress. It could create better systems. But are we measuring the way?

    [00:10:39] You know, save time, right? There’s a whole bunch of different measurement metrics. And I should probably do a whole nother podcast for you guys about this. This is what we work on with our clients in our, in our, in our business coaching programs are all those metrics. But can you measure, can people measure the results that they are receiving?

    [00:10:58] Within your working with you. So [00:11:00] predictable, transformational, measurable. So let’s just take a break here and identify where you may be coming up short. And frankly, I would love to know what you are rocking at. You can send me a message on Instagram. Send me a message on LinkedIn. I’m really trying to hang out on LinkedIn more.

    [00:11:15] You guys, here’s a sneak peek next month. Our podcast series is all on LinkedIn growth, and I’m going to be learning right along with you guys. Um, send me a message on LinkedIn. That will test me to make sure I’m on my LinkedIn game and let me know what you’re doing really, really well. All right. So we’ve taken that temperature measurement, and if you are good at what you do, you’re always going to have business.

    [00:11:39] You could have a profitable business on only five clients. You could have a profitable business on 5, 000 clients. I’m not talking the volume. I’m talking the quality of your programs and quality equals the volume in profit. All right. So now let’s dive into how do we actually structure the program itself.

    [00:11:59] So [00:12:00] there are three parts to a profitable, scalable consulting or coaching program. Part number one, and these are important. I’ll share with you why these are important. Let me share that first. They’re important because we don’t want your program like everybody else. I do not, I mean you could be here, you can listen, I love that you’re here, but if you are a coach and you are just trying to duplicate the way other coaches are doing things, I can’t help you.

    [00:12:25] You know, I believe that profitable businesses are built on your intellectual property, your unique process. And yes, do you take frameworks and services? Shoot, you’re taking my framework here. I’m giving it to you. But we want to make it uniquely yours. When we make programs uniquely yours that are predictable, transformational, measurable, that’s when we make you profitable.

    [00:12:43] And guess what? Nobody can compete with you. You are like in your own blue ocean because they are built the way I’m going to share with you. So number one, your program should be built on your unique method, process, [00:13:00] roadmap, framework, or system. You need to have a system That gets people results.

    [00:13:08] Have you guys ever read the E Myth or the E Myth Revisited? So they’re Michael Gerber’s books. It was one of the first business books I’ve ever read. It’s a really short read. And these are great books, okay? I’ll put it in the show notes for you. In the E Myth, Michael Gerber unpacks profitable business systems, that they do the same thing every way. They go through, there’s a predictable process of doing the same thing again, like Subway Sandwiches and he also unpacks like the back end, customer service of the Ritz Carlton.

    [00:13:38] It’s fascinating. The point I’m making here is that I’m just not pulling this out, out of anywhere. Like, how we build incredible business programs and incredible programs, whatever you’re doing is you need to have your own unique method, process, system or framework to get your clients results, and you should be able to take different clients with different stories in different situations through the [00:14:00] same process every time.

    [00:14:00] So step number one is building your unique method or framework. I have a ton of episodes on this. We work with our clients to build their unique method and framework cruise over to episode number 295 where I broke down the steps to build a method and framework.

    [00:14:15] That’s a great place for you to start. And I’ll, I’ll put those on the show notes for you as well. But does your program, is your program built upon your unique proprietary process of getting people results? It doesn’t even have to be complex, can be totally simple, but is your program built on that? It needs to be built on that because that’s how we grow it.

    [00:14:36] That’s how we scale it. That’s how we license your program to other companies and bring in millions and millions of dollars. It needs to be yours. It needs to be uniquely yours. So number one is it needs to be built upon a method or a process. Framework system, even key principles could be topics that are unique to you.

    [00:14:54] And when you do this, you are going to be able to track your client’s progress through your programs [00:15:00] because you’re going to know exactly where they are in your process. And that is really helpful to know if a client or a customer is falling behind or if they’re struggling in a certain area. It’s not only good for your clients and they have so much more trust in you because they’re like, wow.

    [00:15:13] You have a process to get me results, like go figure, uh, but it helps you as a leader to not lose track of people that might be struggling. So even if you have a huge course and there’s hundreds of people in your course, if you have a proven process, you can see where people are struggling. You can either edit or modify your course or program.

    [00:15:33] You can add more help. You can add more office hours. You can call people up on the phone and say, Hey, April, I really see that you’re stuck on. You know, module number three, what’s the deal? So it’s really, really, really important that you have a method framework or process. Okay. Talked about that enough.

    [00:15:47] Number two, the content in the curriculum within your program. You might feel the pressure to be a curriculum engineer, and that is really important. There are incredible curriculum engineers that can [00:16:00] actually pull your expertise out of your brain and put them into programs. By the way, that is part of what we do with our clients.

    [00:16:05] We pull their expertise out of their brain, build them into transformational programs. The thing is, is that your curriculum itself needs to be your unique content. The curriculum doesn’t have to be long. Like I said, we can build transformational programs that are only one hour coaching sessions, but it should be yours.

    [00:16:25] It should be unique to you. And as you’re curating your curriculum, don’t throw everything in there. If you’ve been listening to this podcast for five years, you know that I talk about the history of the online courses industry and how we used to build courses back in 2011 that were huge and they would last six months to a year.

    [00:16:44] Our attention span is not the way it was. Like the old gray mare, she ain’t what she used to be. I mean, at least me. I’m 47. I can’t remember anything, you guys. And what happens is it’s too much information for people to implement. So your content should be highly [00:17:00] valuable, but delivered in the shortest amount of time possible.

    [00:17:03] And it’s really important that you curate your curriculum. Curriculum pertains to even like one hour consulting sessions, they pertain to the format of your luxury retreat. Your curriculum is a format even within masterminds. Your curriculum is a format within your training or your certification program.

    [00:17:22] You know, what your webinar, whatever it is, your curriculum needs to be curated correctly without becoming overwhelming. So that’s part number two and then part number three is the actual model of your program. This is how we actually scale you guys. So there are a bunch of different models and models how you deliver your program to your clients that you can choose from.

    [00:17:41] And I’m a big advocate. That the first step in choosing your model has to do with the alignment of your life. Most of you guys know I travel six months a year. I just returned from eight weeks of travel and a big event off grid. And I do that. I can do that. I’ve been able to do this for over 10 years [00:18:00] because of the way that I model and I package how I work with our clients, when I work with them, how I work with them.

    [00:18:06] So I can still guarantee they’re getting results through my method and my curriculum, but it doesn’t mean that I always have to be there doing it. So your model is really important and your model should be two things. Number one, it needs to work with you and the life you’re building, the life you’re creating or your current life that you have for sure.

    [00:18:24] That’s the first thing. There are a lot of business models out there that are really good. We can make you a ton of money with them. But if they don’t align with your time and the life that you want to have, Why are you an entrepreneur? That makes no sense to me at all. I’m going to go on like a little sidebar here.

    [00:18:41] So many consulting businesses copy somebody else’s business model. They’re like, Oh, she did this. So that sounds good. I guess that’s the way to do it. I don’t want you to do that. As a matter of fact, in the tools here, I’m also going to give you the ultimate guide to download so that you can see all of the different online business models that you can choose from.

    [00:18:58] And I’m going to [00:19:00] break down each business model and let you know how that business model is going to affect your life. You know why? Because I’ve done all these business models, and I can personally tell you what my life looked like when I did it. So I’ll give you the resource to download our ultimate guide to business models and offers.

    [00:19:15] But I want you to think about the model. Now when we’re thinking about the model, number two, in addition to your life is how do your clients need to receive the information you are giving in order to actually achieve these world class results that you promise? How often do they need to see you or your team?

    [00:19:33] How frequently do they need to receive the information? In what format does the information come? Is it an on demand video? Are some office hours? Do we deliver some quizzes or some downloads and worksheets? What is the curation of the curriculum look like for you? For your particular people? How do they need to receive the content and receive the information?

    [00:19:59] To [00:20:00] actually get those predictable, transformational, measurable results that we need them to have in order to build your business profitably. And so to recap, there are three parts to a profitable, scalable coaching program. Number one is it’s built upon, like think of bricks, it’s built upon your method or your framework.

    [00:20:21] If you do not have that, and it’s your method and your framework, by the way, isn’t necessarily like the outline in the modules of your course. Okay. There’s, there’s more to it than that. But number one is it needs to be built on your method or framework that’s unique to you. Number two, then the content that’s layered on top of it is curriculum that’s engineered.

    [00:20:40] It’s the right amount. It’s how people need to hear the information in order to learn and implement it. And it doesn’t have to be overwhelming. We have resources for you to teach you how to engineer your curriculum. As a matter of fact, our. Offer engineer masterclass is where we work with clients and we give you a framework to engineer your [00:21:00] curriculum like in one day.

    [00:21:01] And then number three is how is the model delivered? Is this model in a way that you can serve more clients than one at a time? Is it in a way that you’re going to be able to travel all summer long like I do in the whole month of December? Is it in the way that your clients also need to receive it? So we have model, we have content or curriculum within your program.

    [00:21:21] And then, excuse me. Scratch that. We have method, content, and curriculum in your program, and then model. Don’t pick the model first. That is a huge mistake that everybody makes. Don’t do that. Okay, I’m going to be really, I’m going to put on my mom hat here. Don’t say I’m going to launch a course or I’m going to launch a mastermind.

    [00:21:41] You can start with that thinking because it’s normal to do that, but then take a look at your method and the content and ask yourself, what is the best way that my clients need to receive this to actually get the results that I’ve guaranteed them that they’re going to get from working with me and then go back and say, is it [00:22:00] really a mastermind?

    [00:22:01] Is it really a course? Is it really, you know, a weekend retreat in challenge yourself, question yourself to make sure that the model aligns with the actual content that you are delivering in your program. And when you do this, when you do this, I guarantee guarantee you that no other competitors will be able to compete with your program, that you will stand in an ocean all by yourself, that your process will be unique to you.

    [00:22:26] Nobody else will be able to compete with the way you do things because they’re actually truly pulled out of your incredible, beautiful, most likely ADHD mind. If you’re like me, I’ve Crazy ADHD, by the way, so many entrepreneurs have ADHD because we’re always creating things at once and yet they’re delivered in a way that people love you for it and if they love you in one program, they’re going to come back and they’re going to love you in two and they’re going to love you in three and they’re going to travel along the ecosystem of offers that you have perfectly You Curated for them to receive.

    [00:22:59] [00:23:00] So let’s recap. We talked about how to build a transformational program, and I have a couple of resources here. Go to SweetLifeCo. com, click on the podcast button. This is episode number 302. I’m going to give you the six components of a schedule, scalable coaching program, and I’m also going to give you a link to download that entire ultimate guide to online offers where you can see which ones might work with you, which ones you love, which ones, you know, don’t really fit because I would love to save you up to 10 years time building the wrong kind of business model.

    [00:23:31] All right, you guys. Okay. If you need help with your offers, you know where to find us. SweetLifeCo. com. We will be hosting. Our leading class on how to curate profitable, scalable programs and offers called Offer Engineer. That’s coming up this fall and you can always send us a message if you have any questions about our programs or services.

    [00:23:51] We would love to hear from you, meet with you, give you some feedback on where you are. That’s what my team and I do and we love connecting with you guys. Thank you so much for [00:24:00] listening to this show. If I can ask if you would just share this episode, it would be really helpful to us. Share it on LinkedIn.

    [00:24:06] Those of you guys that are on LinkedIn, tag me on LinkedIn. Help a girl out on LinkedIn. Man, I have to get on like my LinkedIn routine and, and tag me. We would really, really appreciate it. And I can’t wait to talk to you guys next week. We have some special episodes coming up. And again, that entire LinkedIn business growth and lead gen series is going to be coming for you as well. All right. See you guys soon. Bye for now.


    5 Keys To Sell Out Your Next Offer with April Beach and Jessica Erwin(Episode 300)

    5 Keys To Sell Out Your Next Offer

    Who is this episode for? 
    Established entrepreneurs (in Phases 2-4 of my Start To Scale Up Business System”)  
    Are you amazing at what you do but struggling to sell it? In this episode, we’re excited to introduce you to Jessica Erwin, our COO. Our clients and partners know and love Jessica, but it’s high time that all of our podcast listeners get to know her as well.
    In addition to her expertise in systems and operations, Jessica works with our clients to understand the psychology of packaging and selling their offers in an irresistible way. In this episode, we’re unpacking the 5 keys you must determine to sell out your next offer. 
    If you’re an expert at what you do but you’re struggling to sell it, we’re here to help. Sometimes your expertise in your specific skill doesn’t translate to an expertise in sales and that’s okay. You might not be the best marketer, and you might not be a sales ninja, but if your programs create results, then people need to know you.  This episode creates a bridge between having a great product and selling it. 
    There are 5 Keys to a Sold Out Offer: 
    These are 5 keys to make an offer that makes people feel crazy to not buy it. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Know the 5 keys to a soldout offer
    2. Understand the difference between a promise and a guarantee
    3. Feel more confident in your ability to price and less pressure for high or low ticket
    4. Understand the value of honest scarcity
    Download the Free Guide: The 6 Essential Components of a Scaleable Coaching Program
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April Beach: Hi you guys. I’m smiling. My face hurts because I finally have. Jessica Erwin here on the podcast and those of you guys that are part of our SweetLife company and family and our [00:01:00] clients, you guys know Jessica because she is our COO and everything that happens in any sort of organized fashion at all, any systems whatsoever are done by Jessica.

    [00:01:13] April Beach: So you can thank Jessica for that, including. Jessica, working with our podcast team to even produce this show for you. So it’s been probably too long that we have dragged our feet or waited or made it, found a good time to get her on the show. But I’m really excited to introduce you guys to Jessica. And today we’re talking about.

    [00:01:33] April Beach: Five different keys to sell out your offer. But before we dive into that, I want you guys to get to know Jessica a little bit and Jessica, why don’t you share, you know, what you do and how long you’ve been with us at the SweetLife Company and really your area of expertise because you’re absolutely incredible.

    [00:01:50] Jessica Erwin: Oh, you’re too kind. Let’s see. I’ve been officially on the books for like a year and a half. So right about there. But I started as a [00:02:00] client and before I was a client, I was a binger of all things, Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast and in clubhouse and in all the things that I could get my hands on for April Beach and I knew that I wanted to be in your circle.

    [00:02:17] Jessica Erwin: And so I worked my way into that and I think, I think it was after being a client maybe for a month and a half that we had a conversation and it was like, Hey, Hey Jessica, how about, how about if we just pivot you just a little bit and you come to work behind the scenes here and it works out really great I’m an entrepreneur at heart for sure always have been I’ve had a lot of different things that I’ve done from restaurants and catering to women’s clothing stores to just my own coaching practice a lot of different things, but when you can align with somebody that you have a lot of similar goals, a lot of good overlap of the way that you see things.

    [00:02:57] Jessica Erwin: I still get to do client work, [00:03:00] but I love the behind the scenes work and building things and tinkering. So it’s fun. It works. It works really good. And I’m here and I’m super excited. I’m one of my favorite podcasts. Yay. Yay.

    [00:03:11] April Beach: And you’re really good at it. So at, you know, as CEOs, we all pray for somebody who can come in and put our systems in place and make sure our systems are running like clockwork.

    [00:03:21] April Beach: And that’s what you do for our company. And one of your areas of specialty is actually also sales and working with our clients in helping them to position their offers. They’re all sold out. So you do a lot of work, one on one with clients and one on group within our accelerator and our business growth ecosystem.

    [00:03:44] April Beach: And I know our clients just, just love you. So that’s what we’re going to dive into today. And, you know, the reason why this is so important, you guys, we’ve been talking about offers. We’ve done shows recently on the difference between a, an actual product and an offer. And there are parts of an [00:04:00] offer that is very marketing, it’s very messaging, it’s very communication, and I think people get confused on, hey, are we actually talking about the course or the program or the actual product I’m delivering, versus what, what am I doing when it comes to actually making the offer to help somebody.

    [00:04:17] April Beach: And so today, I’m really excited, we’re going to do this a little bit interview style. To unpack what we teach our clients on the five keys to build a sell, a sold out offer and going into your genius brain in helping our listeners understand how they can apply this immediately to their business. So that’s what I’m excited to talk about.

    [00:04:41] Jessica Erwin: Awesome. You know, I was just talking to somebody just a couple of days ago. We work with some amazing, brilliant people who are by far and away, like leaders within whatever it is that they teach and what they know, but you’ve got, you know, you’ve got two sides, you’ve got your [00:05:00] expertise and what you know, and what you’re going to teach somebody, and then the ability to sell and market that those are two different things.

    [00:05:07] Jessica Erwin: And I think it can be. Disheartening to some because that, that market even sales traits, uh, those, those traits don’t necessarily come as natural and like, that’s okay because we can teach those things and we can build things around it. Um, knowing some of these things aren’t, aren’t exactly, um, intuitive to everybody.

    [00:05:26] Jessica Erwin: So I love that we can just teach them these small, these small tricks, techniques to really spiff things up and make them, make them sell, get them into people’s

    [00:05:36] April Beach: hands. Yeah. That’s so true. And how many of you guys are listening that feel that you feel like you’re really good at what you do, but you’re the best kept secret. You might not be the best marketer, you might not be out there doing videos all the time. You might not have, you know, thousands and thousands of social media followers and that’s okay. As a matter of fact, most people that are real true experts in their craft do not spend a lot of time hanging out on social [00:06:00] media, commenting on other people’s stuff.

    [00:06:02] April Beach: They’re too busy helping their clients get results. And so that’s why, yeah, just what we’re talking about today. And what we teach and just unpacking these five different assets of how you can upgrade your offer to really sell it out is, is so powerful. And I love the work that you do with our clients in this.

    [00:06:19] April Beach: And I know there’s so many of our clients that are going to be listening to this episode to be like, Oh yeah, we know this already. All right. So let’s go ahead and dive in. So there are five different, what we call keys to a sold out offer. And these keys are really important. And before we dive into these, you guys, let me just remind you, we’re not talking about the actual product itself.

    [00:06:41] April Beach: So we’re not, we’re, I’m going to talk about that actually in next week’s episode. So we’re not talking about the program or the training or the outline or the curriculum or the IP or the content. We’re talking about five different keys to make an offer that makes people literally feel crazy if they don’t want to buy it.

    [00:06:57] April Beach: Because why would they not want to buy this? [00:07:00] And so what is the first one, Jessica, that you want to unpack for us today? The first of the five keys to a sold out offer?

    [00:07:08] Jessica Erwin: You know, I would start with pricing. I think that pricing’s a good place to start. It’s, it’s one of our first objections. Maybe when we go in to buy something new, so hitting that right, nailing that is incredibly important.

    [00:07:22] April Beach: Perfect. And when we’re talking about pricing, what do you usually say to our clients? I know when you’re working with them to help them be confident about their pricing structure. There’s so much psychology behind pricing and, uh, you know, high ticket. High results, high reward for sure. But there are also different industries that they thrive on low ticket, many offers and low ticket pricing.

    [00:07:50] April Beach: So what are some of the tips that you give regarding pricing? When, when businesses are looking to actually price our offer?

    [00:07:58] Jessica Erwin: I think that’s something that is [00:08:00] often overlooked is really good market research. We need to know what our competitors are doing and what’s going on in this space. Not so that we’re more expensive, not so that we’re less expensive, not.

    [00:08:10] Jessica Erwin: You know, not for anything other than really knowing what people are doing, that’ll help us know a bit of what is selling. And I mean, we can do that in a lot of different ways, but, but really figuring out what other people are charging. I think within pricing also, sometimes people come up with an arbitrary number.

    [00:08:32] Jessica Erwin: Or maybe they’ve heard, you are worth so much, don’t undersell, like we’ve heard that. It’s really easy to say on Instagram that you should never coach for less than, I don’t know, some ridiculous 50, 000. Right? Yes. Girl, you are worth that. However, selling that is, you know, selling that and, and charge that are two different things.

    [00:08:57] Jessica Erwin: So, it’s important to [00:09:00] know what people are pricing things at, what they’re getting, and does your offer stack up against theirs? So just learning some of those things are important. When I, when I think about pricing, I also think about, the ease of purchase for. Potential clients coming in, if, if the price of what you’re selling is going to be an objection for them, how can we help them with that?

    [00:09:26] Jessica Erwin: Um, of course there’s payment plans. We can look at that. What sits well with you, you know, payment plans are anything from over the course of the training that you’re, that you’re giving. I’ve seen them weekly. Like that came up on my screen like recently and I was reading about it and I don’t know if my accounting brain can can get on board with that.

    [00:09:49] Jessica Erwin: But if that helps somebody make something more palatable to buy, you know, I’m not here to judge what’s in somebody’s bank account. But I do [00:10:00] need to collect on, on the offer that I’m selling. So I want to make it as easy for somebody to buy as possible.

    [00:10:06] April Beach: Those are such good tips. And the market research is so smart.

    [00:10:11] April Beach: You are exactly right. There are so many people out there saying, well, just charge this and just charges. And there’s zero research behind that. And we are in business for a reason so much that there’s, you know, rumors about. Crackdown on the coaching industry because there are coaches that are charging overpriced amounts and not delivering ROI.

    [00:10:29] April Beach: So it’s our responsibility as businesses to be charging based on the ROI and, and the market value of what we deliver. Again, we have very high ticket programs within our, within our ecosystem of offers. We also have low ticket programs. And so we’re advocates of all, as long as they align with you and your business.

    [00:10:51] April Beach: And then the other thing I would say to just add on to that is that there are, you know, when we, and by the way, you guys, Jessica is the one that made me realize this. We’ve [00:11:00] always done payment plans for years, right? We’ve been in business for decades. And Jessica goes, you know, when we do a payment plan, we’re actually the bank.

    [00:11:07] April Beach: We actually become the bank. We are actually financing this. And even though. I actually hadn’t thought about it like that until Jessica said that I was like, wait a minute. I am the bank. We are financing this for our clients. And when they default a contract, just like if somebody bought a car, we’re going to give them the whole car up front.

    [00:11:27] April Beach: But if you’re the one building the payment plan for it, and you are the bank, let’s make sure that you know, you have structures in place to actually collect on that as well. So if you don’t want to be the bank, There are other organizations out there that fund programs, your program can actually get qualified and that is a bank that funds coaching programs and so there are other resources for you to do that if you guys don’t feel like being the bank.

    [00:11:53] April Beach: So, um, just, I just remember that was just a really a big mind shift for me because I was like, Oh yeah, [00:12:00] I am.

    [00:12:02] Jessica Erwin: Yeah. Right. And do you want to be the bank? I mean, do you want to take that risk? So there’s a risk associated with it. And we just, as, as always have to look at their risk versus the reward and, and what we’re willing to pay, what we’re willing to do.

    [00:12:17] April Beach: Right. Especially in programs where we give like everything up front.

    [00:12:21] Jessica Erwin: Yeah. Yeah, definitely. Definitely

    [00:12:23] April Beach: in those programs. Okay. Awesome. Okay. So number one. First step to a sold out offer is making sure your pricing is right, making sure it aligns with the market, making sure it’s researched, making sure it aligns with your value and the clients you want to attract.

    [00:12:37] April Beach: Um, certainly. Okay. What is the second one that you want to dive

    [00:12:41] Jessica Erwin: into today? Second one, uh, scarcity slash urgency. Awesome. So why does somebody need to buy this right now? Why is it important for me to run into the other room and grab my wallet and put in my credit card information? Um, or can I just like hang out and wait and it’ll be there [00:13:00] next year, you know, whatever that might be.

    [00:13:02] Jessica Erwin: And sometimes we do need to wait. And we, we jump into things a little quickly, but as somebody trying to market and sell your product, you want somebody to have a reason to buy it right now. So we can build in things within your offer. Hopefully. And it should be in a really above board ethical way. We don’t, I’ve seen way too many, um, ads and things that come across my screen that I’m like, you are so lying because this is still going to be available tomorrow.

    [00:13:32] Jessica Erwin: Right? Like you, you are lying right now and I know it and I’m just, I can’t even look any further. So we want to be sure that like, we’re actually saying if there’s a deadline on something that we mean it. I only have five personal coaching spots available this month. What, what if six people came to you?

    [00:13:51] Jessica Erwin: Would, would you say yes to that sixth person? Then, then maybe you shouldn’t say you only have five. We need to make sure that we are, are being honest [00:14:00] in our dealings. And there are lots of ways to do that. I was working with a client just yesterday on it, on a special thing that she has going on this summer.

    [00:14:08] Jessica Erwin: And we are talking about the bonuses that we could offer. Um, which goes into our next one, which is bonuses, but the scarcity of the bonuses that they’re going to go away depending on when you buy and when you sign up. So there are things that we can do that are absolutely ethical and that really makes somebody say, Oh yes.

    [00:14:29] Jessica Erwin: Okay. I’m off the fence. I’m going, I’m going to have the difficult conversation. I’m going to do it. Um, yeah. And make them jump. That’s

    [00:14:35] April Beach: awesome. Okay. Love scarcity. And thank you for making those points. Absolutely. That’s awesome. All right. So you said the next one is bonuses. Yeah. Let’s, let’s talk about bonuses.

    [00:14:45] Jessica Erwin: Favorite. It’s my favorite. I talked to everyone about this. We talk

    [00:14:49] April Beach: about this all the time. All the time. Because every week Jessica is in talking to our clients about bonuses and like the most I do. Juiciest bonuses. And she has the best bonus ideas, by the way, [00:15:00] because you have a strategy for bonuses.

    [00:15:02] Jessica Erwin: I do.

    [00:15:03] Jessica Erwin: I do. Bonuses should be, should be developed and should be offered as a way to help. Overcome objections. So if there’s a reason why somebody might not buy your course or something that’s holding them back, or they’re scared about something, or they’re unsure about how they’re going to X, Y, or Z. We can create bonuses, um, to really pad the offer and help somebody see that was an objection.

    [00:15:31] Jessica Erwin: No, oh, if I’m going to have enough time to complete this. This particular course. Oh, well, I have a time management bonus in there and it’s gonna it’s gonna answer that problem for you Whatever that might be surrounding and it doesn’t have to go Line by line actually with your exact offer. It can be all around it.

    [00:15:51] Jessica Erwin: I’ve seen some dang juicy Bonuses thrown into something that really I wouldn’t necessarily call them a [00:16:00] stretch they’re still in the same like sphere, but but like I’ve seen Facebook ads training put into an offer building course. So not necessarily the same thing, right? But somebody who wants to buy a course on building an offer is going to need to sell that eventually.

    [00:16:17] Jessica Erwin: And that’s a fear or, you know, a weakness maybe that they have that we can throw bonuses in. And I mean, you can pull bonuses from your massive hard drive of things that you’ve already created. You can work with partners on this, you know, uh, both April and I have come into lots of different programs and done different trainings and helped people.

    [00:16:39] Jessica Erwin: Um, and you can do, you can do that same thing with, uh, business associates that you have or experts that you find online that you really want to work with and, and ask if they’ll put a bonus into your course. I mean, it’s a win win. So I love. Bonuses and I think they’re overlooked and too much just thrown together.

    [00:16:55] Jessica Erwin: We need to be a little bit more strategic about it

    [00:16:57] April Beach: Yeah, yeah, I want you guys [00:17:00] to Think about what jessica said regarding bonuses. Is it write this down bonuses should be a direct response to objections that people will have about your offer. So if you want to sit down and make a list of, you know, what are the top five things that I hear somebody say?

    [00:17:21] April Beach: Well, I don’t have enough time or I can’t afford it. Or, um, you know, this is going to be too hard of work. This work is going to require too much effort. You know, what can you do to fix that problem for them already and those can become your bonuses to your program? And it’s just absolutely gold. We just did this in our, uh, in our offer engineering training that we just did.

    [00:17:46] April Beach: We sat down and we listed all the objectives and then actually redid a whole bunch of bonuses. We’ve had this training for a while. And they were so cool because they were different to the most current [00:18:00] objections that people had about diving into a training during the summertime. So they were really specific to summer.

    [00:18:08] April Beach: As a matter of fact, one of our bonuses we’ve never done before is. The VIPs having access to Jessica in Voxer for a month after this offer building masterclass that we did, and it was because everybody’s busy, everybody’s traveling, and they’re gonna want what we call an afterburn support and access to support access to both of us in Voxer, and you know, that just happened to be what applied to be a bonus for For when we were dropping this masterclass in the summertime.

    [00:18:40] April Beach: And that was, it was a fun process to go through. And I love the strategy of that. So I think that’s so cool. I could talk for hours about bonuses. I know we should, we should do a whole, a whole entire episode.

    [00:18:51] Jessica Erwin: Note to self. Future episode, right? All about bonuses. Juicy bonus episode.

    [00:18:56] April Beach: Yeah, . All right. And so we do some market research, [00:19:00] right?

    [00:19:00] April Beach: Yeah. Right. Uh, so we have two more so for, so, right? Yes. So far we’ve talked about price, we’ve talked about scarcity, we’ve talked about bonuses. We promised you guys five keys to sold out offers here on the show today. So what is the fourth one? And really probably goes hand in hand with the fifth one. I know people get confused about this.

    [00:19:18] April Beach: They do. So go take us in this, this direction.

    [00:19:22] Jessica Erwin: Yeah, let’s, let’s, let’s bring them out together. And that is a guarantee and a promise. So four and five guarantee and a promise. They’re not interchangeable. Um, they do stand on their own, but they both work to build trust with your potential clients and, and the guarantee specifically works to build in a lot of safety.

    [00:19:43] Jessica Erwin: And ensure that, you know, a client knows that you’re not going to let them fail or whatever it is that you guarantee. So let’s talk about a guarantee first. When you go into a store and you buy something in general, like you’ve got [00:20:00] return policies, right? That’s a form of a, that’s a form of a guarantee. I know that if my phone from Apple stops working within however many months.

    [00:20:09] Jessica Erwin: I’m going to be able to get it replaced or fixed, you know, something like that. Um, when it comes to coaching offers, those can be a little bit tricky because not everything is in your control. It’s, it’s so hard because you can give your, you can just pour your heart and soul and 40 plus years of experience into somebody.

    [00:20:28] Jessica Erwin: But if that client doesn’t do the work that’s necessary or the world, I don’t know, shuts down for a couple of years or right, there’s so many things that that can get in the way having a guarantee in place can help. Can help a potential client say, all right, well, barring natural disasters that are outside of these, you know, these people’s control, I know that they stand behind their work.

    [00:20:55] Jessica Erwin: So, there’s, there’s, uh, [00:21:00] guarantees that’ll be, you know, if you don’t. Get five new clients and you know, this is for somebody else’s program, of course But if you don’t get five new clients within 45 days Then your money back or if you don’t get five new clients within 45 days I’ll work with you until you do there’s you know different things within that there’s also like short term guarantees like hey if you start this program and And within 14 days, if you don’t feel like this is for you, I’ll give you a, uh, no questions money back.

    [00:21:30] Jessica Erwin: That, that’s one type of guarantee that we can offer. It’s always going to be, if you do this or don’t do this, I’ll give you this. There’s always a, like a tit for tat. There’s always, I’m going to give you something if you’ve done something else. That’s an important part. There’s a, there’s a deal to it. Uh, there’s a real handshake

    [00:21:51] April Beach: there.

    [00:21:52] April Beach: Yeah. And I think that’s the biggest thing that you help our clients understand when you say like it’s an if this, then that, like if this doesn’t [00:22:00] happen, then we’re going to do that. And I, and that is the biggest thing. Uh, that helps me to remember and process the difference between a guarantee and a promise that I know that that guarantee that we’re making is like, if this, then that, and you guys, just like Jessica said, we’re all teachers.

    [00:22:18] April Beach: That’s what we do. We can’t go home with our students and our clients at night and make sure they do the work and make sure they delegate it correctly to their teams. There are certain things we can control. So, you know, you can also ask for things. And, you know, like, hey, you need to show me that you did the work or you need to show me that you’ve put in this amount of work in order to be qualified for this guarantee and, uh, and, and you’re the judge of that.

    [00:22:42] April Beach: There is no right or wrong way to offer a guarantee, but just remember that if then, if this, then that, and ask yourself what you’re actually willing to do if somebody doesn’t reach a certain threshold that you have promised them or guaranteed them that they would [00:23:00] reach.

    [00:23:00] Jessica Erwin: And I think that one of the reasons why this helps You know, again, potential clients and customers feel safe is, would you guarantee something that if you didn’t know that it worked, like you should know, I’m going to know that my program works before I, before I say, I’m going to give you all your money back if it doesn’t work for you.

    [00:23:20] Jessica Erwin: Right. So it. It helps them feel safe and know that you know what you’re talking about. And in general percentage wise, most people, there’s always going to be somebody, I mean, we’ll just put it out there. There’s always somebody who’s looking for a way to get something for less or for nothing. Put that fear aside because what you can get from gaining the trust and the purchase Is much higher as far as the amount of clients you can bring in Versus the little bits of time that you might lose out.

    [00:23:54] Jessica Erwin: So I I would put your fear aside on that

    [00:23:58] April Beach: That’s awesome. That’s such great [00:24:00] advice. Okay, now the promise.

    [00:24:03] Jessica Erwin: The promise. Promises should be simple. They should be something like, I will pour my heart and soul. Like I said, I just said, I will work with you until you’re finished on this. I will provide you with 30 years of my training and support to ensure that you find success within.

    [00:24:27] Jessica Erwin: This program, I will give you, you know, you’re telling them, but you’re not, you’re not hinging it on anything. I, well, I guess I’m hinging it on their purchase, but I’m not hinging it on, um, specific work that they do and saying, I’m going to give it back. I’m basically saying I’m going to put forth this.

    [00:24:45] Jessica Erwin: It’s good faith effort, and it can again build trust because you’re using trust building words. Um, but you’re not necessarily putting your, your money where your mouth is in that. That’s for the guarantee, but I promise [00:25:00] that I will be there every Monday morning at eight o’clock for that session. I promise that you will be able, that you will be able to reach me and I will get back to you within.

    [00:25:10] Jessica Erwin: This much time, whatever, again, as you’ve gone through this list, and you should be doing this, if you’re building out an offer, a list of all the different objections that somebody could possibly have. Well, what am I doing to defeat those objections? And a lot of that can be in our words of trust and how we can build that with somebody.

    [00:25:30] Jessica Erwin: And I’m just explaining, look, I’m here for you. This, this matters to me and this is how I’m going to do it. So we don’t need to put a dollar value next to those words. They’re just strong words. When they come in writing or in video or however it is, you’re sharing it with the public. Oh,

    [00:25:48] April Beach: that’s so good.

    [00:25:49] April Beach: Love that. Okay. So let’s recap what we talked about today. We talked about the five keys to a sold out offer, or we’ve called them irresistible offers. And you guys, these are [00:26:00] really important. Again, we’re not talking about the actual curriculum. We’re not talking about the outline of your program. We’re not talking about your intellectual property or your method that you teach.

    [00:26:09] April Beach: We’re talking about when that is done. And then you go to make the offer. To, to help people and we move into the marketing and the sales part of selling your program and. I think it’s important that we separate out here. We’ve actually been talking about this a lot for the last few months on the podcast, but I think it’s important that we separate it out because building obviously the content we’re going to talk about next week, but doing this well, this is what people buy.

    [00:26:36] April Beach: You know, people buy the offer. They just assume and pray and hope based on the guarantee that your program is engineered well, and you’re actually good at teaching what you do. They buy the offer. They bet on the program because they don’t see it yet, but this is what they get to see, and that’s why this is so important, you know, to, to communicate this very, very well.

    [00:26:59] April Beach: [00:27:00] And just like Jessica said. Heading off those objections, getting in their mind and knowing what they’re already thinking, I think, is the key to all of this, right? The pricing, the scarcity, the bonuses, the guarantee and the promise. I think that that’s the key to all of it. And like Jessica talked about in the beginning, that does require knowing your audience.

    [00:27:22] April Beach: That does require market research. It’s just like the pricing did. It does require you knowing how you’re serving and what they really need. But also, what they’re…

    [00:27:36] Jessica Erwin: I think if you think about a program or your coaching program, what it is that you’re selling is inside the box and your offer is, you know, the wrapping outside of it, you’re not going to buy, you’re not going to buy just a black box. Yeah. Even if it is on the end cap at Walmart, you’re not going to buy it.

    [00:27:52] Jessica Erwin: You need to know what’s in it. And we all know that certain packaging sells better than others, right? Right. We’re attracted [00:28:00] to a cover of a book, even though it doesn’t tell us exactly what’s in it. If we’re at a bookstore, we are looking at the package, right? And part of that package is the writing that the synopsis of the book.

    [00:28:13] Jessica Erwin: So it’s all of those things matter. So the packaging. of the offer. These five things I think will really help your stand out better and will help you know, I think if you go through them, they’ll really help you know that much better what you’re putting inside the box. Uh, and making sure that when they open it, it’s everything that they wanted and even more because you’re delivering so high.

    [00:28:36] April Beach: All I can think of is, is Tiffany’s blue box with diamonds inside when you said that. Are you, are you, is it a Tiffany box or is it? I was just watching, uh, what is it, Sweet Home Alabama, where he takes her. Have you ever seen that movie where he takes her into It’s mine

    [00:28:51] Jessica Erwin: and my husband’s first date.

    [00:28:53] April Beach: It was our first date when we were dating.

    [00:28:55] April Beach: I was just watching that and he just turns on the lights and she’s in the back door at Tiffany and Company. I’m like, oh my [00:29:00] gosh, every girl’s dream. Um, but yeah, so are you, are you, is it a Tiffany box air packaging app? Uh, or, you know, or, or

    [00:29:08] Jessica Erwin: You better have a Tiffany ring in that box. You

    [00:29:10] April Beach: better have a Tiffany ring in that box.

    [00:29:11] April Beach: In a Tiffany box, okay?

    [00:29:17] April Beach: I think that’s such a good analogy, though. So we’ll leave you guys is with this, right? So what’s in the box is the program. We talk about it all the time. Of course, if you guys need help with that, we help subject matter experts. Experts build leading programs and create sold out offers. But today I really, I’m so glad, first of all for you guys to meet Jessica here on the podcast.

    [00:29:38] April Beach: She’s so awesome. And unpacking this part of the wrapping of the box because it is separate than what is on the inside. And I, I think that’s a perfect analogy. So thank you for that. Yeah. Yeah. All right, you guys. Well, we are going to wrap this up. Please share this episode with anybody you feel like this would be beneficial.

    [00:29:57] April Beach: You know, we don’t have advertising here on the show, so we really [00:30:00] rely on our friends like you to up arrow and share this and share the wealth of knowledge. And Jessica, thank you so much for coming onto the show. I know you’re going to be on here a million more times. And, you guys can connect with Jessica, through our social media channels as well.

    [00:30:15] April Beach: And then, Jessica, what is your, connect with her on LinkedIn? We’re hanging out a lot more on LinkedIn, you guys, if you aren’t hanging out with us on LinkedIn, hang out with us on LinkedIn, , as well, but how can people find you?

    [00:30:27] Jessica Erwin: Any, any of the socials that I am Jessica Erwin, Erwin with an E. Awesome.

    [00:30:31] Jessica Erwin: But yeah. Otherwise, any place Sweet Life is, I am at, so I will find your message.

    [00:30:38] April Beach: Thank you so much. I’m so glad you’re here. Thank you.


    Episode #300 Celebration: Behind The Scenes of The Show with April Beach (Episode 300)

    Episode #300 Celebration: Behind The Scenes of The Show

    For our birthday we’re reflecting on what it’s taken to hit 300 episodes. April Beach unpacks huge mistakes we’ve made that we’d never do again, changes in our listenership, and how our family life has also affected the show. 
    To celebrate, we’re giving away $2k in Free business consulting to our faithful listeners. 
    Here are the rules: 
    1. The free gifts can only be accessed the week of the birthday show, August 7 – August 13, 2023 (no exceptions). 
    2. Choose only 1 gift track that best meets your current business need. 
    3. Live consulting sessions are included with both tracks. Sessions will be held in September, with dates to be announced based on the number of attendees we expect. 
    Track 1: Licensing Growth Track 
    • Free access to Licensing Launchpad™ to learn how to license your course or training to other companies, organizations, small businesses, nonprofits or educational institutions. 
    • Receive an exclusive invitation to a Licensing Training + QA (in September 2023) 
    • Follow this link:
    • Use Coupon Code: BIRTHDAY
    Track 2: Consulting/Coaching Business Growth Track
    • Free access to SweetLife Launch™ to learn how to create winning offers, your first funnel, and hit consistent 10k months. 
    • Receive an exclusive invitation to a live Profitable Offer Training Session + QA (September 2023) 
    • Follow this link:
    • Use Coupon Code: BIRTHDAY
    Thank you so much for your support! 
    All my best, 
    April Beach 
    For more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] Hi, you guys. And this is a really special episode. First of all, I just want to start out by saying thank you so very much. This is our three hundredth Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast episode. And that is all because [00:01:00] you have kept listening. You have kept sending messages. You have kept sharing this show with your friends and you have kept us going. And so before I say anything else, this episode is going to be epic as far as the birthday gifts we are giving to you for being a listener of this show.

    [00:01:18] I just want to start out by thanking you. So much, especially those of you guys that were on our original podcast launch team, you know who you are and who have been there since the very beginning of this show back in 2017 if it wasn’t for your belief, your Kindness And peace And peace And joy And grace And peace Enthusiasm around this show, your faith in knowing that we’re going to drop valuable content, your support, even to those of you guys who left me messages during my little podcast sabbatical that I took saying, April, don’t forget to come back to us. We really want to hear more shows. I even hear right now explaining this to you.

    [00:01:59] I can’t [00:02:00] express. How much that has meant to me and how much that’s meant to our team. And it’s because of you guys that we have made it to 300 episodes. So happy birthday to all of us. Happy birthday to the SweetLife Entrepreneur podcast and thank you so very much.

    [00:02:18] Okay. So first of all, I want to gift you for our birthday. And we’re going to talk about business evolution here. I’m going to share with you a lot of things that are happening with the Suite Life company behind the scenes, give you all the juicy details, but I want to gift you. So this is episode number 300 and we are giving you over two thousand dollars in free business access in trainings. But here is the catch. You need to access it and download it this week. So we’re gonna celebrate our birthday the whole entire week. So if you’re a subscriber and you get our episodes live, dropped into your inbox. Thank you so much. Here’s one of those benefits. So from [00:03:00] August 7th, all the way through this Sunday, which is August 13th, 2023. If you’re listening to this show, go to this link. Go to And these are the show notes for this episode. And there are going to be links and codes for you to access over 2, 000 in business trainings and coaching with us totally for free. You guys, no strings attached.

    [00:03:27] We just want to pour into you and bless you the way you guys have blessed us. So pause this episode. If you need to go to Or you can text the number 300 to 805 254 0880 and we will make sure that you are hooked up. So again, but that’s you got to get it now because it’s done on August 13th of 2023. So that’s, that’s where all the goods are. And [00:04:00] I’ll explain to you in a little bit here what those goodies are and actually how you know which one you’re going to pick.

    [00:04:05] So we don’t want you diving into everything. We want you to diving into the right things, right? How many times do I say this? Nobody needs more content. Nobody needs more training. They need a transformation for their business. So I’m going to help you pick which one of these gifts you want to access, but let me catch you up to date here.

    [00:04:21] on what’s happening a little bit with the SuiteLife company and really how our company has evolved since we started the show six years ago. So these key areas are important. And as I’m sharing with you what’s changed for us, I want you to think about what is changing in your business and whether or not you are pivoting correctly for your life, your profit margins, and your teams in the way that are best for you for your next Three, six, 10, 14 years of your business to you.

    [00:04:52] So many of you guys, again, have been here since the beginning of this show. And if you go back and listen to the trailer of this [00:05:00] episode, it’s a really short trailer. If you’ve never listened to it, I actually recommend it. Because I literally cried in the trailer of this episode. I was so excited and I was so moved to launch the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:05:14] I felt so called to do this and I literally broke down crying in the trailer. It’s like a short little three minute trailer talking about why it’s so important to get trustworthy business trainings in the hands of those people that are intentionally working hard to build trustworthy businesses. And I still am so convicted about that today, but if you’ve never listened to our trailer, you’ll hear a little bit of behind the scenes, a little bit of my story.

    [00:05:43] I’m a second generation lifestyle entrepreneur and things I learned from my parents, but really the mission of this show. So go back and listen to episode 00, which is our trailer. If you have never done that, let’s talk about how your company has evolved and how our company [00:06:00] has evolved. So in the beginning.

    [00:06:02] Of the launch of this podcast, the reason why I did this, a reason why I felt so strongly about this was because of the fact that there are a lot of new consultants and subject matter experts coming into the world is back in 2017. And there are a lot of trainings out there that were really kind of hit or miss.

    [00:06:21] And so we wanted to create a show where you guys can find proven. I say proven. These are trusted business trainings from experts that you don’t have to pay thousands of dollars for. And so we wanted to become the go to place where you can get trusted step by step implementable business trainings that you can apply in your business.

    [00:06:42] immediately right away. They aren’t too huge and they aren’t too little micro. We’re not going to leave you guys hanging. We give complete business trainings in every single one of our episodes. And here’s a little secret. Many of you, if you listen to our podcast episodes, it’s a lot of what we teach in some of our, especially our startup business programs.[00:07:00]

    [00:07:00] You can just listen to the podcast, guys. Go back and start it from the beginning. And frankly, you don’t even have to buy a lot of our services. If you curate the content that I’m giving to you on the in the podcast, we are here to pour into you guys. We have been since day one and I, I feel tired when I say, Oh my gosh, I can’t believe we’ve been doing this for six years.

    [00:07:21] There’s a couple people I really need to thank. I feel like I’m like given an Oscar. I’m not at all. This totally would not have happened if it wasn’t for Brittany Felix, our original podcast producer. She’s absolutely amazing. And Ineke is our current podcast producer. She helped me get the energy again, after taking a year off to relaunch this show, if it wasn’t for Ineke and her creative vision to bring this show back to the world, after a year break that I desperately needed. – Thank you so much, all of you, by the way, for that – , then that would not have been possible.

    [00:07:53] And of course, Jessica Erwin, our COO, which you guys are going to get to meet Jessica on podcast episode. I’m so [00:08:00] excited, but let’s talk about. Business trainings, right? Let’s talk about how we’ve evolved. In the beginning of this show, the majority of our client base we are working with were trying to reach consistent 10k months.

    [00:08:14] And so the whole first 100 episodes of this show. So we’re curated to trying to hit consistent 10k months and, you know, offer strategy. We’re really focused on building funnels and online marketing and how to create your brand and how to create your voice. But also the other thing, and I want you to think about this for your business too.

    [00:08:37] The other thing that we focused on, especially in the first 100 episodes was how to build your business around your family. And when I started this show, my three boys, Tim, Jake, and Sam, were between the ages of 10 and 16. Now, I’ve evolved, they’ve grown, I’ve grown, we’ve all grown. Now my [00:09:00] three boys are 21 and the youngest one is 16.

    [00:09:03] So in the beginning, the first 100 episodes, a lot of what you’re going to get in those first 100 episodes are how to build a business around a family when your kids are younger and they’re not grown and flown. And so that’s how we focused. And then as I grew, as my life grew and as my kids grew and as my clients grew.

    [00:09:23] So what’s so cool. It’s like, as my kids are growing, a lot of our clients kids are growing up kind of alongside. My kids as well. And we are walking into new seasons of life as leaders, as CEOs, as entrepreneurs, as parents. And that’s a very, very cool thing. Whether your kids are micro and you’re, you know, moving into elementary years, most of our clients, you know, your kids are that teenage phase and you’re, you’re moving into the flown and grown years.

    [00:09:54] If your kids maybe haven’t even left the house already. So. I just want you to stop and [00:10:00] reflect. How has your content that you’re sharing grown over the last six years? How is your own personal life grown and how is that reflected in the content that you’re teaching and the trainings and programs that you’re delivering?

    [00:10:17] And so as our clients have grown, as my kids have grown, as my life has changed and I’m moving into my late forties now, The content that I’m delivering here on the show, you guys may notice, and if you’re a new listener, welcome. You’re just dropping in here is, is changing because it’s aligning with what I am currently consumed with in my life.

    [00:10:40] And I want to tell you something. There is nothing wrong with that. It’s important that your business does align in some capacity with your life in the current things that are important to you. Because when we do things in our business for other people that are important to us as [00:11:00] well, and that we’re currently working through in our own life, we’re even better at what we do.

    [00:11:04] We bring more passion to the table. So the first thing I wanna share is it. If you feel like your audience you’re serving needs to be somebody totally different, you’ve never related to them, that isn’t true at all. As a matter of fact, your audience are people that you totally get, that you can relate to, that you understand what’s happening in their business or in their life or whatever it is is your area of expertise.

    [00:11:30] And that certainly happened. So those of you guys who’ve been listeners from the show at the beginning, you have seen the episodes that we’ve done that we no longer talk about, you know, how to manage life, entrepreneurship life with younger kids. We did a ton of those episodes in the beginning. As a matter of fact, I even interviewed Timothy, my oldest son, when he was 17 years old about what it’s like to be the child.

    [00:11:52] Of lifestyle online entrepreneurs. It’s a very interesting episode. He wore sunglasses and the whole entire thing. You guys, he [00:12:00] had his like tie dye shirt and his hat, and he was wearing sunglasses. And he thought he was so cool. You want to hear something that is cool is that Tim is now. My marketing intern in our company and as we share social media posts in the email marketing He’s a senior in college and he has been interning for us since that interview Back when he was 17, and he is an amazing online marketer and a communication specialist And so watching him and my kids even grow through the process of this show in our business.

    [00:12:33] He’s literally sitting on the other side of the wall right now and he’ll be creating email marketing and sharing posts about this. Probably the email you read to come listen to this episode, Tim probably edited and wrote. And how cool is that? Okay. So what’s happening in your business? How is your business evolved as your life has evolved?

    [00:12:54] Lean into that. Lean into the things that matter to you because [00:13:00] when things matter to you, even if they aren’t directly related to your business, they matter to the right clients for you as well. So that’s the first evolution. I just wanted to share with you. The second thing I want to share with you is our offers.

    [00:13:12] We went from having so many offers, as a matter of fact, at one point in time, many of you know, I own two international business consulting 56 online courses. I’ll open it once I close them all down, reorganize them, updated the model. So what has happened is we used to have so many different offers. Let me, let me tell you a secret.

    [00:13:33] Do you know that we have over 250 funnels from this podcast into our business? Let me say that again. We have over 250 funnels from podcast episodes into our business. Right? So you think that, oh my gosh, that’s such a great idea. I thought it was a great idea at first, you guys. Do you know what that is?

    [00:13:54] That is called a nightmare. That is called way too many funnels to manage [00:14:00] and update and so much messaging because we used to give a free lead magnet with every single podcast episode. Holy moly, I had to hire a team to document and map every single one of the funnels and the landing pages they were on.

    [00:14:12] But in the beginning, I thought that was a great idea. Uh, our listeners, you guys loved it. You had a free, awesome download with every episode. But what happened was it was a million email onboarding sequences all at once and we shut it down. It was just too much, right? Too much is not necessarily a good thing.

    [00:14:34] And those are the things through testing and traction that we learned over the time. So we’ve reduced our offers. We’ve reduced the solutions we provide. We used to be a very comprehensive business consulting firm, and now we’ve really, really honed in to different areas of expertise that we like to help our clients with, which are million dollar offer engineering and licensing their content to other programs and [00:15:00] creating ecosystems of offers that align with their life.

    [00:15:03] And so, as the podcast has grown, as I have grown, as you have grown, the things we offer, the solutions we offer have grown, and we’re actually, we have decreased, we’ve significantly decreased how many funnels, how many programs, and how many offers we have. And so what does that look like to you? When is the last time you, as your company’s grown, kind of cleaned house on some of the programs and offers that you have built over the years?

    [00:15:35] How many do you have? Because Simplicity sells and so, you know, maximizing yourself and getting yourself out there and repurposing content is one thing, but creating a million different solutions that for that you can provide for your clients, you know, that wasn’t our initial intention. We just wanted to create action items from every podcast episode.

    [00:15:56] That frankly as a CEO turned out to be a [00:16:00] nightmare for me because it was too much to manage. So I told you I’d share with you kind of a lot of behind the scenes things, sound like a great idea. Turned out two years later, not to be a great idea. So what can you simplify in your business now that your business has grown?

    [00:16:15] What can you get rid of? What do you need to cut off? What are you no longer excited about? And here, here’s the biggest one. And this kind of goes into the third area of evolution. What clients have you outgrown? And I’m not saying that in a bad way. Alright? But you will outgrow certain clients over time.

    [00:16:38] Just like we used to be very, very heavy for 15 years. We were very heavy on teaching experts, consultants, and coaches to launch their business for the ground up. And we’ve taught that business launch, online business launch for coaches and consultants for a decade, you know, really since prior to 2006, all right.

    [00:16:59] But as [00:17:00] time has evolved, we focus on, you guys have evolved, your businesses have grown, your businesses have launched, and now instead of just trying to get you to 10K, now we’re getting our clients to 50K a month. Now we’re getting our clients past seven figures. So, as we have grown, our clients have grown, the content on the podcast has grown, the offers that we are creating, the programs and the solutions that we’re providing, those have also grown up too.

    [00:17:28] And that’s the cool thing about staying the course, you guys, when you grow, when you increase your profit. When you increase your own knowledge, so when you understand yourself as a leader even better than you did yesterday, and how do we do that? We do that by putting ourself out there. We do that by trying things, uh, testing new solutions, testing new methods and frameworks on new audiences in listening.

    [00:17:55] We do that by understanding. What the next step for our client is in continuing to [00:18:00] create a journey that brings our clients to the next level and the next level and the next level. So we can have lifelong clients. Some of the clients that work with us have worked with us for over a decade because of the fact that we are evolving with our clients.

    [00:18:14] This podcast has evolved with our clients. And so we never, we no longer focus on business launch trainings. Again, if that’s where you are. I have a really awesome gift for you with, with this podcast birthday thing. You need to go, you need to go grab it, but it’s not our primary focus. We primarily now for the last five years, I’ve worked with established subjects, met our experts, coaches, and consultants to bring their offers and their businesses to scale.

    [00:18:43] And so I just want you to realize that it’s okay to outgrow your clients. It’s okay to stop and ask yourself, do I still love serving these people? Does this still light me up? Because the second you feel like providing support seems like [00:19:00] monotony, that you’re not super fired up about who you’re working with anymore, and it’s nobody’s fault.

    [00:19:05] fault. It’s just called moving into a new season. You as a leader are going to move into a new season. And so as I’m sharing a little bit behind the scenes in our 300th birthday episode, I want to let you know that it’s totally normal to do that. And I have done that in all of us. If we don’t take a minute to recognize what we are outgrowing, we’re going to get either bored or burnt out or stagnant.

    [00:19:31] You always, okay, I can’t speak for you. I always need to have something to look forward to. It’s just a thing for me. If I don’t have a next level I’m growing to or a next place I want to go to or a next, uh, professional strategy, I want to master a next financial level I want to hit. Uh, a next physical goal.

    [00:19:52] I have a lot of like travel adventure goals, whether it’s in your life, in your business. I’m a strong believer. If you don’t have something that’s constantly [00:20:00] challenging you that you need to push yourself to that next level. It’s going to get really old really fast. And that’s why entrepreneurship past those first couple of years, I don’t even know what the success rate is, but it’s really low businesses that launch and those that stay in business past like one year and then three year, it’s because they aren’t continuing to push themselves.

    [00:20:20] I believe that when we push ourselves, when we challenge ourselves and when we believe that failing as part of the process, then you are going to be successful at that next level and whatever that looks like for you. So let me just kind of recap a little bit what we talked about since the beginning of this show, six years ago, our audience has changed the content that I’m sharing here on the podcast has grown with the audience.

    [00:20:44] Our offers have changed. We no longer serve so many people. It’s very exclusive. The clients that we work with now. I’m not interested in having programs with hundreds and thousands of people in there. I don’t feel like it. I don’t want to do that. I like [00:21:00] working with select entrepreneurs that I can literally know their name, even if they’re in one of our group coaching events, one of our group coaching programs.

    [00:21:10] That’s what I like. And so think about what you like. And are your clients growing up as you’re growing up? I don’t care if you’re 25 We are never ever stopping to get to that next level. We’re going to never stop evolving. That’s what makes us entrepreneurs. We’re never satisfied. It’s also one of our downfalls.

    [00:21:30] You know, when we do something great, we don’t really stop to recognize that we hit a milestone and did something great. We’re just like, hey, what’s next? What’s next? And so that’s what we’re doing here. Maybe I should even stop and say, Hey, yay, we hit this milestone. But instead of course, I’m just thinking about how we can identify how we can grow from this milestone into, into the next phase.

    [00:21:54] And I want you to identify that also. And I want to help you. Let’s get to the [00:22:00] goods. For our 300th birthday, again, this week only, we are giving you guys complete free access to two different trainings. You get to pick which one you want. It’s over 2, 000 worth of trainings. The first one is for those of you guys that are ready for the next level, you’re ready to scale your business and you are interested in learning how to sell your consulting course or training to corporations, organizations, other entrepreneurs.

    [00:22:30] the government, educational institutions. So if you are listening to the show and you are interested in, you have an existing program, rule number one, and you are interested in licensing, you want to know about licensing. You want to know what comes next after that launch lifestyle and in social media marketing to really push your business past seven figures.

    [00:22:52] Then we are giving you completely free access to licensing. Launchpad. Okay. So licensing launchpad is our entry [00:23:00] training, which gets you to the point where you know what you have, you understand the value of it and you can build an action plan to sell your trainings to other companies. On top of that, we are also giving you exclusive access to one of our Amplify events.

    [00:23:16] So what is Amplify? Amplify is our licensing accelerator. It is an amazing group of leaders just like you that are licensing their content and we are going to give you a guest pass to one of our exclusive Amplify events. So again, if that’s the level that you’re at, then I want you to go over to SuiteLifePodcast.

    [00:23:35] com forward slash 300 and just fill out your information there and we’re going to get you access to everything for free. If you aren’t quite there yet, if you are still scaling. Which is a beautiful place to be. What does that mean? If you are building your business and you are trying to hit consistent 10 K months.

    [00:23:54] If you, it doesn’t even matter if you’ve been in business for over five years. We have a [00:24:00] ton of people that come across our ecosystem saying, listen, I’ve been coaching or I’ve been consulting for years and years and years and I still can’t get to consistent 20, 30, 000 a month. What am I doing? What am I missing wrong?

    [00:24:13] We are going to give you free access to SuiteLife launch. Now, Suite Life Launch doesn’t mean you’re launching your business from scratch. As a matter of fact, 56% of the businesses inside Suite Life Launch program have been in business for over 5 years. Suite Life Launch is going to take you through the process of assessing your offers, understanding funnels for online marketing, and actually selling your services consistently.

    [00:24:39] And we’re going to give you free access to that program. And so those are your two that you get to choose from. Don’t choose both. That’s the rule. You can’t choose both. You have to pick one. So you’re either trying to hit consistent 10, 20, 000 months, or you’re beyond that and you’re ready to learn more about selling your program to corporations or even allowing other entrepreneurs or [00:25:00] businesses to distribute your programs for you, like in a licensing deal, or you are considering creating a certification program.

    [00:25:08] We’re going to give you free access to licensing launchpad and an exclusive invitation to one of our Amplify, which is our private client accelerator events where you get to work with me personally and we get to pour into you personally. So we really wanted to give back to you. We really, there were so many ideas we had around this podcast episode, but I just, I wanted to talk about, you know, some of the things that are the elephant in the room, some of the things that we don’t really get a chance to talk about here on the podcast about the growth and evolution of our businesses and how it’s okay to grow to different levels, how it’s okay to change your mind, all the, all the mistakes.

    [00:25:45] Of that we did and wondering how to fix those and how to pivot to your next level. And I just, like we started out in the beginning, I’ll always be honest and transparent with you guys here on this show. If you ever have any questions about anything, you can always send us a direct [00:26:00] message. We are at suite life co or the suite life business strategy on Instagram, where the suite life company, you can follow our company page on LinkedIn.

    [00:26:09] And we’re always in there wanting to connect with you and hear more about your company. I am not in this to serve the masses. That’s very clear to me now, even more than it was before. I want to serve you, and I really feel like our legacy is being that, you know, little rock that is dropped to help you be the waves in the pond that continue out across the world for the good work that you have done.

    [00:26:36] And I just appreciate you guys so much for being listeners of the show, for your personal support, all of the personal messages. For those of you guys that hear my voice, I had somebody hear my voice. I was at a conference and I was talking to somebody washing my hands in like a public bathroom. And a woman came out of the stall.

    [00:26:53] She’s like, Oh my gosh, that’s April Beach. And she gave me this big fat hug and it felt so good. Not because she [00:27:00] recognized me, but because somebody listened. Let’s just be really honest. I put a lot of work into this show. Our team, we spent a lot of money to produce this show for you guys. I’ve always refused advertisers.

    [00:27:12] I hate them, personally. And just to know that you guys listen, and that you’re getting some value out of this. is totally worth it. And it just, honestly, that’s the best thank you ever that anybody can say was, Hey, listen, I listened to this episode. It really, really helped me. And that’s all we want to do.

    [00:27:31] That’s what we’re here for. Our mission is to inspire and equip. You to design your life through entrepreneurship. That’s my core purpose in this show as part of that process. So thank you so much for being a listener. Oh, just wait for the next year. Oh my goodness. Okay, so here’s a preview of what’s coming up.

    [00:27:50] We’re talking more a little bit about offer engineering in the next couple episodes. Next week episode is the five keys to a sold out offer. Next episode after that [00:28:00] is the three components to a transformational consulting program. We’re diving into a little bit. I’m sharing behind the scenes how I travel six months a year in my very specific business model.

    [00:28:10] I’m going to unpack that for you. And then This fall, we are diving into an entire LinkedIn Logic Mastery Series with just incredible LinkedIn experts. For those of you guys that are looking to build your consultancy business through LinkedIn and sell to companies or even sell to other individuals through LinkedIn.

    [00:28:28] So that’s just a little preview of what’s coming and, thank you so much. I really appreciate you. Thanks for being here.


    How To Structure Your Suite Of Online Offers, Programs and Courses with April Beach (Episode 299)

    How To Structure Your Suite Of Online Offers, Programs and Courses


    This Episode is Great For: 

    Established experts and entrepreneurs who are looking to scale online but want clarity on how. 


    Online services, courses, memberships, and coaching programs are a great way to scale your business. However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business. In this week’s show April Beach shares her Strategic Business Design Method™ and how you can design your company for long-term lifestyle and profit goals now, and why launching any program outside this method is a risk. 

    At the end of this episode, you will: 

    • Get the high-level steps of April’s Strategic Business Design Method™
    • Know where to start when considering your offers
    • Have clarity on what you should be working on right now
    Resources mentioned: 
    For the bonus mentioned and for more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:00] Hi guys, and welcome to the last episode of the summer series here on the Sweetlife Entrepreneur in Business podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am coming to you with this intro to this episode from my front porch. So you probably hear dogs and kids and cars. I have my fireplace behind me and there is a gentle summer rain shower and I’m just so grateful to be here recording this episode for you.

    [00:00:26] First of all, thank you so much for listening to this show. There are so many great business podcasts out there and I truly appreciate the fact that you hang out with me and that you don’t mind that I am here. And my workout clothes, my little Patagonia hat with my dog recording this intro from the front porch.

    [00:00:43] So this is the last of our summer series and in our summer series we have brought to the surface our most popular episodes of the last couple of years. And as you know, we deliver business coaching and strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for. And so in this [00:01:00] episode we are specifically talking about how to engineer your suite of online offers.

    [00:01:05] Making the old theories of like basic Ascension model. We’re bringing those to light and talking about whether or not they actually should work for your business. We’re talking about new ways to engineer your suite of offers. And I teach you my strategies on offer engineering and business ecosystem engineering in such a way that It does things that my life that I get to do, I get to travel six months a year with my kids, my husband and I own five companies.

    [00:01:32] And that is only because of how I engineer my suite of offers. So with that being said, enjoy this episode. Everything can be found by visiting the show notes at And yes, next week is our 300th podcast episode. I’m so excited about that. Get ready for that. Make sure you hit the subscribe button, but in the meantime, dive in and take the proven strategies that I give you here on this show about [00:02:00] how to engineer your suite of offers.

    [00:02:03] And you can visit the new link that I just gave you at episode two 99. Or also the previous show notes link that I have given you in the past. Both of them will lead you to the resources that we have here waiting for you. Thank you so much for being a listener to this show, for being part of this summer series and being part of our online business family. I truly appreciate you.

    [00:02:28] You’re listening to the SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator, April Beach.

    [00:02:47] Hi you guys, and welcome to episode number 225 here on the SuiteLife Entrepreneur Podcast. We’re going to go ahead and dive right in today. And we’re talking about how to structure your suite of offers. I know this [00:03:00] is a common question. I’m literally in clubhouse rooms every single week talking about this, because there are so many things that you could do that you could launch in your business to scale.

    [00:03:10] Who knows? Is that the right thing for you? Is that what we really need for you in your company? And that’s, is that really what’s going to equal the profit plan that you want? So in this week’s show, I’m actually breaking down a process that I take entrepreneurs through called strategic business design.

    [00:03:27] And so we’re going to dive into all things, how to structure your suite of offers to give you the results that you want. So let’s do a little bit of housekeeping first, and then we’ll go ahead and get started. This episode is for established entrepreneurs. So this is for those of you guys who are in phase three Of my Sweetlifebusiness launch system, it’s also called the start to scale up system.

    [00:03:47] Basically it is a roadmap of five different steps and you know which phase of business that you’re in. It’s really important. You know where you are so you know what you should be working on so you can scale your business faster. And so if you’re in phase three. [00:04:00] This episode is for you. So keep tuning in here and we’re going to go ahead and dive in.

    [00:04:05] If you aren’t really sure what phase of business you’re in, simply go to SweetLifeCo. com forward slash quiz, and you can take the quiz there and get your exact download customized to where you are in business right now. So this is what we’re talking about on today’s show. We’re talking about the fact that online services, courses, masterminds, coaching programs are all a great way to scale your business.

    [00:04:25] However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business, your lifestyle, and your profit plan. So on this show, I am breaking down my strategic business design method, and I’m giving it to you high level because frankly, it’s so simple. You can run with it high level right now. And I want you to leave this show with exactly what to do to get started to design your suite of offers.

    [00:04:50] At the end of this show, you are going to know exactly the high level steps of what that method is. You are going to know where you can start right now in [00:05:00] considering your suite of offers, and you’re going to have clarity of what you are going for in the future and how that actually equals the lifestyle results that you want.

    [00:05:08] So if that’s what you’re here for, this show is for you. Let’s go ahead and get started.

    [00:05:23] Okay, guys, welcome. Thanks so much for hanging out with me today. This is episode number 225 here on the Sweetlife Entrepreneur Business Podcast and all the show notes and everything that we’re going to talk about on today’s show. Can be found by visiting SuiteLifeCo. com. Simply click on the podcast.

    [00:05:41] And this is episode number 225. And today we’re talking about how to structure your suite of offers. So I’m going to give you three high level steps. And within each step, we’re going to break them down. So if you have a piece of paper and a pen, Take notes. If you’re on the go, join me in clubhouse live this [00:06:00] week, because I’m going to be taking your specific offer design questions on Wednesdays at noon Eastern time.

    [00:06:07] And if you’re not yet, you can follow me on clubhouse at April beach. You’ll get notification of that room. And I would love to include you in workshop this with you. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, let’s talk about why this is important. I coach entrepreneurs. Obviously all the time. That’s what I do.

    [00:06:25] And what we’re seeing is a huge trend of companies coming to us new and established companies coming to us who have launched a course or launched a membership, launched a grouping of offers because everybody else is doing it. And a couple things are happening. Number one, They’re failing, they’re falling on their face and nobody’s joining them.

    [00:06:45] Number two, what they’re doing for the people that are successful doesn’t really align with what they wanted to do and why they became an entrepreneur in the first place. And what happens is they are tapped out. They haven’t designed their offer strategically in a [00:07:00] way that is going to deliver a couple things.

    [00:07:02] Number one, the profit that they want. Number two, the lifestyle that they want and number three, the transformation that their clients want and need and deserve from them. So they’re tapped out. They don’t know how to do more. They don’t know how to create this, what we call a suite of offers. And this is how we build profitable million dollar coaching businesses that if you want, if you do it right, you can turn around someday and sell it.

    [00:07:26] And so what I’m going to do is I’m going to take you guys through high level. These are the three steps of my strategic business design method. And people fly to me here in Colorado all the time to meet with me for one day to go through this process with them. This is a very important process and I really want to make sure that it’s in your hands too.

    [00:07:49] Of course, I would love to have you join me here in Colorado or a virtual strategic. business design session, but let’s get you started where you are right now and make sure that [00:08:00] you know the steps of going through this. When you go through a process called strategic business design, you’re going to end up in three to five years from now with a company that you really, really love.

    [00:08:10] You’re going to end up walking into that brand influence that you’ve wanted. So what you want to be known for, how you want to be seen. And really, in my opinion, one of the most important parts is you’re going to end up with the life that you want. You’ve listened to this show before. If you’re new, welcome.

    [00:08:25] Hi, it’s nice to meet you. I travel with my kids four to five months a year and it’s broken up. I’m always on a plane. We’re always somewhere adventuring and that is because I learned at a very young age from my parents how to design businesses for lifestyle freedom and this is the process. Really high level and so I want to make sure you have it.

    [00:08:44] So let’s go ahead and dive into step number one. And I’m sure this sounds so crazy. You’re like, oh my gosh, this isn’t, this isn’t revolutionary April. When I tell you what step number one is, but it’s really important that most people skip it. So step number one is starting with [00:09:00] the end in mind. See what I said?

    [00:09:02] You’re probably thinking, oh, great. I’m listening to this podcast in. I’ve already heard all this before. Everybody says start with the end in mind, but let’s, let’s actually talk about what this means for you and why this is important. So starting with the end in mind means that you’re going to take a second.

    [00:09:18] And I really mean take a second, just sit for a minute and stop and envision what do you want your average week to look like in three to five years. That means, who do you want to be working with? What do you want that to actually look like? So I want you to dive in. I want you to close your eyes unless you’re driving.

    [00:09:38] Don’t close your eyes. And I want you to picture yourself. What are you doing on an average week and in an average day? What is your average day look like? And perhaps what is your average month look like? And here’s some questions. I want you to see in your own mind when we’re going through this exercise.[00:10:00]

    [00:10:00] How are you working with your clients or your customers? What does your interaction between you and your customers actually look like? Where are you working from? Are you working from an office space? Are you, uh, working from your home? Are you working from a sailboat? Where are you working from? I want you to really feel both of those things, because both of those things, that equals the business model we need to design for you.

    [00:10:27] And then, I mean, it’s not just a pipe dream and that’s why this is pretty crazy deep strategic business planning. This is not a business coach coming in here and saying, decide that you want to be on a boat. You’ll never get that from me. We need to talk about where you want to be. And I’m going to give you the exact steps to actually make that happen.

    [00:10:46] The next process is I want you to go through and who are you talking to? Who are you working with? Who flows through your day with you? Who flows through your activities? Who is on your team? And [00:11:00] how, what, how are they operating? What does that look like to you? The next question, after you go through and imagine that, I want you to figure out what is happening that is not work related.

    [00:11:11] And this is where the lifestyle entrepreneur side comes into play. What are you doing? That’s not work related. How are you interacting with the people that you love? What does that look like? And what are those relationships look like? And then when you go through this process to actually envision this three to five years from now, I really want you to see it.

    [00:11:33] Because these answers equal the business model and they are going to lead to the suite of offers that you’re going to want to create in your business. Along those lines, I do have a tool for you. Go grab it. It is a 17 page ultimate guide to online business models. If you have not grabbed that yet, grab it.

    [00:11:54] It breaks down every single type of offer structure that you can do for an online business. And I tell [00:12:00] you exactly how it’s going to affect your life. You can grab that simply. By going to Sweetlifeco. com, clicking on podcast number two 25. And we’ll make sure there’s a link here for you in the show notes.

    [00:12:11] So that’s step number one is starting with the end in mind. But I need you. Most people actually don’t go through this process because of the fact that they think it’s just this pipe dream they’re building. Now we’re going to go a step deeper. We’re going to reverse engineer it even more. So hang with me here, okay?

    [00:12:27] So after you’ve gone through that process to really figure out what that looks like for you, what you want that to look like for you, step number two is curating your suite of offers, programs, and products. So here is what I mean by this. What programs do you offer under your business and your brand?

    [00:12:48] What types of programs do you want to offer to people? What do you want to be serving them in what regard? How do you want to be coaching them? What type of results do you want to give to them? So, [00:13:00] what programs, plural, make up your suite of offers? The next question to that is, what are the business models of each one of those programs?

    [00:13:12] You could, in your business, only have one signature program that brings in half a million dollars a year. You don’t have to have multiple programs. But most companies do. I’m a big advocate for multiple streams of income. And frankly, you know, if you only have one program, we’re not really creating a journey for your clients to grow with you and to keep clients longterm.

    [00:13:36] And so I am a big advocate of creating a suite of programs that creates a journey for your clients to work with you for years and years to come as they grow. So in your mind, what programs are you offering when you imagine yourself? Five years down the road from now. And what is the business model of each offer?

    [00:13:56] And what I mean by business model, these are the common terms. Is one a [00:14:00] course? Is one a membership site? Is one a live virtual event? Do you have retreats? Do you offer one on one coaching? What is the collection of programs and the business model of each that is going to help you get to where you want to be doing in an average week and an average month and an average year?

    [00:14:18] And here’s one thing I want you to lean in on. And we do talk about this a lot in clubhouse. This is what we teach in my masterclass on how to create your signature programs is I don’t want you to be afraid to create a custom business model and deliver your programs in a way that meets your needs while also still delivering a transformation to your clients.

    [00:14:38] If you want to do a hybrid mix of models, which every single one of our clients are now. Don’t be afraid to do that. Don’t be afraid to think outside the box. And of course, what you create here and what we’re thinking about and we’re shopping in your brain right now in this podcast, it’s going to change as technology changes.

    [00:14:55] And you know, we get three, five years down the road and we bring in artificial intelligence and virtual [00:15:00] reality and all these other cool, amazing things, but we need to start with somewhere. And I want to make sure you have the roadmap to do this. Next question I want you to ask is what digital or physical products also make up your offer suite?

    [00:15:12] Do you have any? Do you have a book? Do you have t shirts that you sell? You know, what sort of digital or physical products might also be in that suite of offers? Are you writing your third book or your fourth book? Are you launching a podcast? What other ways are you contributing to the excellence of your clients?

    [00:15:29] And then here is where the hard work comes in. And this is where most of you guys are going to totally tune me out. But those of you that keep listening are going to be the ones that actually build the life that you want out of your business. The next part is to value and create a profit forecast for each one of your offers.

    [00:15:50] So you need to sit down and write the forecast of sales for each one of your offers and the value each one of your offers holds separately and collectively. [00:16:00] and crunch those numbers and make sure they’re going to equal that lifestyle that you want. And then the third step is to determine what do you need to build right now?

    [00:16:11] What do you need to start building right now in the next 30, days? What’s the top signature program that you want to launch or gain traction on first? What do you want to be known for first? And most importantly, how does this first program you’re launching fit into that long term suite of offers? And that’s what I want you to lean in on and those are the questions that you should be able to answer.

    [00:16:36] If you cannot answer those questions, you know where to find me. This is my jam. This is what I do. You can send me an Instagram DM. I would happy to be happy to set up a strategy session with you. But the first thing is we need to do one thing really, really well. We can’t do all the things at once. And it’s also really hard with all the noise across marketing to become known for something.

    [00:16:54] So I want you to lean into this one first signature program that you are building. And you need [00:17:00] to see and understand how that fits, how that one brick, if you will, fits into the bigger house that you were building with all the other bricks. Signature programs that you will create and once you nail your signature offer, once you’ve scaled this first one that you’re doing and that includes a program delivery, you’ve reached your first benchmark of your profit goal, then you can move on to developing the next program in your suite of offers.

    [00:17:26] And as you go and as you grow, your clients go and grow with you. It’s an amazing thing and when it’s well thought out and there’s a strategy, I guarantee you it works every single time when we don’t add in strategy and tactics to creating business design. That’s where entrepreneurs run into trouble.

    [00:17:46] And so I wanted to download you on this today, and I wanted to give you these really three high level steps. Literally people fly to me in Colorado to spend a day with me to go through this and design this for their company. [00:18:00] And I want you to have these tools too. You’re, you’re my people, you’re my podcast family.

    [00:18:04] And thank you so much for listening to the show. And I’ve been getting a lot of questions about this lately. And so I really wanted to make sure that one of these shows here, as soon as I could fit it in, we were talking about these high level steps. So this is my strategic business design process and I want you to have it.

    [00:18:22] Let’s go ahead and recap. They’re very basic, right? It doesn’t have to be complicated to build a profitable business. As a matter of fact, simple is what creates traction both for you and for your followers and for your students, your clients, your customers. So number one is starting with the end in mind.

    [00:18:40] but in a much deeper way than you have done before. It’s understanding how what you want your life to look like is controlled by the business model. You choose number two is curating your suite of offers, programs, and products, and not only doing that, but then going the extra step, creating a [00:19:00] profit forecast for each of them.

    [00:19:02] And understanding and making sure that the hard work you’re doing is in fact, going to equal the profit that you need in order to create the lifestyle and the impact that you want to make. And then the third step is to understand what you need to do first and build right now in the next 30, 60, 90 days, what you need to be leaning in on what signature program that brick in the, in the big building of your whole house has to happen first, what’s the first brick that has to be laid.

    [00:19:27] And this isn’t for new businesses as a matter of fact. If you are a new business, thank you for listening to this. But these are the things that we work with, with established companies, established experts that are scaling offline to online, or who have just done a lot of things. I think one of the biggest confusion places in this are companies and entrepreneurs that have launched a whole bunch of things, and it’s all just a bunch of things thrown out there.

    [00:19:51] There’s no strategic business design plan. And so it’s taking what, you know, what you’ve done well and putting it into a strategic plan, because I [00:20:00] really, I want you to have what I have. I feel so blessed, but it’s taken a lot of hard work and it’s a lot of strategy and it’s a lot of understanding how the importance of reverse engineering your business model equals that lifestyle and that profit that you want.

    [00:20:14] And so this is a wrap on today’s show. I want you to lean in from here. And I would highly recommend connecting with man clubhouse. I would love to workshop with you on this and lean in. And instead of saying, I want to launch a course, or I want to launch a mastermind, or I want to launch a membership. I recommend that you go through the process of strategic business design to understand how it affects your life.

    [00:20:39] And truly, what’s the best transformation that you can give to your clients? Are those business models truly the best ways that you can get them the transformational, predictable, measurable results that we want you to give them in your suite of offers? That’s what we talked about today on the show.

    [00:20:57] Thank you so much for spending time with me [00:21:00] here. Again, this is a Sweetlife Entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 225. I know your time is super valuable. So I hope that you felt that it was valuable spending this time here, listening to me. And I would love to connect with you further. As I said, on clubhouse, you can follow me at.

    [00:21:16] April beach and all of the show notes and everything we talked about today. It can be found by visiting Sweetlifeco. com. Simply click on the podcast button. And this is episode number 225. Thanks so much. And I can’t wait to talk to you guys again with another proven business training you can take to the bank next week. Bye bye for now.


    How to Launch a Transformational Online Course with April Beach (Episode 298)

    How to Launch a Transformational Online Course



    In this episode, we take a deep dive into why the launch of online courses alone just doesn’t cut it anymore. We explore the startling drop in demand for online courses – a decline of $13.4 billion – and the reasons behind this trend, from course fatigue to inadequate materials and missed outcomes. It’s a frank look at a shifting landscape, providing valuable insights for coaches, consultants, experts, and speakers who want to take their online businesses to the next level.
    We then pivot to the exciting potential of online courses, particularly if you know how to curate your content effectively and focus on delivering real transformation to your participants. This isn’t just about teaching skills – it’s about guiding people to new heights. The key is the powerful technique of Transformational Program Design™, and we will discuss how to create a course that doesn’t just educate, but transforms, setting your online offering apart from the rest.

    Key Takeaways:

    1. Grasp the nuts and bolts of Transformational Program Design™: Learn about this innovative approach that aims not just to impart knowledge, but to transform learners in meaningful ways.
    2. Evaluate your existing course: With new insights from this podcast, you’ll be equipped to take a hard look at your current course and identify areas where changes might be necessary.
    3. Act on your knowledge: By the end of this episode, you’ll have four actionable steps to implement immediately if you’re in the process of building an online course. No vague theory here – it’s about real steps you can take to ensure your course stands out and delivers genuine transformation.
    Resources mentioned: 
    For the bonus mentioned and for more about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:00] Hi, you guys. And welcome to the summer series here on the Sweetlife Entrepreneur podcast. I’m April Beach, host of this show. And I’m so excited to bring you back to the surface one of our most powerful episodes that we have played here on the past on the Sweetlife podcast. If you’ve been following us for any period of time, you know that we give you trainings and proven strategies that other coaches will charge you thousands for.

    [00:00:24] And so we went back into our archives and pulled up our most popular profit generating powerful episodes and it brought them to the surface over the summer series here on the Sweetlife Entrepreneur podcast. So if you’re new to the show and you miss these episodes, we want to make sure you don’t miss them.

    [00:00:39] And if you’ve been listening to this show for over five years. Thank you so much. First of all. And secondly, these things are great to hear again. And sometimes when we rehear things that we learned once before, we hear them in a different way because you and your business are at a different level.

    [00:00:57] And so that’s what we were doing here on the show. In [00:01:00] this episode, we are replaying a popular episode about how to build transformational courses. Now we’re going to talk a little bit about the history of online courses, the trends in courses in this episode, if you plan to scale your business with courses, or if you’ve built courses and they are not selling, this is a very important episode for you to listen to.

    [00:01:21] The online coursing courses industry has changed drastically since we first started in 2008. It is completely oversaturated. People are not finishing courses, but yet. Some of our clients are generating millions of dollars selling their courses, and that’s what I want you to hear in this episode. So, with that being said, let’s go ahead and dive in.

    [00:01:45] This is a replay of a past episode. All of the show notes have been updated for you, and they can actually be found by visiting And you can [00:02:00] also go to the links in the old replay episode and they will be updated for you and they will also be there to provide you with more resources again.

    [00:02:07] Thank you so much for tuning into the show, tuning in behind the scenes here from the front porch of the beach house. And I am so appreciative of your listenership and your support of this show. Enjoy.

    [00:02:22] You’re listening to the Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator, April Beach.

    [00:02:40] Hi there, and welcome back to the show. I’m April Beach host here at the Suite Life Entrepreneur Podcast and founder of the Sweetlife Company. Thanks for joining me again on another episode where you can take what we deliver to the bank. This show is known for delivering you business trainings and coaching that other businesses and coaches [00:03:00] charge thousands for.

    [00:03:01] So thank you so much for tuning in with us before we get started today. And we’re about to talk all about online courses, which I know is a popular topic for so many of you. I want to make sure that, you know, how you can connect further with us here on the podcast.

    [00:03:14] Delivering information is one thing, but then you usually have questions or you want to know maybe how this applies in your business. So if you are on clubhouse every single week on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock, we host a room and this room is all about the podcast topic of the week. And I take your specific questions on what we talked about on this week’s show.

    [00:03:36] So if you’re listening right now to episode number 223, and you want to know all about how to launch a transformational online course, you’re listening to this podcast, and then you want to workshop with me and ask your questions. That is where you can find me totally free. Every single Wednesday on Clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time in order to find that room You just [00:04:00] need to follow me on Clubhouse and I can be found at April Beach super simple so So let’s take this podcast from where we are now over to clubhouse and I’m happy to have a deeper conversation with you and give you support in this area.

    [00:04:15] So who is this episode for this episode is for those of you guys that are in the business launch or scale phase and you’re thinking about doing so with an online course. So here are a couple of important things to note. Launching an online course isn’t enough. All right. In fact, the sale of on demand online courses and free courses actually dropped.

    [00:04:37] The consumption of them has dropped over the last couple of years. And that’s because so many people are weary of buying another course or even of spending their time on a free course. And they understand the material they’re getting really isn’t good or it isn’t transformational. And they aren’t really getting the outcome that they had hoped that they would receive.

    [00:04:58] So, if you are… [00:05:00] Which you are listening to me here and entrepreneur business, and you’re looking to scale online courses are still really powerful way to do that. In fact, we help most of our clients launch online courses, but how you curate your content and deliver a transformation to your students, to your clients will determine whether or not your course is a huge hit or a huge fail. And so that’s what we’re talking about today on the show at the end of this episode. You’re going to understand the basics of transformational course creation and design. You’re going to be able to assess your current courses and whether or not you need to make changes, and you’re going to have 4 steps to take action if you’re building an online course.

    [00:05:41] Right now. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into the show and all of the show notes and everything we have here for you can be found by going to sweetlifeco.Com [00:06:00] okay. So let’s first dive in and talk about what is a transformational course. A transformational course is an online course that delivers measurable transformational results where your students, your, your clients actually are able to understand what you have taught them and actually practice and put it into action instead of.

    [00:06:21] So a lot of course creators, actually, most of them just teach you how to kind of outline your content. In benchmarks and basic reverse engineering, you need to do much more of that if you want to scale your business and become an undisputed leader in your space by creating a transformational online course.

    [00:06:37] So that’s why this is so important. The problem is more content is not better. You know, nobody needs more content. Nobody is out there saying, please inundate me with more content. I know I’m not and I’m sure you’re not either your students and your clients and the people that you’re going to go through your course.

    [00:06:57] They just need a transformation and [00:07:00] that transformation could be a micro transformation or it could be a major transformational outcome for them. So in able to do that or being able to do that. As a course creator means that you need to understand how to design your course that includes delivering a transformational measurable result in the end.

    [00:07:21] And according to canto. com content overload is when too many different blog posts and articles and ideas and suggestions cover one specific area. And I know that as entrepreneurs that you’re struggling with that. If you’re talking about something that so many other people are talking about in that same area, it is a huge issue for your business and it has a couple of negative effects.

    [00:07:45] For one, it creates a vast. Quantity of material covering this one topic and it makes it really hard for you to stand out. Another problem is that it turns off a potential audience and they don’t want to shift through [00:08:00] endless content to find the one thing they’re looking to achieve. And you can read that article.

    [00:08:06] We’ll go ahead and put that link to that article in the show notes for you guys on our website. And so, as an entrepreneur, I know you’re struggling with this. I know that you need to understand how to stand out, how to become known, how to become like what I call undisputed leader. And I talk to hundreds of entrepreneurs every single month that are asking, how do I make my course or my program or my service stand out?

    [00:08:30] And it all starts with simplified. Transformational program design. So I want you to write those words down in your memory. If you’re driving your car to say with me transformational course or service or program design. Okay. And that’s what we’re talking about here today. That’s what we teach within the Suite Life company.

    [00:08:53] If you’re looking for a resource beyond this podcast in this area. And so here are some steps I want to give you that you can walk away with though [00:09:00] immediately so that you can take a look at your course. Step number one is if you already have a course, take a look at your curriculum, take a look at it.

    [00:09:11] And if you’re in the process of building your online course, take a look at what you’re proposing to build. And you need to be able to articulate the end results so that people can expect, know what to expect fully. in the end with the transformation they’re going to get from your course. Not just what is the end, but what is the detailed transformation that they can expect.

    [00:09:35] You don’t want to just say, oh, they’ll feel better as a parent if you’re launching a parent coaching course. Or they’ll know how to land speaking gigs if you’re a speaking coach. Or they’ll know how to run or moderate a clubhouse room. Those are all too general. I recommend that you are able to specifically articulate and identify the transformation [00:10:00] like this.

    [00:10:00] So instead of, they’ll feel better as a parent, you should be able to say something about your course like, they will have crafted their parenting plan with confidence. So it’s really specific and you’re talking about how they’re getting the transformation. Or instead of, They’ll know how to land a speaking gig.

    [00:10:18] It’s something to the effect of they will have completed the pitch process to land their dream stages. See, it’s much more specific and it also alludes to how you’re teaching them how to do that. And instead of launching a course that just says, Hey, you know, they’re going to know how to run a great clubhouse room.

    [00:10:36] Instead, we want you to identify the transformation you’re delivering. An example could be they understand the guidelines of moderating inclusive clubhouse rooms. You see the difference in that? So step number one is really taking a good look at your curriculum. Number one, do you actually understand the transformation that you’re giving people?

    [00:10:56] Is that really, really clear to you? And if you [00:11:00] don’t, It’s okay. I don’t want you to feel like, oh my gosh, I can’t believe I don’t know the transformation because I literally speak with entrepreneurs all the time that are like, wow, April, I’ve created this course. I bought all these other course creation programs and I put all this content in there and laid it out.

    [00:11:17] I still can’t articulate the transformation I’m giving people. So if that’s you, just first of all, know that you’re not alone. There’s a lot of people out there talking about how to teach course creation that might not even understand instructional curriculum design. And so that’s not a reflection of you, and it’s certainly not a reflection of your content.

    [00:11:36] So the very first thing to do is to look at the curriculum and be able to clearly Identify the transformation in a detailed description. Number two, create transformational benchmarks. And so let’s talk about what I mean by this. I was just hosting a clubhouse room on this topic last week, and I was asked this question, and a woman said she’s had a course [00:12:00] forever, and they were, I was so excited for her because they were going back through her course and actually understanding the importance.

    [00:12:07] Of transformational course design. They’re going back and they were updating or redoing their course. It’s been this killer course. It’s made a ton of money for years. And she asked me, should I measure the transformation in the whole entire course or also should I do it in each one of the benchmarks, each one of the modules?

    [00:12:26] And here is the answer to that. Yes. As an expert, you need to understand to be able to articulate the sub transformations within each benchmark of your course or of your service. Or really, this applies to any single business model. We teach transformational program development and design that applies to mastermind creation, membership creation.

    [00:12:50] This can apply to a one hour coaching call with somebody. This can apply to any way that you deliver your content. Right now, in this podcast, we’re just talking specifically about [00:13:00] course creation. So, step number two is create transformations within each one of your benchmarks. And take a look and make sure that you understand and that you can articulate in a detailed way the sub transformations within each one of your modules or benchmarks as well.

    [00:13:17] And number three is to curate content the way people learn. Okay, this is really, really important. Understanding that more content does not equal a better course or a program. We talked about that in the beginning, right? So your responsibility is to actually remove the content that does not directly apply to the end result that you are giving.

    [00:13:39] That is step number one, take a look at your course, or if you’re in the process of building the course, take a look at it and say, okay, what doesn’t actually have to be in here to deliver the transformation that I’m guaranteeing people? There’s even more than that. As an entrepreneur, I understand that you’re not an instructional design expert or a [00:14:00] scientific learning expert, but if you’re offering a course, you have to curate curriculum with transformational program or service or coaching design.

    [00:14:10] This is how you lead people to amazing results, and this is how you become an undisputed leader in your, in your space. So I want you to understand this. Most people believe that repeated exposure to material, right? So going over the things that you teach them in each module, and rereading it, and practicing it, and memorizing it.

    [00:14:30] Is like the best way to get people results, but according to the McGraw Center for Teaching Learning at Princeton University, this is super time consuming and is actually less effective. Instead, they recommend making learning difficult in strategic and desirable ways to enhance retention, retrieval, and transfer of knowledge.

    [00:14:56] Let me say that all again. You’re probably going like, whoa, whoa, whoa, you’re talking about Princeton [00:15:00] University, April. I’m a nutritionist or I’m a marketing coach or you know, whatever it is. This totally doesn’t apply to me, but yet it does. As course creators, it is important that we understand instructional design, especially if you are building your company and scaling your business with creating a product that gives people results and they have to go through a process of learning.

    [00:15:23] So let me say that again. A lot of course creators, entrepreneurial course creators out there, put a bunch of content in a course, lay it out in a timeline, and then give people homework for each benchmark. That is truly not the way to get people results in your program. And what we find is just going over their notes or rereading the things that you’ve done.

    [00:15:48] Isn’t necessarily the way to do it. In fact, according to this study by Princeton University, they actually recommend understanding and absorbing [00:16:00] some of your content in your program and intentionally making it difficult, but doing so in desirable ways. creating challenges within your course that people want to overcome, they want to do, and it’s not super easy.

    [00:16:18] But let’s go ahead and dive a little bit more into this because you might just be like totally tuning me out at this point, which I really hope you’re not. Because again, as a course creator, Or somebody that wants to offer a course, it’s important that you understand this in the process of building your curriculum.

    [00:16:36] So desirable difficulties. Let’s kind of dive into that. What does that actually mean? Desirable difficulties is a term that Dr. Robert Bjork from UCLA came up with over 20 years ago and refers to conditions of learning that create challenges for the learners. And even slow down some of the rate of learning, but in the end, they [00:17:00] actually enhance the long term retention of the knowledge and the skills that you’re giving them.

    [00:17:06] So what does this tell us? Okay, this is, this is very advanced instructional design and scientific learning. And I totally get it. You’re like, okay, April, I’m not offering an MBA. I’m like just teaching somebody how to get more YouTube fans or whatever it may be. I totally, totally get it, but you are a course creator and bringing your clients, also known as your students, from one place to another in knowledge or skill is what you’re promising them, right?

    [00:17:33] And therefore, you should include some measure of desirable difficulties. And again, what is that? So let’s take a look at your course. Either you’ve created a course or you’re thinking about creating a course. A desirable difficulty is placing the challenges, certain number of challenges, and everybody’s program is different within your course [00:18:00] that they’re ready module, but really great challenges that your clients are ready.

    [00:18:06] To face in by doing so they get excited about doing it. They want to do it. They want to take what you’ve been teaching them and delivering to them over the past couple of weeks or months or however long your program is and they want to put it into action. It’s hard. It’s really, really hard, but it’s the best kind of heart because they know that doing it is for sure what’s going to raise them from where they are to the next level of where they want to be with you.

    [00:18:35] Here’s an example of this. At my company, at the Suite Life company, we have a program that’s called Your Signature Offer. And we teach small 13 years.

    [00:18:52] As a matter of fact, way back when in 2008, we launched an online course on how to create online courses, like [00:19:00] before the whole entire online world was talking about it. And here is why the process of curating your curriculum and building courses in a way that embraces what you are capable of as an expert, as far as scientific learning, but it also levels up your customers outcome. Your clients, not only retention in your program, but the results in your program. That’s how we build leading entrepreneurs and businesses. And we teach a process in my program called your signature offer that actually takes your thoughts out of your mind and your expertise and puts them into a process that creates what we call transformational program design.

    [00:19:41] It is really hard work, but by the time we actually teach that in my Your Signature Offer program, people are ready for that. And so they’ve gone through the places in the benchmarks where they’re like, okay, bring it on. I am so amped up for [00:20:00] this. I’m totally aggro. I’m ready to grow. It’s going to be great work.

    [00:20:03] This is good, important work because they’re ready for it. If we created huge challenges for them throughout the whole entire program, they would never do it. If we created no challenges for them throughout the program, they would learn nothing and they’d have no transformation. So I always love kind of showing you guys behind the scenes on our company and how we do things.

    [00:20:23] So let’s take that example and let’s look at your course or your program that you’re creating or that you have already launched. Do you have desirable levels of difficulty that are strategically placed that cause challenges that enhance the outcome and the transformation people are getting within your course?

    [00:20:45] If you don’t, then it’s time to take a look at that. And if you feel like you’re totally having a panic attack right now, and you’re like, Oh my gosh, I don’t even know where to start. Then cruise over to signatureoffer. com and you can join one [00:21:00] of my next whiteboarding sessions. I do these whiteboarding sessions for free all the time.

    [00:21:04] And we’ll whiteboard out your course together. Or like I said, join me on clubhouse. At noon on Wednesday, the week this show drops, and we’ll, we’ll be diving into this together. And here are some things I want for you to consider as we’re wrapping up this really important episode here on the show. Number one, understand that action is part of your client’s learning process.

    [00:21:29] But how are you going to implement that action? What is the difference between them taking action and you just giving them work to say you gave them work? Or frankly, you giving them no work because you just wanted your course easy to get through. Where is the measure there based on the transformation that you are promising they’ll receive from your course?

    [00:21:49] Number two, create challenges at the right points within your program. Not just to create these challenges, but understand when and where people are ready [00:22:00] to be challenged. And of course, number three, which is how we started out this show, cut the content and focus on the transformation and the output of the process that you are teaching.

    [00:22:12] More content is not better. And if you take anything away from this episode, because I know we talked about a lot. Number one is to simplify the content within your course. Don’t overload people with more and more and more content. Instead, look at the content within your course or your program and ask yourself, how am I going to make this transformational at every single touch point within what I’m delivering to my clients?

    [00:22:41] If you want to take your course, you want your course to take the lead in your space. You’re going to need to design it like a leader designs courses. And this applies to many courses, signature courses, and frankly, any program that requires learning and implementation based on the [00:23:00] information that you teach.

    [00:23:02] Ooh. So we talked about a lot of things today, today in episode number 222, here on this Suite Life Entrepreneur Business Podcast, we are talking about how to launch a transformational online course. This again is for those of you guys who are just starting to scale your business with online courses.

    [00:23:20] Whether you have had a course for years, like the woman I was speaking to in Clubhouse, or you’re just now trying to tap into the power of scaling your business through online courses. Understand that launching a course alone is not enough. Also understand that the completion of online courses has fallen so much that you have to understand how to engineer your curriculum in order to get people transformational, measurable, predictable results.

    [00:23:47] And the resources we have for you again are join me in clubhouse. Let’s have a conversation about this. I’m happy to dive in, roll up my sleeves and link arms with you in our regular weekly clubhouse room on Wednesdays at noon. Again, [00:24:00] follow me at April beach and we’ll dive in with this together. Or I want you to also check out signatureoffer.

    [00:24:09] com if you’re to the place where you’re ready to take the lead in your industry and you want to make sure that the courses that you’re developing are transformational industry leading courses, that is where you get the steps to do it. Again, that’s And all of the show notes from this episode here can be found by visiting SweetLifeCo.

    [00:24:32] com. And I kind of geeked out on the research for this one, so in those show notes, there’s a couple of really important resources. We have actually put the Princeton resource in there for you as well, as well as I’m putting a link to how to create strategic levels of difficulty from Dr. Robert Bjork here in the show notes as well.

    [00:24:55] So if you want to dive in deeper to that, I’ve made sure all these resources are here for you. All right, you [00:25:00] guys, thanks so much for tuning into the show. I can’t wait to talk to you again next week on another podcast that delivers a business coaching. You can take to the bank. You guys have an awesome week. Bye bye for now.


    How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking with April Beach and Heather Sager (Episode 297)

    How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking


    This Episode is Great For: 

    Entrepreneurs looking to get in front of your ideal audience and establish yourself as an expert in your space but you’re not exactly sure how to go about it through the process of speaking. 


    If you’re an entrepreneur and you’re looking to get in front of your ideal audience, establish yourself as a trusted source and solution, and sell more of your signature programs, services or offers, speaking as a great way to do that. However there are strategic steps that should be followed in order to achieve your ideal outcome, and what we learn in speaking to this weeks guest is that you can actually send clients away by saying the wrong things.
    And this weeks show, Heather Seger, strategic speaking advisor, guides you through her four step speak for authority method To fill your programs using speaking. Heather also dives into statistics speakers need to know, how to tell the right story, and expert insights to make sure you are speaking up in the right way, to the right audience, about the right topics. 

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Understand the four steps to the “speak for authority method”
    2. Know how to nail your message
    3. And understand quick strategies to choose your signature talk topic
    Resources mentioned: 
    To access Heathers incredible resources go to
    More about what we do and how you can work with us:

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    00:00:00] April Beach: Hi guys, and welcome back to the show. You have tapped into the summer series here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, and I’m April Beach recording this intro for you from my front porch here, just outside of Boulder, Colorado. If you’re watching this video, you’re gonna see I have a fire on and it’s actually raining here in Colorado.

    [00:00:19] April Beach: I don’t know, our climate’s totally changed. It is June and we have had rain every day. But I love recording podcast episodes for you guys. Where you can really see behind the scenes of how we do things. This, we’ve been recording this show for almost six years and and I love just kind of unpacking the behind the scenes for you, especially during summertime.

    [00:00:38] April Beach: So this is a special summer series we are doing for you and what we’ve done is we are. Replaying some of our most powerful and popular episodes here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast because they’re so good. I need to make sure you didn’t miss them. Don’t forget, we are known for delivering podcast episodes that other coaches will [00:01:00] charge you hundreds and thousands of dollars for, and everything we do here is to pour into you first.

    [00:01:05] April Beach: And so the episodes that I’ve picked to replay and bring that back up to the surface for the summer series are ones that you’re gonna be able to apply to your business immediately today. And make more money. Improve your programs, improve your operations, and generate more leads. And this is one of those episodes.

    [00:01:22] April Beach: So this is episode number 297, technically but is it is a replay of episode number 211. And so you’re gonna hear some other links in this episode. All of the show notes have been updated for you and can be found by visiting But if you go to the old links in the episode, in the past episode that we’re replaying, you’ll also find all the assets that we promised here for you. So never fear.

    [00:01:53] April Beach: Now we are diving into how to actually increase your program sales through speaking in our [00:02:00] guest is Heather Sager. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, if you’re one of our clients and you’re in our programs, you know Heather Sager, she was actually on the episode on a show a few months ago, and we recorded a similar episode specifically for you guys who are speaking to license your training programs.

    [00:02:20] April Beach: Now this episode is the version for those of you guys who are trying to bookkeep speaking engagements more to sell your B2C side of your business. We just did an episode recently about B2B. This one’s going back to B2C. So if you’re trying to fill up your courses, fill up your programs, fill up your mastermind, fill up your MRI, or your membership, or your live virtual event, or your retreat, this is the podcast episode for you.

    [00:02:43] April Beach: And I felt like it was important because we talked about the. Corporate B2B side of it recently to bring this one back up to light for the rest of you. Enjoy everything here can again be found by visiting Sweet Life, episode number [00:03:00] 297, and all of Heather’s assets that we have here for you as well.

    [00:03:04] April Beach: Thanks so much for tuning in, hanging out with me here on the front porch, or if you’re listening by audio. Thank you so much for listening over the summer. This is our Sweet Life Summer podcast series and I am so glad that you are here. Dive into the episode and enjoy.

    [00:03:22] April Beach: You are listening to the sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster. With business mentor and entrepreneur, activator a April Beach.

    [00:03:40] April Beach: Hey you guys and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 211 and I’m April Beach. Super great to be connected with you today we are diving in, we’re talking about how to fill your programs using guest speaking, and we have Heather Seger, the one and only in the house. So what you can expect from today’s show [00:04:00] is if you are a coach or a consultant and you’re really good at what you do, even the leading expert in your space, but you’re having trouble getting noticed, well, speaking could be a really powerful way. To establish yourself as a leader and get in front of the perfect audience.

    [00:04:15] April Beach: And so today we’re talking all about the steps to do that and giving you the methodology from the expert herself, Heather Sager. But real quick, before we jump into that, if you’re new to hearing this show, welcome. This is The Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. And we give you step-by-step business trainings that are so good. There’s no way they should be free. You can find all the resources we have by visiting sweet life

    [00:04:41] April Beach: And if you’re interested in scaling your business, developing your signature program, signature methods, signature offers in truly scaling your business to live life on your terms for massive profit, then we would love to help you get to that place. Visit sweet life That is our ninja skill and that’s what [00:05:00] we do. All right, diving into today’s episode. This is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my start to scale up system. So we like to tag these episodes in advance so you know whether or not this is really a good, good opportunity for you to learn and grow based on the phase of business you’re in.

    [00:05:17] April Beach: So if you aren’t sure what phase of business you’re in, and therefore what you should be focusing on right now, you can go and take a very short quiz just by visiting sweet life And we’ll give you a full download of exactly where you are in your business growth and development, and exactly what you should be focusing on right now so that you can grow your company faster.

    [00:05:41] April Beach: So that’s one resource I wanted to share with you. And along those lines, this particular episode is for those of you who are in phases two, three, or four of that start to scale up system. So hopefully that will equip you to know whether or not you should [00:06:00] hang out with us any longer. And I’ll tell you, if you’re in this phase, you are not going to want to miss this episode.

    [00:06:06] April Beach: And one other quick housekeeping announcement. I know that we have probably been talking about Clubhouse way too much, but I wanted to let you know that you can connect with us and connect with our Sweet Life podcast guest experts by following me on Clubhouse. I am at. April Beach on Clubhouse, and we now host a weekly room at 12 o’clock every single Wednesday.

    [00:06:33] April Beach: And that is Eastern Standard Time. So if you wanna be on the hot seat, if you want my eyes and your business to help you strategize your next steps, find us on Clubhouse and subscribe to our clubhouse updates. If you are not on Clubhouse yet, or if you just want the updates, you can visit sweet life

    [00:06:53] April Beach: And we’ll keep you in the loop of what’s happening on Clubhouse while you might be waiting to get on the app. And we’ll send you reminders and [00:07:00] invitations to our upcoming rooms. So I know that was a lot of information and you can find all the information I just shared with you in the resources for these show notes, which is going to okay.

    [00:07:17] April Beach: Let me introduce you to our fabulous guest on today’s show. You get to hear from Heather Sager. Heather helps entrepreneurs structure their ideas, clarify their message, and hone their speaking skills so they can deliver magnetic live presentations, videos, and workshops to grow their authority, whether on a physical or a virtual stage. She’s spoken on stages around the world teaching six to seven figure business owners how to grow their company using effective communication. She also works one-on-one with business owners to prep them for the stage and help you manage and prepare your message for the most impact. So, Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. Again, all of those [00:08:00] amazing resources that I shared and everything we’re talking about with Heather can be found by visiting Sweet Life one.

    [00:08:17] April Beach: All right, you guys. Welcome back to another awesome episode here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Business Podcast, and I am visited today by none other than Heather Sager. And what we’re talking about is something that’s so important, I know many of you guys have questions about. So we are immediately diving into how to fill your programs using guest speaking.

    [00:08:38] April Beach: So Heather, thank you so much for being on the show today. Give yourself an awesome intro. An intro that you deserve cuz you’re very powerful at gudy people. Amazing results. Anna, tell everybody about what you do.

    [00:08:48] Heather Sager: Thank you so much. I’m thrilled to be here. Thanks for the chance to serve your audience today and talk about pressure on an intro.

    [00:08:56] April Beach: I mean, I’m being honest. I will say behind the scenes, so I [00:09:00] have followed Heather on Instagram and it’s one of those things where you’ve been connected and a little bit connected, but not completely connected, and I knew that you guys needed to hear from Heather. So very excited to have you here.

    [00:09:11] Heather Sager: Thank you. Thank you for that. So as April said, I’m Heather Sager. So I’m a speaking coach for online entrepreneurs. And essentially what that means, I always joke that I teach people how to do the thing that most people fear more than death, which is public speaking. And in the online space, uh, it’s kind of funny because we think about public speaking back.

    [00:09:31] Heather Sager: If y’all worked in corporate ever, how you think about getting up in front of a group and giving a presentation or teaching a workshop, or we think about speakers as the people who live their life on the road at conferences, on big stages, and none of those things seem to really fit in the online space of coaches and course creators and and online entrepreneurs.

    [00:09:50] Heather Sager: And what I like to remind people is the fact that as business owners, we speak to people every single day. So we are already speakers. It’s not like a label [00:10:00] that we just all of a sudden adopt. We’re already speakers, and so I, what I do is I teach people how to do it with intention and purpose. So what they speak about actually connects back to not only what they’re passionate about, but also what they do in their business.

    [00:10:13] Heather Sager: I think your voice has the potential to be a magnet for other people, for them to go, Ooh, I, not only do I like her, I wanna learn more from her. And the more that you get out and use your voice on different platforms, the more you pull people back with you that they’ll want to join your programs and hang out with you more and buy from you.

    [00:10:31] Heather Sager: So that’s what I do. My background is like many entrepreneurs is in corporate where for years I spoke on stages around the world as a corporate trainer. Where I taught actually entrepreneurs in the medical space, so doctors and their teams. I taught them customer service and sales. Two very taboo topics in the medical space, right?

    [00:10:55] Heather Sager: Let’s tell you, as a 27 year old kid, it felt like [00:11:00] teaching doctors how to sell, how to talk about what they did, how to talk to their teams, how to talk to their patients. That was an intimidating task at hand, so I had to learn how to speak in a very different way. I had to learn how to be influential and persuasive with an audience who was highly skeptical of my experience, my age, everything about me.

    [00:11:22] Heather Sager: And so that’s where I got my like big girl chops around speaking. That’s where I had to fight through all my own insecurities about being a. I always talked about being like a baby nugget on a stage, being an unexperienced or inexperienced professional, like I had to work through all of those mental issues we go through.

    [00:11:39] Heather Sager: I had to do that in a very highly publicized, highly criticized space, but I did damn good job, and I realized that while I love my job as a trainer, what I really loved was. Teaching people how to use their voice for good. And I got really good at storytelling. I got really good at the body [00:12:00] language and the hand gestures and all those things that come with speaking that are more than just the message.

    [00:12:05] Heather Sager: And I started getting people asking me, could you teach me how to do that on a stage? Or could you teach me how to lead a workshop? And I found all of my free time in corporate was teaching my peers and other businesses how to do what I was doing. And at some point I was like, Ugh. I don’t wanna do this for anybody else anymore.

    [00:12:22] Heather Sager: Why don’t I just do this full time? So I made the leap like many do, which is let me start my own business and help other people do the thing that I love. But here’s the kicker. It wasn’t just about speaking, it was about speaking with purpose, because I think speaking is like gasoline on a fire. I think speaking is one of the best marketing strategies that we can use in our business, and I think people treat it as a skill, but speaking is actually a strategy.

    [00:12:48] April Beach: Mm. So many things that I wanna say, right, right now about all, about all those things. First of all, now you guys know I wanted Heather on the show. Fire. Fire, right? Fire, fire, fire. [00:13:00] That was like, okay, we can just end it. Just go work with Heather and she’s gonna help you be just this insane speaker. You know, really?

    [00:13:07] April Beach: You said so many things though. So as business developers, and obviously that’s what we do at the Sweet Life Company, we help. People develop their programs and we help them develop life-changing programs and offers and these amazing services. Right? And one of the things that they are always asking about is, but how do I separate myself from other businesses that are delivering these same type of results?

    [00:13:32] April Beach: Besides doing it within the. Framework of my program, like how do I stand out? And it always comes back to taking the authority on what you know, in stepping out and speaking about it. So that’s the first thing. And I can’t wait to dive into the strategies we’re gonna talk about here today on the show, but something else that you said that it’s so true is that you’re speaking to people all the time.

    [00:13:54] April Beach: It doesn’t always have to be a webinar or an actual live event, but when as an online [00:14:00] entrepreneur, when you have the opportunity to actually speak to somebody and take them on a journey that you have pre crafted, it is a skill and that’s how you get people to follow you that are the right. People and I, I wanna just kind of pause for a second saying, even if you’re listening to the show and you’re like, well, you know, speaking doesn’t fit into my business model, listen to what Heather’s saying because you’re already speaking, so let’s make it so you don’t suck at it.

    [00:14:24] April Beach: Right? Let’s make every single moment that you are having the, honestly, the privilege. Just like I just feel very blessed and privileged that people listen to the podcast, right? All of us, when somebody is listening to what we have to say. It is a very unique opportunity and a privilege to be able to speak to these people.

    [00:14:43] April Beach: So what we say and how we say it is incredibly, incredibly important. So just love everything that you said there and, and I appreciate how direct you are about the importance of this. So you help establish business owners really take the lead [00:15:00] in doing so by speaking and increase what I love, of course, is the sale of their programs.

    [00:15:05] April Beach: So, Talk about how you do that. You have a very special method, and I’m gonna tout Heather’s method here for a second. By the way, if you all don’t have a method we need, we want you to have a method to make you known and to gain the trust of the people you’re leading. Talk to us about your method in, what is that called, and can you guide us through your method today?

    [00:15:25] Heather Sager: Yes, 100%. I love methods. We were sharing our love of frameworks and methods and just easier ways to help people understand what it is you do, right? We all think things make sense in our own heads, but really our own heads are a very special place that only we understand. So we have to be able to articulate them.

    [00:15:41] Heather Sager: So my signature method that I teach inside my program speak up to Level Up. It’s where I teach online course creators and coaches how to leverage speaking in a way that’s gonna grow their business. We walk through something I call the speak for Authority method. And the reason why we call it the Speak for Authority method is every business owner has different [00:16:00] goals related to speaking.

    [00:16:01] Heather Sager: Some people might be like, Hey, I wanna get paid to speak $10,000 for a keynote, or $40,000 for a keynote. That’s one strategy. But when it comes to speaking, there are several strategies that you can apply. One can be growing your the revenue in your program, so selling from stages. Another could be driving leads to your social media accounts, or leads to your list, or leads to your offers.

    [00:16:22] Heather Sager: Another one could be just. Not peeing your pants when you go live on a platform. It could just be growing your confidence, but I think throughout all of it, speaking is like a business card for your business. In all of these, they’re authority boosting activities that when you grow your authority, you have the ability to.

    [00:16:41] Heather Sager: Charge more, get on better stages. Network with the people that you wanna network with, collaborate with the business partnerships you wanna have when you have authority, which is clout, where people see you as the go-to in your field. It seems like doors open naturally. So if you aren’t known, if people don’t know who you [00:17:00] are, you could be the best at what you do.

    [00:17:01] Heather Sager: But until other people point at you and say she knows what she’s doing, or he’s an expert in this, by the way, you don’t say you’re an expert. You let other people do that for you. Until that moment comes, it doesn’t really matter how good your program is. You have to articulate it, make it sound like a big deal, and get other people talking about it.

    [00:17:18] Heather Sager: And that’s where growing your authority becomes a really important thing.

    [00:17:22] April Beach: Wow. Okay. Yeah. So talk to us about this Speak for Authority method, and I love how you preface it by saying that the reason why it’s so important is because all these goals are absolutely important, and they do apply probably to every single person listening to this show.

    [00:17:37] April Beach: So what is the first part of this method? Where does somebody start when they wanna take action on this?

    [00:17:44] Heather Sager: Yeah, you’re gonna love this one cuz this right, goes right up your alley of what you teach, which is number one is nail your messaging. What do I mean by that Is you have to nail who are you talking to?

    [00:17:55] Heather Sager: What do you have to offer and how do you talk about those core [00:18:00] offerings, your messaging? So what’s interesting is the first time I, I taught my program, when I started working with groups of entrepreneurs versus one-on-one, I started by going, let’s create your talk. And I would start extracting ideas out of their head and formulating a signature talk with them.

    [00:18:17] Heather Sager: And what I realized pretty quickly was, oh my gosh, this was the first time they were vocalizing their ideas. And some of them didn’t even have their programs fully formatted or organized in a way that really got people results. So I found out, you know what? When people start moving from just writing down their ideas or drawing out their ideas, when they start articulating their ideas, That’s when they realize, oh, this either makes sense or it doesn’t.

    [00:18:43] Heather Sager: So step number one, nailing your messaging means that you are not just thinking off, like speaking off the cuff or winging it all the time. Here’s this big myth that happens a lot of times when we see experts or we see influencers on a podcast or on a [00:19:00] video or on clubhouse, we think, oh, they’re just so naturally gifted.

    [00:19:05] Heather Sager: But here’s the thing. These people have been talking about these things over and over and over and over again. Mm-hmm. They know what they’re talking about. It’s not by chance, it’s on purpose. Now, sometimes it’s by chance because they’ve just done it enough where they don’t know, but they have discovered what their core talking parts are.

    [00:19:19] Heather Sager: You have to understand what should you and what should you not be talking about to lead people into your business, not lead them to other people’s businesses. Like there is a difference. You could talk about a lot of things, but if you don’t have your messaging nailed, you could be providing a lot of education, but then serving them up open doors to have other people help them because they don’t realize how it connects back to you.

    [00:19:44] Heather Sager: So, Wow.

    [00:19:45] April Beach: Okay. I’m gonna totally put you on the spot here. Yes, please. Go. Because ev, because everybody’s saying like, oh my gosh, shoot. Am I doing this? Am I? Because everybody wants to be out there and sharing information and great value. Can you give us an example of how sharing some [00:20:00] information as in a particular way may lead somebody to go work with somebody else?

    [00:20:04] Heather Sager: Yeah, I’ll give you me as an example. Okay. I talk about speaking, right, and I want you to imagine, uh, speaking, this is like this giant ocean of information. It’s in the, the marketing ocean. There’s so many different things we can speak about and one or two times I did podcast episodes or interviews where people are like, oh, speaking on camera.

    [00:20:20] Heather Sager: Heather, will you come talk about getting over your fear of the camera? And I’m like, sure, I love this. This is within my, my wheelhouse. But what I realized is when I would start doing all these interviews that were specific to getting over your fear of the camera or going live on Facebook or all these things, which I, I do teach, what I realized was my messaging was really specific to social media speaking, and my offer is how do you speak on all kinds of stages?

    [00:20:48] Heather Sager: Get your messaging down. Use guest stages. Yes, use your stages. But the speaking on lives and Instagram stories was such a minute point. I don’t want people to know me as the person to help you get over your fear of the camera, right? [00:21:00] Like that’s not what my program is about. Even though I have episodes around it.

    [00:21:04] Heather Sager: Like the messaging, while it was a good relevant topic, it wasn’t core messaging that’s gonna drive back to my program, speak up to level up. I mean, it’s a lesson in my program, but it’s not the core concept, right? So I think a lot of times this thing that happens is we’re like, oh, it’s within the wheelhouse.

    [00:21:21] Heather Sager: Well, you have to think about is it like a neighbor down the block in your content or is it like on the block, like on your street, in the house that you’re trying to attract people to? Wow,

    [00:21:31] April Beach: that’s so important. Okay. I’m just gonna take a little left hand turn tangent here. Yes. Do as we are all diving into, or as many people as or possibly can, we’re driving into Clubhouse, for example, I just did the recording of this, hosted a a welcome.

    [00:21:47] April Beach: Event room for a bunch of women entrepreneurs last night and they were all asking, what should I be talking about in these rooms? And I feel grateful. Now, I didn’t totally lead them astray, but it was always coming back to, cuz [00:22:00] I’m obviously not the speaking coach, but it was always back, what do you wanna be known for?

    [00:22:04] April Beach: And I think that this is so exactly important, what you said, because. There are so many things that we can talk about. I can, you know, talk about a million components of, of our program as well in, in the ways and other things that are like supporting evidence, supporting document, but not that main nugget.

    [00:22:21] April Beach: So what I’m hearing you say in what I want all of you guys to hear is what Heather’s saying is that go for, go after what you wanna be known for. This is also important why we have your signature program created so we know what we’re selling people into. So it aligns with your program. So important. And I think that there are so many people that are just looking for any opportunity to get in front of an audience that they are willing to speak on.

    [00:22:44] April Beach: Oh, I can speak on that. Oh, sure. I can speak on that. Yeah. And what you’re saying is that is not strategy. Let’s be very strategic and make sure that in the little amount of time that somebody is willing to give you attention to hear what you have to say, that you are making a good [00:23:00] use of that and establishing an understanding of who you are, who your brand is, and the, and the end results you provide.

    [00:23:05] Heather Sager: Bingo. So powerful and let me give you a visual for that because I wanna make sure you aren’t hearing me say, don’t ever talk about those things. Right. Okay. I want you to imagine, do you remember back in, I don’t know, some kind of math class when we were in school, the something called a sca, I think it’s called a scattergram.

    [00:23:20] Heather Sager: It’s like the graph that you would draw with the dots and it’s like when you would have a point, it’d be like all these dots and you’d look for the trends of the dots. Maybe this is a terrible example, but go with me here for a second.

    [00:23:30] April Beach: I’m sticking with you. You guys should see behind the scenes in the recording. My, I’m like, uh,

    [00:23:35] Heather Sager: So if you think about like mapping the dots, like mapping different coordinates. Yeah. But I want you thinking about is you want to map. Like the bulk of your coordinates, i e the bulk of your speaking to your signature offer. But if you have a little dab like, oop, I’m gonna talk about this because it’s sexy, or oop, I’m gonna talk like, I’ll do a room talking about how do you do your voice on clubhouse?

    [00:23:54] Heather Sager: Not what I teach, but it’s a sexy topic that people want. Like if my little scattergram. Gosh, I hope that’s what it’s [00:24:00] called. If I have like a couple beeps and boobs of topics that are outside of my core, that is not gonna dilute what I’m known for. It’s just gonna expand it. But if I spend too much time outside of my core topic, then I will be unforgettable because there’s no repetition on my core topic of people seeing over and over again.

    [00:24:17] Heather Sager: Oh, I wanna speak on guest stages. Heather Sagers the speaking coach for online entrepreneurs. Oh, you wanna know how you speak into the strategy. Heather Sagers the coach To help you with that, like you have to make sure your repetition in your wheelhouse is happening in order to earn the right to have those scattered topics.

    [00:24:32] April Beach: Absolutely awesome visual. Thank you so much. I have no idea what you’re talking about because frankly I think I was skipping school in stoned every high school math class, but, but just keeping it real. With that being said, I can totally get the visual and that completely makes sense. My teenage boys are gonna listen to this podcast and

    [00:24:53] Heather Sager: yeah, it’s cool.

    [00:24:54] Heather Sager: Your mom’s super cool.

    [00:24:57] April Beach: At me. Oh, they, they’ve heard all the [00:25:00] stories. Okay. I am redeemed. Woohoo. Anyway. Yes. Totally makes sense. Okay, so you are going to be unforgettable. The closer you stay to what I’m hearing you say, the core of the center of that scattergram, like the primary message, so powerful. Super.

    [00:25:17] April Beach: Awesome. All right, so step number one is like we’re still at step number one, you guys. Yeah. This is how goal, the information that Heather has given you here. So nailing that message and deciding what we’re talking about. So the second step in that is obviously an extension of that. The second step you say is creating the actual signature talk itself. Share a little bit about how to go about doing

    [00:25:39] Heather Sager: that. Yeah, so for those of you who like cooking, I love cooking. Imagine step one is like your masen Plus, where you get all your ingredients out and you know what you’re going to make. Step two is actually following the recipe to build your delicious food, whatever you’re making your meal, so your signature talk.

    [00:25:57] Heather Sager: You’re not coming up with random things on the fly. It’s [00:26:00] strategic because you’ve already done that homework. So your signature talk needs to guide your audience from where they are. To where you want them to go, which doesn’t have to be like, haha, I’m gonna trick you to buy my program. You need to guide them in their thinking and equip them with the tools to be successful on whatever transformation they want.

    [00:26:18] Heather Sager: Your program just helps ’em do it faster. So your signature talk, it has to include stories. You have to be speaking to people’s beliefs. You have to be hitting that really good balance around insights and awareness and speaking to where they are. But gone are the days where you can just talk about the why fluffy stuff for your whole talk.

    [00:26:39] Heather Sager: People hate that. Yeah. They know when they’re being sold or when somebody’s bringing flas. So people in today’s market want tangible. Tips and strategies. So you have to balance your talk with both. How do you provide insights and teach people how to think differently about your topic? You can’t skip over that because if you do, when they go back in their business and try to [00:27:00] apply it and something’s off, you haven’t equipped them with the right context for them to be successful, to be able to maneuver it in the context of their business.

    [00:27:07] Heather Sager: So you have to teach ’em how to think, and then you have to give them some tips and strategies. How I recommend people do that. Is, uh, you teach the why and then you teach the what, and it’s gonna get a little technical, but I feel like your audience might love it. My format that I follow with people is you go, why, what?

    [00:27:23] Heather Sager: How? Easy model for a presentation and you sandwich it with an opening story and a closing story, like not rocket science. That’s what I work with every client on. Opening story. Closing story in the middle of the sandwich is the what, why, and how. And if you’ve worked with April and you’ve been around her world, the what section is essentially your method.

    [00:27:40] Heather Sager: So you’re almost there. You just need to work on, okay, how do I get this messaging in and what’s the right place to talk about in the how to make people hungry for more? But your signature talk should be like an accordion where you can deliver a signature talk in five minutes because you know your talking points, but you also can expand it and make it, I mean, a full day [00:28:00] workshop, maybe even a full course, right?

    [00:28:02] Heather Sager: So you should be able to know what your talking points are within your signature talk, and that becomes your business card on those guest stages.

    [00:28:10] April Beach: And it perfectly segues into purchasing your signature program. Yeah, and I mean, this is just absolutely the journey that you take people on it and how you nail and get it and get people really understanding what you do in your zone of genius.

    [00:28:24] April Beach: Couple of questions for you about the stories. Do you find, and maybe there isn’t a right or wrong answer, but I’m just asking the questions. I think that possibly your audience is hearing, we should totally do a clubhouse room on this, like in conjunction Yes. I’d love with this, with the, the week we dropped this, we should, we should do a clubhouse room and take q and a.

    [00:28:41] April Beach: I’m here for it and that would be so much fun. So, Talking about, really quickly about the stories, are they usually a story about another client? Personal stories about how the expert themself or the leader has overcome? Like what type of stories? I mean are we making people cry? Does it depend on the context when we’re talking about [00:29:00] stories in general?

    [00:29:00] April Beach: Is there a quicker, seriously, you guys follow us on Clubhouse? Cuz Heather and I are gonna do this. I’m just putting her on the spot right now. We’re gonna host a clubhouse room on this. So what, just join our clubhouse room and you can ask your story questions. Go to our Instagram bio. It’s go to Heather’s Instagram bio.

    [00:29:16] Heather Sager: I’ll give you, lemme give you a little teaser. The secret to good storytelling is knowing what emotion you want people to feel. That’s the key thing. You have to be intentional with the emotions you want to evoke. So for example, when I was working with Tyler McCall last month, we wanted people to feel heart, but we also wanted to laugh.

    [00:29:34] Heather Sager: So we talked, we did a story about the time he went to forestry camp and was too embarrassed to tell his father that he had to take a dump. So we had to go home. So like outside of the cont I very weird left story about like 11 year old Tyler. That was one story. But like you have to catch people off guard, but you have to know what emotions are you going for and obviously your stories have to have a point.

    [00:29:55] Heather Sager: There was a business lesson in that story, I promise you. Yes. I’m sure there was. Yes. We’re [00:30:00] too like on the nose. Mm-hmm. With our stories where like, I hate this people’s signature story where they’re like, let me tell you about my perfectly curated journey, which pumped me out of this perfect place to be your expert.

    [00:30:12] Heather Sager: No, I think it’s bullshit. Your audience is not in the exact same space that you were. You can’t say I was in your shoes, because I think it’s obnoxious and rude because you don’t know what their shoes are. I think we have to tell our journey stories differently in a more authentic way if we wanna attract the kind of clients we want.

    [00:30:29] Heather Sager: That’s if you wanna have, I think, authentic, ethical, meaningful relationships that make impact. You have to tell stories differently than what we’ve been told with the bro marketing online.

    [00:30:40] April Beach: Ah, here’s, here’s my clapping. There you go. Nice. Yes. There we go. Okay. Awesome. All right, step and we are gonna do a clubhouse room on this. So let me just say you go to sweet life which is this episode number, and we will make sure there is a link to how you can get into this [00:31:00] clubhouse room and ask, ask Heather your questions. Also, follow us both on Instagram, because we’ll post our events on our Instagram’s accounts, too.

    [00:31:08] April Beach: Heather, what’s your IG handle?

    [00:31:09] Heather Sager: @theHeatherSager.

    [00:31:11] April Beach: @theHeatherSager Awesome. Okay, so step number three. We’ve nailed this signature talk. We are on a roll. What happens next? What’s the next most important thing ?

    [00:31:23] Heather Sager: Okay. So I think as entrepreneurs, we get by a lot by writing things out and typing things in our Google Docs to post on our blogs or whatever else. But if you want to speak, you actually have to speak, which means the first time that you speak your signature talk out loud should not be on a stage. It should be in the privacy of your home office where you can sound like a blubbering idiot because you will. So, so step number three is, Becoming magnetic with our delivery skills.

    [00:31:47] Heather Sager: So you have to learn how to speak in a way that’s captivating and entertaining that serves your audience. Gone are the days where you can just show up and shoot a video on something good, on a how to People’s attention [00:32:00] span are short. Even on live events or like on clubhouse, people can jump in and outta rooms quickly.

    [00:32:05] Heather Sager: So you have to understand that your delivery skills, it’s not just the words you say, how you say it matters more. So you have to think about, am I speaking in just audio right now or am I also, do I have video? When it comes to communication, there’s three parts. The words that you say, how you say those words and your non-verbals, and I think people put disproportionate weight on those.

    [00:32:28] Heather Sager: What it works out to studies that came from Southern California universities in the seventies show that in marketing, when we’re talking about things that have an emotional message, which most of our marketing messaging does, 55% of what we communicate is our non-verbals. So our facial expressions, our gestures with our wow posture over half of what we communicate, which is why video is so powerful in allowing us to see, oh, she’s authentic or she’s not.

    [00:32:52] Heather Sager: Right? Like, video is powerful cuz you see those, right? But 38% of what we communicate is the how we say it. The [00:33:00] intonation, the pace, the volume, the emphasis, those kinds of things. It’s 38% leaving only 70% of our communication to our words. Now as online entrepreneurs we’re used to writing, we’re used to emails, we’re used to captions.

    [00:33:13] Heather Sager: We’re used to putting all the weight there. So it’s scary to think, oh crap, I have to focus on these others, but I see it as a gift. You don’t have to be so precious with your words when you’re speaking. In fact, I screw up all the time. If you rewind this back, I have misspoken, I have, I have strong words together.

    [00:33:30] Heather Sager: Didn’t, didn’t actually make a sentence. I speak like up all the time, wrong words, whatever. You just keep moving because your energy, how you deliver it, and your body language carries you and your message. So if you don’t get intentional with how do you wanna be received, what kind of energy do you wanna create for other people?

    [00:33:46] Heather Sager: What do you want them to feel when they hear you? See you listen to you? If you don’t practice that you’re leaving it to chance. And I don’t know about you, but I don’t, I don’t wanna leave to chance what people say about me. Like I wanna be intentional and be like, damn, I wanna work with [00:34:00] Heather. Or, oh, you need a speaking coach that’s gonna help you bring your energy up.